Produced by Chris Curnow, Lesley Halamek and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
file was produced from images generously made available
by The Internet Archive)



THROUGH THE TELESCOPE




AGENTS


  AMERICA   THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
  64 & 66 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK

  CANADA    THE MACMILLAN COMPANY OF CANADA, LTD.
  27 RICHMOND STREET, TORONTO

  INDIA     MACMILLAN & COMPANY, LTD.
  12 BANK STREET, BOMBAY
  7 NEW CHINA BAZAAR STREET, CALCUTTA

[Illustration:

  PLATE I.

The 40-inch Refractor of the Yerkes Observatory.]




  THROUGH
  THE TELESCOPE

  BY

  JAMES BAIKIE, F.R.A.S.

  WITH 32 FULL-PAGE ILLUSTRATIONS FROM PHOTOGRAPHS
  AND 26 SMALLER FIGURES IN THE TEXT

  [Illustration]

  LONDON
  ADAM AND CHARLES BLACK
  1906




TO

C. N. B. AND H. E. B.




PREFACE


The main object of the following chapters is to give a brief and
simple description of the most important and interesting facts
concerning the heavenly bodies, and to suggest to the general reader
how much of the ground thus covered lies open to his personal survey
on very easy conditions. Many people who are more or less interested
in astronomy are deterred from making practical acquaintance with the
wonders of the heavens by the idea that these are only disclosed to
the possessors of large and costly instruments. In reality there is
probably no science which offers to those whose opportunities and
means of observation are restricted greater stores of knowledge and
pleasure than astronomy; and the possibility of that quickening of
interest which can only be gained by practical study is, in these
days, denied to very few indeed.

Accordingly, I have endeavoured, while recounting the great triumphs
of astronomical discovery, to give some practical help to those who
are inclined to the study of the heavens, but do not know how to
begin. My excuse for venturing on such a task must be that, in the
course of nearly twenty years of observation with telescopes of all
sorts and sizes, I have made most of the mistakes against which others
need to be warned.

The book has no pretensions to being a complete manual; it is merely
descriptive of things seen and learned. Nor has it any claim to
originality. On the contrary, one of its chief purposes has been to
gather into short compass the results of the work of others. I have
therefore to acknowledge my indebtedness to other writers, and notably
to Miss Agnes Clerke, Professor Young, Professor Newcomb, the late
Rev. T. W. Webb, and Mr. W. F. Denning. I have also found much help in
the _Monthly Notices_ and _Memoirs_ of the Royal Astronomical
Society, and the _Journal_ and _Memoirs_ of the British Astronomical
Association.

The illustrations have been mainly chosen with the view of
representing to the general reader some of the results of the best
modern observers and instruments; but I have ventured to reproduce a
few specimens of more commonplace work done with small telescopes. I
desire to offer my cordial thanks to those who have so kindly granted
me permission to reproduce illustrations from their published works,
or have lent photographs or drawings for reproduction--to Miss Agnes
Clerke for Plates XXV.-XXVIII. and XXX.-XXXII. inclusive; to
Mrs. Maunder for Plate VIII.; to M. Loewy, Director of the Paris
Observatory, for Plates XI.-XIV. and Plate XVII.; to Professor E. B.
Frost, Director of the Yerkes Observatory, for Plates I., VII., XV.,
and XVI.; to M. Deslandres, of the Meudon Observatory, for Plate IX.,
and the gift of several of his own solar memoirs; to the Astronomer
Royal for England, Sir W. Mahony Christie, for Plate V.; to Mr. H.
MacEwen for the drawings of Venus, Plate X.; to the Rev. T. E. R.
Phillips for those of Mars and Jupiter, Plates XX. and XXII.; to
Professor Barnard for that of Saturn, Plate XXIV., reproduced by
permission from the _Monthly Notices_ of the Royal Astronomical
Society; to Mr. W. E. Wilson for Plates XXIX. and XXXII.; to Mr. John
Murray for Plates XVIII. and XIX.; to the proprietors of _Knowledge_
for Plate VI.; to Mr. Denning and Messrs. Taylor and Francis for Plate
III. and Figs. 6 and 20; to the British Astronomical Association for
the chart of Mars, Plate XXI., reproduced from the _Memoirs_; and to
Messrs. T. Cooke and Sons for Plate II. For those who wish to see for
themselves some of the wonders and beauties of the starry heavens
the two Appendices furnish a few specimens chosen from an innumerable
company; while readers who have no desire to engage in practical work
are invited to skip Chapters I. and II.




CONTENTS


  CHAPTER                                                         PAGE

     I. THE TELESCOPE--HISTORICAL                                    1

    II. THE TELESCOPE--PRACTICAL                                    14

   III. THE SUN                                                     47

    IV. THE SUN'S SURROUNDINGS                                      68

     V. MERCURY                                                     81

    VI. VENUS                                                       89

   VII. THE MOON                                                   100

  VIII. MARS                                                       130

    IX. THE ASTEROIDS                                              148

     X. JUPITER                                                    154

    XI. SATURN                                                     172

   XII. URANUS AND NEPTUNE                                         190

  XIII. COMETS AND METEORS                                         203

   XIV. THE STARRY HEAVENS                                         230

    XV. CLUSTERS AND NEBULÆ                                        256

        APPENDIX I.: LIST OF LUNAR FORMATIONS                      273

        APPENDIX II.: LIST OF OBJECTS FOR THE TELESCOPE            278

        INDEX                                                      285




LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

PRINTED SEPARATELY FROM THE TEXT


   PLATE                                                 _To face page_

       I. The 40-inch Refractor of the Yerkes Observatory
                                                        [_Frontispiece_

      II. Six-inch Photo-Visual Refractor, equatorially mounted     30

     III. Twenty-inch Reflector, Stanmore Observatory               36

      IV. Telescope House and 8-1/2-inch 'With' Reflector           38

       V. The Sun, February 3, 1905. Royal Observatory,
            Greenwich                                               48

      VI. Photograph of Bridged Sunspot (Janssen). _Knowledge_,
            February, 1890                                          50

     VII. Solar Surface with Faculæ. Yerkes Observatory             60

    VIII. Coronal Streamers: Eclipse of 1898. From Photographs
            by Mrs. Maunder                                         70

      IX. The Chromosphere and Prominences, April 11, 1894.
            Photographed by M. H. Deslandres                        74

       X. Venus. H. MacEwen. Five-inch Refractor                    94

      XI. The Moon, April 5, 1900. Paris Observatory               102

     XII. The Moon, November 13, 1902. Paris Observatory           108

    XIII. The Moon, September 12, 1903. Paris Observatory          110

     XIV. Region of Maginus: Overlapping Craters. Paris
            Observatory                                            112

      XV. Clavius, Tycho, and Mare Nubium. Yerkes Observatory      114

     XVI. Region of Theophilus and Altai Mountains. Yerkes
            Observatory                                            116

    XVII. Apennines, Alps, and Caucasus. Paris Observatory         118

   XVIII. Chart of the Moon. Nasmyth and Carpenter     }
                                                       }           124
     XIX. Key to Chart of Moon. Nasmyth and Carpenter  }

      XX. Mars: Drawing 1, January 30, 1899--12 hours.
            Drawing 2, April 22, 1903--10 hours                    134

     XXI. Chart of Mars. Memoirs of the British Astronomical
            Association, Vol. XI., Part III., Plate VI.            138

    XXII. Jupiter, January 6, 1906--8 hours 20 minutes.
            Instrument, 9-1/4-inch Reflector                       158

   XXIII. Jupiter, February 17, 1906. J. Baikie,
            18-inch Reflector                                      166

    XXIV. Saturn, July 2, 1894. E. E. Barnard,
            36-inch Equatorial                                     172

     XXV. Great Comet. Photographed May 5, 1901, with the
            13-inch Astrographic Refractor of the Royal
            Observatory, Cape of Good Hope                         210

    XXVI. Photographs of Swift's Comet. By Professor E. E.
            Barnard                                                220

   XXVII. Region of the Milky Way in Sagittarius, showing
            a Double Black Aperture. Photographed by Professor
            E. E. Barnard                                          232

  XXVIII. Irregular Star Clusters. Photographed by E. E.
            Barnard                                                256

    XXIX. Cluster M. 13 Herculis. Photographed by Mr. W. E.
            Wilson                                                 258

     XXX. Photograph of the Orion Nebula (W. H. Pickering)         262

    XXXI. Photographs of Spiral Nebulæ. By Dr. Max Wolf            264

   XXXII. Photograph of Whirlpool Nebula (M. 51). Taken by
            Mr. W. E. Wilson, March 6, 1897                        266




LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

PRINTED IN THE TEXT


 FIG.                                                              PAGE

   1. Principle of Galilean Telescope                                3
   2. Principle of Common Refractor                                  3
   3. Dorpat Refractor                                               7
   4. Thirty-inch Refractor, Pulkowa Observatory                     9
   5. Principle of Newtonian Reflector                              11
   6. Lord Rosse's Telescope                                        12
   7. Herschel's 4-foot Reflector                                   13
   8. Star--Correct and Incorrect Adjustment                        21
   9. Small Telescope on Pillar and Claw Stand                      26
  10. Telescope on Tripod, with Finder and Slow Motions             27
  11. Equatorial Mounting for Small Telescope                       29
  12. Eight-inch Refractor on Equatorial Mounting                   32
  13. Four-foot Reflector, equatorially mounted                     36
  14. Drawing of Sunspot                                            52
  15.    "          "                                               53
  16.    "          "                                               56
  17.    "          "                                               57
  18.    "          "                                               58
  19. Eclipses of the Sun and Moon                                  69
  20. Mercury as a Morning Star. W. F. Denning, 10-inch Reflector   84
  21. The Tides                                                    101
  22. Lunar Craters                                                105
  23.   "      "                                                   118
  24. Mars                                                         146
  25. Jupiter                                                      157
  26. Saturn                                                       183




THROUGH THE TELESCOPE




CHAPTER I

THE TELESCOPE--HISTORICAL


The claim of priority in the invention of this wonderful instrument,
which has so enlarged our ideas of the scale and variety of
the universe, has been warmly asserted on behalf of a number of
individuals. Holland maintains the rights of Jansen, Lippershey, and
Metius; while our own country produces evidence that Roger Bacon
had, in the thirteenth century, 'arrived at theoretical proof of the
possibility of constructing a telescope and a microscope' and that
Leonard Digges 'had a method of discovering, by perspective glasses
set at due angles, all objects pretty far distant that the sun shone
on, which lay in the country round about.'

All these claims, however, whether well or ill founded, are very
little to the point. The man to whom the human race owes a debt of
gratitude in connection with any great invention is not necessarily he
who, perhaps by mere accident, may stumble on the principle of it, but
he who takes up the raw material of the invention and shows the full
powers and possibilities which are latent in it. In the present
case there is one such man to whom, beyond all question, we owe the
telescope as a practical astronomical instrument, and that man is
Galileo Galilei. He himself admits that it was only after hearing, in
1609, that a Dutchman had succeeded in making such an instrument,
that he set himself to investigate the matter, and produced telescopes
ranging from one magnifying but three diameters up to the one with a
power of thirty-three with which he made his famous discoveries; but
this fact cannot deprive the great Italian of the credit which is
undoubtedly his due. Others may have anticipated him in theory, or
even to a small extent in practice, but Galileo first gave to the
world the telescope as an instrument of real value in research.

The telescope with which he made his great discoveries was constructed
on a principle which, except in the case of binoculars, is now
discarded. It consisted of a double convex lens converging the rays
of light from a distant object, and of a double concave lens,
intercepting the convergent rays before they reach a focus, and
rendering them parallel again (Fig. 1). His largest instrument, as
already mentioned, had a power of only thirty-three diameters, and the
field of view was very small. A more powerful one can now be obtained
for a few shillings, or constructed, one might almost say, for a
few pence; yet, as Proctor has observed: 'If we regard the absolute
importance of the discoveries effected by different telescopes,
few, perhaps, will rank higher than the little tube now lying in the
Tribune of Galileo at Florence.'

[Illustration: FIG. 1.--PRINCIPLE OF GALILEAN TELESCOPE.]

Galileo's first discoveries with this instrument were made in 1610,
and it was not till nearly half a century later that any great
improvement in telescopic construction was effected. In the middle of
the seventeenth century Scheiner and Huygens made telescopes on the
principle, suggested by Kepler, of using two double convex lenses
instead of a convex and a concave, and the modern refracting telescope
is still constructed on essentially the same principle, though, of
course, with many minor modifications (Fig. 2).

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--PRINCIPLE OF COMMON REFRACTOR.]

The latter part of the seventeenth century witnessed the introduction
of telescopes on this principle of the most amazing length, the
increase in length being designed to minimize the imperfections which
a simple lens exhibits both in definition and in colour. Huygens
constructed one such telescope of 123 feet focal length, which he
presented to the Royal Society of London; Cassini, at Paris, used
instruments of 100 and 136 feet; while Bradley, in 1722, measured the
diameter of Venus with a glass whose focal length was 212-1/4 feet.
Auzout is said to have made glasses of lengths varying from 300 to
600 feet, but, as might have been expected, there is no record of any
useful observations having ever been made with these monstrosities. Of
course, these instruments differed widely from the compact and handy
telescopes with which we are now familiar. They were entirely without
tubes. The object-glass was fastened to a tall pole or to some high
building, and was painfully man[oe]uvred into line with the eye-piece,
which was placed on a support near the ground, by means of an
arrangement of cords. The difficulties of observation with these
unwieldy monsters must have been of the most exasperating type, while
their magnifying power did not exceed that of an ordinary modern
achromatic of, perhaps, 36 inches focal length. Cassini, for instance,
seems never to have gone beyond a power of 150 diameters, which might
be quite usefully employed on a good modern 3-inch refractor in
good air. Yet with such tools he was able to discover four of the
satellites of Saturn and that division in Saturn's ring which still
bears his name. Such facts speak volumes for the quality of the
observer. Those who are the most accustomed to use the almost perfect
products of modern optical skill will have the best conception of,
and the profoundest admiration for, the limitless patience and the
wonderful ability which enabled him to achieve such results with the
very imperfect means at his disposal.

The clumsiness and unmanageableness of these aerial telescopes quickly
reached a point which made it evident that nothing more was to be
expected of them; and attempts were made to find a method of combining
lenses, which might result in an instrument capable of bearing equal
or greater magnifying powers on a much shorter length. The chief
hindrance to the efficiency of the refracting telescope lies in the
fact that the rays of different colours which collectively compose
white light cannot be brought to one focus by any single lens. The red
rays, for example, have a different focal length from the blue, and
so any lens which brings the one set to a focus leaves a fringe of the
other outstanding around any bright object.

In 1729 Mr. Chester Moor Hall discovered a means of conquering this
difficulty, but his results were not followed up, and it was left for
the optician John Dollond to rediscover the principle some twenty-five
years later. By making the object-glass of the telescope double, the
one lens being of crown and the other of flint glass, he succeeded in
obtaining a telescope which gave a virtually colourless image.

This great discovery of the achromatic form of construction at
once revolutionized the art of telescope-making. It was found that
instruments of not more than 5 feet focal length could be constructed,
which infinitely surpassed in efficiency, as well as in handiness,
the cumbrous tools which Cassini had used; and Dollond's 5-foot
achromatics, generally with object-glasses of 3-3/4 inches diameter,
represented for a considerable time the acme of optical excellence.
Since the time of Dollond, the record of the achromatic refractor has
been one of continual, and, latterly, of very rapid progress. For
a time much hindrance was experienced from the fact that it proved
exceedingly difficult to obtain glass discs of any size whose purity
and uniformity were sufficient to enable them to pass the stringent
test of optical performance. In the latter part of the eighteenth
century, a 6-inch glass was considered with feelings of admiration,
somewhat similar to those with which we regard the Yerkes 40-inch
to-day; and when, in 1823, the Dorpat refractor of 9-6/10 inches was
mounted (Fig. 3), the astronomical world seemed to have the idea that
something very like finality had been reached. The Dorpat telescope
proved, however, to be only a milestone on the path of progress.
Before very long it was surpassed by a glass of 12 inches diameter,
which Sir James South obtained from Cauchoix of Paris, and which is
now mounted in the Dunsink Observatory, Dublin. This, in its turn,
had to give place to the fine instruments of 14·9 inches which were
figured by Merz of Munich for the Pulkowa and Cambridge (U.S.A.)
Observatories; and then there came a pause of a few years, which was
broken by Alvan Clark's completion of an 18-1/2-inch, an instrument
which earned its diploma, before ever it left the workshop of its
constructor, by the discovery of the companion to Sirius.

[Illustration: FIG. 3.--DORPAT REFRACTOR.]

The next step was made on our side of the Atlantic, and proved to be
a long and notable one, in a sense definitely marking out the boundary
line of the modern era of giant refractors. This was the completion,
by Thomas Cooke, of York, of a 25-inch instrument for the late Mr.
Newall. It did not retain for long its pride of place. The palm was
speedily taken back to America by Alvan Clark's construction of the
26-inch of the Washington Naval Observatory, with which Professor
Asaph Hall discovered in 1877 the two satellites of Mars. Then came
Grubb's 27-inch for Vienna; the pair of 30-inch instruments, by Clark
and Henry respectively, for Pulkowa (Fig. 4) and Nice; and at last the
instrument which has for a number of years been regarded as the finest
example of optical skill in the world, the 36-inch Clark refractor of
the Lick Observatory, California. Placed at an elevation of over 4,000
feet, and in a climate exceptionally well suited for astronomical
work, this fine instrument has had the advantage of being handled by a
very remarkable succession of brilliant observers, and has, since
its completion, been looked to as a sort of court of final appeal in
disputed questions. But America has not been satisfied even with
such an instrument, and the 40-inch Clark refractor of the Yerkes
Observatory is at present the last word of optical skill so far as
achromatics are concerned (Frontispiece). It is not improbable that it
may also be the last word so far as size goes, for the late Professor
Keeler's report upon its performance implies that in this splendid
telescope the limit of practicable size for object-glasses is being
approached. The star images formed by the great lens show indications
of slight flexure of the glass under its own weight as it is turned
from one part of the sky to another. It would be rash, however, to
say that even this difficulty will not be overcome. So many obstacles,
seemingly insuperable, have vanished before the astronomer's imperious
demand for 'more light,' and so many great telescopes, believed in
their day to represent the absolute culmination of the optical art,
are now mere commoners in the ranks where once they were supreme, that
it may quite conceivably prove that the great Yerkes refractor, like
so many of its predecessors, represents only a stage and not the end
of the journey.

[Illustration: FIG. 4.--30-INCH REFRACTOR, PULKOWA OBSERVATORY.]

Meanwhile, Sir Isaac Newton, considering, wrongly as the sequel
showed, that 'the case of the refractor was desperate,' set about
the attempt to find out whether the reflection of light by means
of suitably-shaped mirrors might not afford a substitute for the
refractor. In this attempt he was successful, and in 1671 presented to
the Royal Society the first specimen, constructed by his own hands, of
that form of reflecting telescope which has since borne his name. The
principle of the Newtonian reflector will be easily grasped from Fig.
5. The rays of light from the object under inspection enter the open
mouth of the instrument, and passing down the tube are converged by
the concave mirror AA towards a focus, before reaching which they
are intercepted by the small flat mirror BB, placed at an angle of
45 degrees to the axis of the tube, and are by it reflected into the
eye-piece E which is placed at the side of the instrument. In this
construction, therefore, the observer actually looks in a direction
at right angles to that of the object which he is viewing, a condition
which seems strange to the uninitiated, but which presents no
difficulties in practice, and is found to have several advantages,
chief among them the fact that there is no breaking of one's neck in
the attempt to observe objects near the zenith, the line of vision
being always horizontal, no matter what may be the altitude of the
object under inspection. Other forms of reflector have been devised,
and go by the names of the Gregorian, the Cassegrain, and the
Herschelian; but the Newtonian has proved itself the superior, and has
practically driven its rivals out of the field, though the Cassegrain
form has been revived in a few instances of late years, and is
particularly suited to certain forms of research.

[Illustration: FIG. 5.--PRINCIPLE OF NEWTONIAN REFLECTOR.]

[Illustration: FIG. 6.--LORD ROSSE'S TELESCOPE.]

At first the mirrors of reflecting telescopes were made of an alloy
known as speculum metal, which consisted of practically 4 parts of
copper to 1 of tin; but during the last half-century this metal has
been entirely superseded by mirrors made of glass ground to the proper
figure, and then polished and silvered on the face by a chemical
process. To the reflecting form of construction belong some of the
largest telescopes in the world, such as the Rosse 6-foot (metal
mirrors), Fig. 6, the Common 5-foot (silver on glass), the Melbourne
4-foot (metal mirrors, Cassegrain form), and the 5-foot constructed by
Mr. Ritchey for the Yerkes Observatory. Probably the most celebrated,
as it was also the first of these monsters, was the 4-foot telescope
of Sir William Herschel, made by himself on the principle which goes
by his name. It was used by him to some extent in the discoveries
which have made his name famous, and nearly everyone who has ever
opened an astronomical book is familiar with the engraving of the huge
40-foot tube, with its cumbrous staging, which Oliver Wendell Holmes
has so quaintly celebrated in 'The Poet at the Breakfast Table' (Fig.
7).

[Illustration: FIG. 7.--HERSCHEL'S 4-FOOT REFLECTOR.]




CHAPTER II

THE TELESCOPE--PRACTICAL


Having thus briefly sketched the history of the telescope, we turn now
to consider the optical means which are most likely to be in the hands
or within the reach of the beginner in astronomical observation. Let
us, first of all, make the statement that any telescope, good, bad, or
indifferent, is better than no telescope. There are some purists who
would demur to such a statement, who make the beginner's heart heavy
with the verdict that it is better to have no telescope at all
than one that is not of the utmost perfection, and, of course, of
corresponding costliness, and who seem to believe that the performance
of an inferior glass may breed disgust at astronomy altogether. This
is surely mere nonsense. For most amateurs at the beginning of their
astronomical work the question is not between a good telescope and an
inferior one, it is between a telescope and no telescope. Of course,
no one would be so foolish as willingly to observe with an inferior
instrument if a better could be had; but even a comparatively poor
glass will reveal much that is of great interest and beauty, and
its defects must even be put up with sometimes for the sake of its
advantages until something more satisfactory can be obtained. An
instrument which will show fifty stars where the naked eye sees five
is not to be despised, even though it may show wings to Sirius that
have no business there, or a brilliant fringe of colours round Venus
to which even that beautiful planet can lay no real claim. Galileo's
telescope would be considered a shockingly bad instrument nowadays;
still, it had its own little influence upon the history of astronomy,
and the wonders which it first revealed are easily within the reach of
anyone who has the command of a shilling or two, and, what is perhaps
still more important, of a little patience. The writer has still in
his possession an object-glass made out of a simple single eyeglass,
such as is worn by Mr. Joseph Chamberlain. This, mounted in a
cardboard tube with another single lens in a sliding tube as an
eye-piece, proved competent to reveal the more prominent lunar
craters, a number of sunspots, the phases of Venus, and the existence,
though not the true form, of Saturn's ring. Its total cost, if memory
serve, was one shilling and a penny. Of course it showed, in addition,
a number of things which should not have been seen, such as a lovely
border of colour round every bright object; but, at the same time,
it gave a great deal more than thirteen pence worth of pleasure and
instruction.

Furthermore, there is this to be said in favour of beginning with a
cheap and inferior instrument, that experience may thus be gained
in the least costly fashion. The budding astronomer is by nature
insatiably curious. He wants to know the why and how of all the things
that his telescope does or does not do. Now this curiosity, while
eminently laudable in itself, is apt in the end to be rather hard
upon his instrument. A fine telescope, whatever its size may be, is
an instrument that requires and should receive careful handling; it is
easily damaged, and costly to replace. And therefore it may be better
that the beginner should make his earlier experiments, and find
out the more conspicuous and immediately fatal of the many ways of
damaging a telescope, upon an instrument whose injury, or even whose
total destruction, need not cause him many pangs or much financial
loss.

It is not suggested that a beginning should necessarily be made on
such a humble footing as that just indicated. Telescopes of the sizes
mainly referred to in these pages--_i.e._, refractors of 2 or 3 inches
aperture, and reflectors of 4-1/2 to 6 inches--may frequently be
picked up second-hand at a very moderate figure indeed. Of course, in
these circumstances the purchaser has to take his chance of defects
in the instrument, unless he can arrange for a trial of it, either by
himself, or, preferably, by a friend who has some experience; yet even
should the glass turn out far from perfect, the chances are that it
will at least be worth the small sum paid for it. Nor is it in the
least probable, as some writers seem to believe, that the use of
an inferior instrument will disgust the student and hinder him from
prosecuting his studies. The chances are that it will merely create
a desire for more satisfactory optical means. Even a skilled observer
like the late Rev. T. W. Webb had to confess of one of his telescopes
that 'much of its light went the wrong way'; and yet he was able to
get both use and pleasure out of it. The words of a well-known English
amateur observer may be quoted. After detailing his essays with
glasses of various degrees of imperfection Mr. Mee remarks: 'For the
intending amateur I could wish no other experience than my own. To
commence with a large and perfect instrument is a mistake; its owner
cannot properly appreciate it, and in gaining experience is pretty
sure to do the glass irreparable injury.'

Should the beginner not be willing or able to face the purchase
of even a comparatively humble instrument, his case is by no means
desperate, for he will find facilities at hand, such as were not
thought of a few years ago, for the construction of his own telescope.
Two-inch achromatic object-glasses, with suitable lenses for the
making up of the requisite eye-pieces, are to be had for a few
shillings, together with cardboard tubes of sizes suitable for
fitting up the instrument; and such a volume as Fowler's 'Telescopic
Astronomy' gives complete directions for the construction of a glass
which is capable of a wonderful amount of work in proportion to
its cost. The substitution of metal tubes for the cardboard ones is
desirable, as metal will be found to be much more satisfactory if the
instrument is to be much used. The observer, however, will not long
be satisfied with such tools as these, useful though they may be. The
natural history of amateur astronomers may be summed up briefly in the
words 'they go from strength to strength.' The possessor of a small
telescope naturally and inevitably covets a bigger one; and when the
bigger one has been secured it represents only a stage in the search
for one bigger still, while along with the desire for increased size
goes that for increased optical perfection. No properly constituted
amateur will be satisfied until he has got the largest and best
instrument that he has money to buy, space to house, and time to use.

Let us suppose, then, that the telescope has been acquired, and that
it is such an instrument as may very commonly be found in the hands
of a beginner--a refractor, say, of 2, 2-1/2, or 3 inches aperture
(diameter of object-glass). The question of reflectors will fall to
be considered later. Human nature suggests that the first thing to do
with it is to unscrew all the screws and take the new acquisition to
pieces, so far as possible, in order to examine into its construction.
Hence many glasses whose career of usefulness is cut short before
it has well begun. 'In most cases,' says Webb, 'a screw-driver is a
dangerous tool in inexperienced hands'; and Smyth, in the Prolegomena
to his 'Celestial Cycle,' utters words of solemn warning to the
'over-handy gentlemen who, in their feverish anxiety for meddling
with and making instruments, are continually tormenting them with
screw-drivers, files, and what-not.' Unfortunately, it is not only
the screw-driver that is dangerous; the most deadly danger to the most
delicate part of the telescope lies in the unarmed but inexperienced
hands themselves. You may do more irreparable damage to the
object-glass of your telescope in five minutes with your fingers than
you are likely to do to the rest of the instrument in a month with
a screw-driver. Remember that an object-glass is a work of art,
sometimes as costly as, and always much more remarkable than, the
finest piece of jewellery. It may be unscrewed, _carefully_, from
the end of its tube and examined. Should the examination lead to the
detection of bubbles or even scratches in the glass (quite likely the
latter if the instrument be second-hand), these need not unduly vex
its owner's soul. They do not necessarily mean bad performance, and
the amount of light which they obstruct is very small, unless the
case be an extreme one. But on no account should the two lenses of the
object-glass itself be separated, for this will only result in making
a good objective bad and a bad one worse. The lenses were presumably
placed in their proper adjustment to one another by an optician before
being sent out; and should their performance be so unsatisfactory
as to suggest that this adjustment has been disturbed, it is to an
optician that they should be returned for inspection. The glass may,
of course, be carefully and gently cleaned, using either soft chamois
leather, or preferably an old silk handkerchief, studiously kept
from dust; but the cleaning should never amount to more than a gentle
sweeping away of any dust which may have gathered on the surface.
Rubbing is not to be thought of, and the man whose telescope has been
so neglected that its object-glass needs rubbing should turn to some
other and less reprehensible form of mischief. For cleaning the
small lenses of the eye-pieces, the same silk may be employed; Webb
recommends a piece of blotting-paper, rolled to a point and aided by
breathing, for the edges which are awkward to get at. Care must, of
course, be taken to replace these lenses in their original positions,
and the easiest way to ensure this is to take out only one at a time.
In replacing them, see that the finger does not touch the surface of
the glass, or the cleaning will be all to do over again.

[Illustration: FIG. 8.

_a_, O.G. in perfect adjustment; _b_, O.G. defectively centred.]

Next comes the question of testing the quality of the objective. (The
stand is meanwhile assumed, but will be spoken of later.) Point the
telescope to a star of about the third magnitude, and employ
the eye-piece of highest power, if more than one goes with the
instrument--this will be the shortest eye-piece of the set. If the
glass be of high quality, the image of the star will be a neat round
disc of small size, surrounded by one or two thin bright rings (Fig.
8, _a_). Should the image be elliptical and the rings be thrown to the
one side (Fig. 8, _b_), the glass may still be quite a good one, but
is out of square, and should be readjusted by an optician. Should
the image be irregular and the rings broken, the glass is of inferior
quality, though it may still be serviceable enough for many purposes.
Next throw the image of the star out of focus by racking the eye-piece
in towards the objective, and then repeat the process by racking it
again out of focus away from the objective. The image will, in either
case, expand into a number of rings of light, and these rings should
be truly circular, and should present precisely the same appearance at
equal distances within and without the focus. A further conception of
the objective's quality may be gained by observing whether the image
of a star or the detail of the moon or of the planets comes sharply
to a focus when the milled head for focussing is turned. Should it
be possible to rack the eye-tube in or out for any distance without
disturbing the distinctness of the picture to any extent, then the
glass is defective. A good objective will admit of no such range, but
will come sharply up to focus, and as sharply away from it, with any
motion of the focussing screw. A good glass will also show the details
of a planet like Saturn, such as are within its reach, that is, with
clearness of definition, while an inferior one will soften all the
outlines, and impart a general haziness to them. The observer may now
proceed to test the colour correction of his objective. No achromatic,
its name notwithstanding, ever gives an absolutely colourless image;
all that can be expected is that the colour aberration should have
been so far eliminated as not to be unpleasant. In a good instrument
a fringe of violet or blue will be seen around any bright object, such
as Venus, on a dark sky; a poor glass will show red or yellow. It
is well to make sure, however, should bad colour be seen, that the
eye-piece is not causing it; and, therefore, more than one eye-piece
should be tried before an opinion is formed. Probably more colour will
be seen at first than was expected, more particularly with an object
so brilliant as Venus. But the observer need not worry overmuch about
this. He will find that the eye gets so accustomed to it as almost
to forget that it is there, so that something of a shock may be
experienced when a casual star-gazing friend, on looking at some
bright object, remarks, as friends always do, 'What beautiful
colours!' Denning records a somewhat extreme case in which a friend,
who had been accustomed to observe with a refractor, absolutely
resented the absence of the familiar colour fringe in the picture
given by a reflector, which is the true achromatic in nature, though
not in name. The beginner is recommended to read the article 'The
Adjustment of a Small Equatorial,' by Mr. E. W. Maunder, in the
_Journal of the British Astronomical Association_, vol. ii., p. 219,
where he will find the process of testing described at length and with
great clearness.

In making these tests, allowance has, of course, to be made for the
state of the atmosphere. A good telescope can only do its best on a
good night, and it is not fair to any instrument to condemn it until
it has been tested under favourable conditions. The ideal test would
be to have its performance tried along with that of another instrument
of known good quality and of as nearly the same size as possible. If
this cannot be arranged for, the tests must be made on a succession
of nights, and good performance on one of these is sufficient to
vindicate the reputation of the glass, and to show that any deficiency
on other occasions was due to the state of the air, and not to the
instrument. Should his telescope pass the above tests satisfactorily,
the observer ought to count himself a happy man, and will until he
begins to hanker after a bigger instrument.

The mention of the pointing of the telescope to a star brings up the
question of how this is to be done. It seems a simple thing; as a
matter of fact, with anything like a high magnifying power it is next
to impossible; and there are few things more exasperating than to see
a star or a planet shining brightly before your eyes, and yet to find
yourself quite unable to get it into the field of view. The simple
remedy is the addition of a finder to the telescope. This is a small
telescope of low magnifying power which is fastened to the larger
instrument by means of collars bearing adjusting screws, which enable
it to be laid accurately parallel with the large tube (Fig. 10). Its
eye-piece is furnished with cross-threads, and a star brought to
the intersection of these threads will be in the field of the large
telescope. In place of the two threads crossing at right angles there
may be substituted three threads interlacing to form a little triangle
in the centre of the finder's field. By this device the star can
always be seen when the glass is being pointed instead of being
hidden, as in the other case, behind the intersection of the two
threads. A fine needle-point fixed in the eye-piece will also be found
an efficient substitute for the cross-threads. In the absence of
a finder the telescope may be pointed by using the lowest power
eye-piece and substituting a higher one when the object is in the
field; but beyond question the finder is well worth the small
addition which it makes to the cost of an instrument. A little care
in adjusting the finder now and again will often save trouble and
annoyance on a working evening.

The question of a stand on which to mount the telescope now falls to
be considered, and is one of great importance, though apt to be rather
neglected at first. It will soon be found that little satisfaction or
comfort can be had in observing unless the stand adopted is steady. A
shaky mounting will spoil the performance of the best telescope that
ever was made, and will only tantalize the observer with occasional
glimpses of what might be seen under better conditions. Better have a
little less aperture to the object-glass, and a good steady mounting,
than an extra inch of objective and a mounting which robs you of all
comfort in the using of your telescope. Beginners are indeed rather
apt to be misled into the idea that the only matters of importance are
the objective and its tube, and that money spent on the stand is money
wasted. Hence many fearful and wonderful contrivances for doing badly
what a little saved in the size of the telescope and expended on the
stand would have enabled them to do well. It is very interesting, no
doubt, to get a view of Jupiter or Saturn for one field's-breadth,
and then to find, on attempting to readjust the instrument for another
look, that the mounting has obligingly taken your star-gazing into its
own hands, and is now directing your telescope to a different object
altogether; but repetition of this form of amusement is apt to pall. A
radically weak stand can never be made into a good one; the best plan
is to get a properly proportioned mounting at once, and be done with
it.

[Illustration: FIG. 9.--SMALL TELESCOPE ON PILLAR AND CLAW STAND.]

For small instruments, such as we are dealing with, the mounting
generally adopted is that known as the Altazimuth, from its giving two
motions, one in altitude and one in azimuth, or, to use more familiar
terms, one vertical and the other horizontal. There are various types
of the Altazimuth. If the instrument be of not more than 3 feet focal
length, the ordinary stand known as the 'pillar and claw' (Fig. 9)
will meet all the requirements of this form of motion. Should the
focal length be greater than 3 feet, it is advisable to have the
instrument mounted on a tripod stand, such as is shown in Fig. 10. In
the simpler forms of both these mountings the two motions requisite
to follow an object must be given by hand, and it is practically
impossible to do this without conveying a certain amount of tremor to
the telescope, which disturbs clearness of vision until it subsides,
by which time the object to be viewed is generally getting ready to
go out of the field again. To obviate this inconvenience as far as
possible, the star or planet when found should be placed just outside
the field of view, and allowed to enter it by the diurnal motion
of the earth. The tremors will thus have time to subside before the
object reaches the centre of the field, and this process must
be repeated as long as the observation continues. In making this
adjustment attention must be paid to the direction of the object's
motion through the field, which, of course, varies according to its
position in the sky. If it be remembered that a star's motion through
the telescopic field is the exact reverse of its true direction across
the sky, little difficulty will be found, and use will soon render
the matter so familiar that the adjustment will be made almost
automatically.

[Illustration: FIG. 10.--TELESCOPE ON TRIPOD, WITH FINDER AND SLOW
MOTIONS.]

A much more convenient way of imparting the requisite motions is by
the employment of tangent screws connected with Hooke's joint-handles,
which are brought conveniently near to the hands of the observer as
he sits at the eye-end. These screws clamp into circles or portions of
circles, which have teeth cut on them to fit the pitch of the screw,
and by means of them a slow and steady motion may be imparted to the
telescope. When it is required to move the instrument more rapidly, or
over a large expanse of sky, the clamps which connect the screws with
the circles are slackened, and the motion is given by hand. Fig. 10
shows an instrument provided with these adjuncts, which, though not
absolutely necessary, and adding somewhat to the cost of the mounting,
are certainly a great addition to the ease and comfort of observation.

[Illustration: FIG. 11.--EQUATORIAL MOUNTING FOR SMALL TELESCOPE.]

The Altazimuth mounting, from its simplicity and comparative
cheapness, has all along been, and will probably continue to be, the
form most used by amateurs. It is, however, decidedly inferior in
every respect to the equatorial form of mount. In this form (Fig. 11)
the telescope is carried by means of two axes, one of which--the Polar
axis--is so adjusted as to be parallel to the pole of the earth's
rotation, its degree of inclination being therefore dependent upon the
latitude of the place for which it is designed. At the equator it will
be horizontal, will lie at an angle of 45 degrees half-way between
the equator and either pole, and will be vertical at the poles. At its
upper end it carries a cross-head with bearings through which there
passes another axis at right angles to the first (the declination
axis). Both these axes are free to rotate in their respective
bearings, and thus the telescope is capable of two motions, one of
which--that of the declination axis--enables the instrument to be set
to the elevation of the object to be observed, while the other--that
of the polar axis--enables the observer to follow the object, when
found, from its rising to its setting by means of a single movement,
the telescope sweeping out circles on the sky corresponding to those
which the stars themselves describe in their journey across the
heavens. This single movement may be given by means of a tangent screw
such as has already been described, and the use of a telescope thus
equipped is certainly much easier and more convenient than that of an
Altazimuth, where two motions have constantly to be imparted. To gain
the full advantage of the equatorial form of mounting, the polar axis
must be placed exactly in the North and South line, and unless the
mounting can be adjusted properly and left in adjustment, it is robbed
of much of its superiority. For large fixed instruments it is, of
course, almost universally used; and in observatories the motion in
Right Ascension, as it is called, which follows the star across the
sky, is communicated to the driving-wheel of the polar axis by means
of a clock which turns the rod carrying the tangent screw (Plate II.).
These are matters which in most circumstances are outside the sphere
of the amateur; it may be interesting for him, however, to see
examples of the way in which large instruments are mounted. The
frontispiece, accordingly, shows the largest and most perfect
instrument at present in existence, while Plate II., with Figs. 4
and 12, give further examples of fine modern work. The student can
scarcely fail to be struck by the extreme solidity of the modern
mountings, and by the way in which all the mechanical parts of the
instrument are so contrived as to give the greatest convenience
and ease in working. Comparing, for instance, Plate II., a 6-inch
refractor by Messrs. Cooke, of York, available either for visual or
photographic work, with the Dorpat refractor (Fig. 3), it is seen that
the modern maker uses for a 6-inch telescope a stand much more
solid and steady than was deemed sufficient eighty years ago for an
instrument of 9-6/10 inches. Attention is particularly directed to the
way in which nowadays all the motions are brought to the eye-end so
as to be most convenient for the observer, and frequently, as in this
case, accomplished by electric power, while the declination circle is
read by means of a small telescope so that the large instrument can
be directed upon any object with the minimum of trouble. The
driving clock, well shown on the right of the supporting pillar, is
automatically controlled by electric current from the sidereal clock
of the observatory.

[Illustration:

  PLATE II.

6-inch Photo-Visual Refractor, equatorially mounted. Messrs. T. Cooke
& Sons.]

We have now to consider the reflecting form of telescope, which,
especially in this country, has deservedly gained much favour, and has
come to be regarded as in some sense the amateur's particular tool.

[Illustration: FIG. 12.--8-INCH REFRACTOR ON EQUATORIAL MOUNTING.]

As a matter of policy, one can scarcely advise the beginner to make
his first essay with a reflector. Its adjustments, though simple
enough, are apt to be troublesome at the time when everything has
to be learned by experience; and its silver films, though much more
durable than is commonly supposed, are easily destroyed by careless
or unskilful handling, and require more careful nursing than the
objective of a refractor. But, having once paid his first fees to
experience, the observer, if he feel so inclined, may venture upon a
reflector, which has probably more than sufficient advantages to
make up for its weaker points. First and foremost of these advantages
stands the not inconsiderable one of cheapness. A 10-1/2-inch
reflector may be purchased new for rather less than the sum which will
buy a 4-inch refractor. True, the reflector has not the same command
of light inch for inch as the refractor, but a reflector of 10-1/2
inches should at least be the match of an 8-inch refractor in this
respect, and will be immeasurably more powerful than the 4-inch
refractor, which comes nearest to it in price. Second stands the ease
and comfort so conspicuous in observing with a Newtonian. Instead
of having almost to break his neck craning under the eye-piece of a
telescope pointed to near the zenith, the observer with a Newtonian
looks always straight in front of him, as the eye-piece of a reflector
mounted as an altazimuth is always horizontal, and when the instrument
is mounted equatorially, the tube, or its eye-end, is made to rotate
so that the line of vision may be kept horizontal. Third is the
absence of colour. Colour is not conspicuous in a small refractor,
unless the objective be of very bad quality; but as the aperture
increases it is apt to become somewhat painfully apparent. The
reflector, on the other hand, is truly achromatic, and may be relied
upon to show the natural tints of all objects with which it deals.
This point is of considerable importance in connection with planetary
observation. The colouring of Jupiter, for instance, will be seen in a
reflector as a refractor can never show it.

Against these advantages there have to be set certain disadvantages.
First, the question of adjustments. A small refractor requires
practically none; but a reflector, whatever its size, must be
occasionally attended to, or else its mirrors will get out of square
and bad performance will be the result. It is easy, however, to
make too much of this difficulty. The adjustments of the writer's
8-1/2-inch With reflector have remained for months at a time as
perfect as when they had been newly attended to. Second, the renewal
of the silver films. This may cause some trouble in the neighbourhood
of towns where the atmosphere is such as to tarnish silver quickly;
and even in the country a film must be renewed at intervals. But these
may be long enough. The film on the mirror above referred to has stood
without serious deterioration for five years at a time. Third, the
reflector, with its open-mouthed tube, is undoubtedly more subject
to disturbance from air currents and changes of temperature, and its
mirrors take longer to settle down into good definition after the
instrument has been moved from one point of the sky to another. This
difficulty cannot be got over, and must be put up with; but it is not
very conspicuous with the smaller sizes of telescopes, such as are
likely to be in the hands of an amateur at the beginning of his work.
There are probably but few nights when an 8-1/2-inch reflector will
not give quite a good account of itself in this respect by comparison
with a refractor of anything like equal power. On the whole, the state
of the question is this: If the observer wishes to have as much power
as possible in proportion to his expenditure, and is not afraid to
take the risk of a small amount of trouble with the adjustments and
films, the reflector is probably the instrument best suited to him.
If, on the other hand, he is so situated that his telescope has to be
much moved, or, which is almost as bad, has to stand unused for any
considerable intervals of time, he will be well advised to prefer
a refractor. One further advantage of the reflecting form is that,
aperture for aperture, it is very much shorter. The average refractor
will probably run to a length of from twelve to fifteen times the
diameter of its objective. Reflectors are rarely of a greater length
than nine times the diameter of the large mirror, and are frequently
shorter still. Consequently, size for size, they can be worked in less
space, which is often a consideration of importance.

[Illustration: FIG. 13.--FOUR-FOOT REFLECTOR EQUATORIALLY MOUNTED.]

The mountings of the reflector are in principle precisely similar to
those of the refractor already described. The greater weight, however,
and the convenience of having the body of the instrument kept as low
as possible, owing to the fact of the eye-piece being at the upper end
of the tube, have necessitated various modifications in the forms to
which these principles are applied. Plates III. and IV., and Fig. 13,
illustrate the altazimuth and equatorial forms of mounting as applied
to reflectors of various sizes, Fig. 13 being a representation of
Lassell's great 4-foot reflector.

[Illustration:

  PLATE III.

20-inch Reflector, Stanmore Observatory.]

And now, having his telescope, whatever its size, principle, or
form of mounting, the observer has to proceed to use it. Generally
speaking, there is no great difficulty in arriving at the manner of
using either a refractor or a reflector, and for either instrument
the details of handling must be learned by experience, as nearly all
makers have little variations of their own in the form of clamps and
slow motions, though the principles in all instruments are the same.
With regard to these, the only recommendation that need be made is one
of caution in the use of the glass until its ways of working have
been gradually found out. With a knowledge of the principles of its
construction and a little application of common-sense, there is no
part of a telescope mounting which may not be readily understood.
Accordingly, what follows must simply take the form of general hints
as to matters which every telescopist ought to know, and which
are easier learned once and for all at the beginning than by slow
experience. These hints are of course the very commonplaces of
observation; but it is the commonplace that is the foundation of good
work in everything.

If possible, let the telescope be fixed in the open air. Where
money is no object, a few pounds will furnish a convenient little
telescope-house, with either a rotating or sliding roof, which enables
the instrument to be pointed to any quarter of the heavens. Such
houses are now much more easily obtained than they once were, and
anyone who has tried both ways can testify how much handier it is to
have nothing to do but unlock the little observatory, and find the
telescope ready for work, than to have to carry a heavy instrument out
into the open. Plate IV. illustrates such a shelter, which has done
duty for more than twelve years, covering an 8-1/2-inch With, whose
tube and mounting are almost entirely the work of a local smith; and
in the _Journal of the British Astronomical Association_, vol.
xiv., p. 283, Mr. Edwin Holmes gives a simple description of a small
observatory which was put up at a cost of about £3, and has proved
efficient and durable. The telescope-house has also the advantage
of protecting the observer and his instrument from the wind, so that
observation may often be carried on on nights which would be quite too
windy for work in the open.

[Illustration:

  PLATE IV.

Telescope House and 8-1/2-inch 'with' Reflector.]

Should it not be possible to obtain such a luxury, however,
undoubtedly the next best is fairly outside. No one who has garden
room should ever think of observing from within doors. If the
telescope be used at an open window its definition will be impaired
by air-currents. The floor of the room will communicate tremors to the
instrument, and every movement of the observer will be accompanied by
a corresponding movement of the object in the field, with results
that are anything but satisfactory. In some cases no other position is
available. If this be so, Webb's advice must be followed, the window
opened as widely and as long beforehand as possible, and the telescope
thrust out as far as is convenient. But these precautions only
palliate the evils of indoor observation. The open air is the best,
and with a little care in wrapping up the observer need run no risk.

Provide the telescope, if a refractor, with a dew-cap. Without this
precaution dew is certain to gather upon the object-glass, with
the result of stopping all observation until it is removed, and the
accompanying risk of damage to the objective itself. Some instruments
are provided by their makers with dew-caps, and all ought to be; but
in the absence of this provision a cap may be easily contrived. A
tube of tin three or four times as long as the diameter of the
object-glass, made so as to slide fairly stiffly over the object end
of the tube where the ordinary cap fits, and blackened inside to a
dead black, will remove practically all risk. The blackening may be
done with lamp-black mixed with spirit varnish. Some makers--Messrs.
Cooke, of York, for instance--line both tube and dew-cap with black
velvet. This ought to be ideal, and might be tried in the case of the
dew-cap by the observer. Finders are rarely fitted with dew-caps,
but certainly should be; the addition will often save trouble and
inconvenience.

Be careful to cover up the objective or mirror with its proper cap
before removing it into the house. If this is not done, dewing at once
results, the very proper punishment for carelessness. This may seem a
caution so elementary as scarcely to be worth giving; but it is easier
to read and remember a hint than to have to learn by experience, which
in the case of a reflector will almost certainly mean a deteriorated
mirror film. Should the mirror, if you are using a reflector, become
dewed in spite of all precautions, do not attempt to touch the film
while it is moist, or you will have the pleasure of seeing it scale
off under your touch. Bring it into a room of moderate temperature,
or stand it in a through draught of dry air until the moisture
evaporates; and should any stain be left, make sure that the mirror is
absolutely dry before attempting to polish it off. With regard to this
matter of polishing, touch the mirror as seldom as possible with the
polishing-pad. Frequent polishing does far more harm than good, and
the mirror, if kept carefully covered when not in use, does not need
it. A fold of cotton-wool between the cap and the mirror will, if
occasionally taken out and dried, help greatly to preserve the film.

Next comes a caution which beginners specially need. Almost everyone
on getting his first telescope wants to see everything as big as
possible, and consequently uses the highest powers. This is an entire
mistake. For a telescope of 2-1/2 inches aperture two eye-pieces,
or at most three, are amply sufficient. Of these, one may be low in
power, say 25 to 40, to take in large fields, and, if necessary, to
serve in place of a finder. Such an eye-piece will give many star
pictures of surprising beauty. Another may be of medium power, say 80,
for general work; and a third may be as high as 120 for exceptionally
fine nights and for work on double stars. Nominally a 2-1/2 inch, if
of very fine quality, should bear on the finest nights and on stars
a power of 100 to the inch, or 250. Practically it will do nothing
of the sort, and on most nights the half of this power will be found
rather too high. Indeed, the use of high powers is for many reasons
undesirable. A certain proportion of light to size must be preserved
in the image, or it will appear faint and 'clothy.' Further, increased
magnifying power means also increased magnification of every tremor of
the atmosphere; and with high powers the object viewed passes through
the field so rapidly that constant shifting of the telescope is
required, and only a brief glimpse can be obtained before the
instrument has to be moved again. It is infinitely more satisfactory
to see your object of a moderate size and steady than to see it much
larger, but hazy, tremulous, and in rapid motion. 'In inquiring about
the quality of some particular instrument,' remarks Sir Howard Grubb,
'a tyro almost invariably asks, "What is the highest power you can
use?" An experienced observer will ask, "What is the lowest power with
which you can do so and so?"'

Do not be disappointed if your first views of celestial objects do not
come up to your expectations. They seldom do, particularly in respect
of the size which the planets present in the field. A good deal of
the discouragement so often experienced is due to the idea that the
illustrations in text-books represent what ought to be seen by anyone
who looks through a telescope. It has to be remembered that these
pictures are, for one thing, drawn to a large scale, in order to
insure clearness in detail, that they are in general the results of
observation with the very finest telescopes, and the work of skilled
observers making the most of picked nights. No one would expect to
rival a trained craftsman in a first attempt at his trade; yet most
people seem to think that they ought to be able at their first essay
in telescopic work to see and depict as much as men who have
spent half a lifetime in an apprenticeship to the delicate art of
observation. Given time, patience, and perseverance, and the skill
will come. The finest work shown in good drawings represents, not
what the beginner may expect to see at his first view, but a standard
towards which he must try to work by steady practice both of eye and
hand. In this connection it may be suggested that the observer should
take advantage of every opportunity of seeing through larger and finer
instruments than his own. This will teach him two things at least.
First, to respect his own small telescope, as he sees how bravely it
stands up to the larger instrument so far as regards the prominent
features of the celestial bodies; and, second, to notice how the
superior power of the large glass brings out nothing startlingly
different from that which is shown by his own small one, but a wealth
of delicate detail which must be looked for (compare Plate XV. with
Fig. 22). A little occasional practice with a large instrument will be
found a great encouragement and a great help to working with a small
one, and most possessors of large glasses are more than willing to
assist the owners of small ones.

Do not be ashamed to draw what you see, whether it be little or much,
and whether you can draw well or ill. At the worst the result will
have an interest to yourself which no representation by another hand
can ever possess; at the best your drawings may in course of time come
to be of real scientific value. There are few observers who cannot
make some shape at a representation of what they see, and steady
practice often effects an astonishing improvement. But draw only what
you see with certainty. Some observers are gifted with abnormal powers
of vision, others with abnormal powers of imagination. Strange to say,
the results attained by these two classes differ widely in appearance
and in value. You may not be endowed with faculties which will enable
you to take rank in the former class; but at least you need not
descend to the latter. It is after all a matter of conscience.

Do not be too hasty in supposing that everybody is endowed with a zeal
for astronomy equal to your own. The average man or woman does not
enjoy being called out from a warm fireside on a winter's night, no
matter how beautiful the celestial sight to be seen. Your friend
may politely express interest, but to tempt him to this is merely to
encourage a habit of untruthfulness. The cause of astronomy is not
likely to be furthered by being associated in any person's mind with
discomfort and a boredom which is not less real because it is veiled
under quite inadequate forms of speech. It is better to wait until the
other man's own curiosity suggests a visit to the telescope, if you
wish to gain a convert to the science.

When observing in the open be sure to wrap up well. A heavy ulster or
its equivalent, and some form of covering for the feet which will keep
them warm, are absolute essentials. See that you are thoroughly warm
before you go out. In all probability you will be cold enough before
work is over; but there is no reason why you should make yourself
miserable from the beginning, and so spoil your enjoyment of a fine
evening.

Having satisfied his craving for a general survey of everything in
the heavens that comes within the range of his glass, the beginner
is strongly advised to specialize. This is a big word to apply to the
using of a 2-1/2- or 3-inch telescope, but it represents the only
way in which interest can be kept up. It does no good, either to
the observer or to the science of astronomy, for him to take out
his glass, have a glance at Jupiter and another at the Orion nebula,
satisfy himself that the two stars of Castor are still two, wander
over a few bright clusters, and then turn in, to repeat the same
dreary process the next fine night. Let him make up his mind to stick
to one, or at most two, objects. Lunar work presents an attractive
field for a small instrument, and may be followed on useful lines, as
will be pointed out later. A spell of steady work upon Jupiter will at
least prepare the way and whet the appetite for a glass more adequate
to deal with the great planet. Should star work be preferred, a fine
field is opened up in connection with the variable stars, the chief
requirement of work in this department being patience and regularity,
a small telescope being quite competent to deal with a very large
number of interesting objects.

The following comments in Smyth's usual pungent style are worth
remembering: 'The furor of a green astronomer is to possess himself
of all sorts of instruments--to make observations upon everything--and
attempt the determination of quantities which have been again and
again determined by competent persons, with better means, and
more practical acquaintance with the subject. He starts with an
enthusiastic admiration of the science, and the anticipation of new
discoveries therein; and all the errors consequent upon the momentary
impulses of what Bacon terms "affected dispatch" crowd upon him. Under
this course--as soon as the more hacknied objects are "seen up"--and
he can decide whether some are greenish-blue or bluish-green--the
excitement flags, the study palls, and the zeal evaporates in
hyper-criticism on the instruments and their manufacturers.'

This is a true sketch of the natural history, or rather, of the
decline and fall, of many an amateur observer. But there is no reason
why so ignominious an end should ever overtake any man's pursuit of
the study if he will only choose one particular line and make it his
own, and be thorough in it. Half-study inevitably ends in weariness
and disgust; but the man who will persevere never needs to complain of
sameness in any branch of astronomical work.




CHAPTER III

THE SUN


From its comparative nearness, its brightness and size, and its
supreme importance to ourselves, the sun commands our attention; and
in the phenomena which it presents there is found a source of abundant
and constantly varying interest. Observation of these phenomena can
only be conducted, however, after due precautions have been taken. Few
people have any idea of the intense glow of the solar light and heat
when concentrated by the object-glass of even a small telescope, and
care must be exercised lest irreparable damage be done to the eye.
Galileo is said to have finally blinded himself altogether, and
Sir William Herschel to have seriously impaired his sight by solar
observation. No danger need be feared if one or other of the common
precautions be adopted, and some of these will be shortly described;
but before we consider these and the means of applying them, let us
gather together briefly the main facts about the sun itself.

Our sun, then, is a body of about 866,000 miles in diameter, and
situated at a distance of some 92,700,000 miles from us. In bulk
it equals 1,300,000 of our world, while it would take about 332,000
earths to weigh it down. Its density, as can be seen from these
figures, is very small indeed. Bulk for bulk, it is considerably
lighter than the earth; in fact, it is not very much denser than
water, and this has very considerable bearing upon our ideas of its
constitution.

Natural operations are carried on in this immense globe upon a scale
which it is almost impossible for us to realize. A few illustrations
gathered from Young's interesting volume, 'The Sun,' may help to
make clearer to us the scale of the ruling body of our system. Some
conception of the immensity of its distance from us may first be
gained from Professor Mendenhall's whimsical illustration. Sensation,
according to Helmholtz's experiments, travels at a rate of about 100
feet per second. If, then, an infant were born with an arm long enough
to reach to the sun, and if on his birthday he were to exercise this
amazing limb by putting his finger upon the solar surface, he would
die in blissful ignorance of the fact that he had been burned, for
the sensation of burning would take 150 years to travel along that
stupendous arm. Were the sun hollowed out like a gigantic indiarubber
ball and the earth placed at its centre, the enclosing shell would
appear like a far distant sky to us. Our moon would have room to
circle within this shell at its present distance of 240,000 miles, and
there would still be room for another satellite to move in an orbit
exterior to that of the moon at a further distance of more than
190,000 miles. The attractive power of this great body is no less
amazing than its bulk. It has been calculated that were the attractive
power which keeps our earth coursing in its orbit round the sun to
cease, and to be replaced by a material bond consisting of steel wires
of a thickness equal to that of the heaviest telegraph-wires, these
would require to cover the whole sunward side of our globe in the
proportion of nine to each square inch. The force of gravity at the
solar surface is such that a man who on the earth weighs 10 stone
would, if transported to the sun, weigh nearly 2 tons, and, if he
remained of the same strength as on earth, would be crushed by his own
weight.

[Illustration:

  PLATE V.

The Sun, February 3, 1905. Royal Observatory, Greenwich.]

The first telescopic view of the sun is apt, it must be confessed,
to be a disappointment. The moon is certainly a much more attractive
subject for a casual glance. Its craters and mountain ranges catch
the eye at once, while the solar disc presents an appearance of almost
unbroken uniformity. Soon, however, it will become evident that the
uniformity is only apparent. Generally speaking, the surface will
quickly be seen to be broken up by one or more dark spots (Plate V.),
which present an apparently black centre and a sort of grey shading
round about this centre. The margin of the disc will be seen to be
notably less bright than its central portions; and near the margin,
and oftenest, though not invariably, in connection with one of the
dark spots, there will be markings of a brilliant white, and often of
a fantastically branched shape, which seem elevated above the general
surface; while as the eye becomes more used to its work it will be
found that even a small telescope brings out a kind of mottled or
curdled appearance over the whole disc. This last feature may often
be more readily seen by moving the telescope so as to cause the solar
image to sweep across the field of view, or by gently tapping the
tube so as to cause a slight vibration. Specks of dirt which may have
gathered upon the field lens of the eye-piece will also be seen; but
these may be distinguished from the spots by moving the telescope
a little, when they will shift their place relatively to the other
features; and their exhibition may serve to suggest the propriety of
keeping eye-pieces as clean as possible.

[Illustration: PLATE VI.

Photograph of Bridged Sunspot (Janssen). _Knowledge_, February, 1890.]

The spots when more closely examined will be found to present
endless irregularities in outline and size, as will be seen from the
accompanying plates and figures. On the whole, there is comparative
fidelity to two main features--a dark central nucleus, known as the
umbra, and a lighter border, the penumbra; but sometimes there are
umbræ which have no penumbra, and sometimes there are spots which can
scarcely be called more than penumbral shadings. The shape of the spot
is sometimes fairly symmetrical; at other times the most fantastic
forms appear. The umbra appears dark upon the bright disc, but is in
reality of dazzling lustre, sending to us, according to Langley, 54
per cent. of the amount of heat received from a corresponding area of
the brilliant unspotted surface. Within the umbra a yet darker deep,
if it be a deep, has been detected by various observers, but is
scarcely likely to be seen with the small optical means which we are
contemplating. The penumbra is very much lighter in colour than the
umbra, and invariably presents a streaked appearance, the lines all
running in towards the umbra, and resembling very much the edge of a
thatched roof. It will be seen to be very much lighter in colour on
the edge next the umbra, while it shades to a much darker tone on
that side which is next to the bright undisturbed part of the surface
(Figs. 14 and 15). Frequently a spot will be seen interrupted by a
bright projection from the luminous surface surrounding it which may
even extend from side to side of the spot, forming a bridge across
it (Plate VI., and Figs. 16, 17, and 18). These are the outstanding
features of the solar spots, and almost any telescope is competent to
reveal them. But these appearances have to be interpreted, so far as
that is possible, and to have some scale applied to them before their
significance can in the least be recognised. The observer will do
well to make some attempt at realizing the enormous actual size of the
seemingly trifling details which his instrument shows. For example,
the spot in Figs. 14 and 15 is identical with that measured by Mr.
Denning on the day between the dates of my rough sketches; and its
greatest diameter was then 27,143 miles. Spots such as those of 1858,
of February, 1892, and February, 1904, have approached or exceeded
140,000 miles in diameter, while others have been frequently recorded,
which, though not to be compared to these leviathans, have yet
measured from 40,000 to 50,000 miles in diameter, with umbræ of 25,000
to 30,000 miles. Of course, the accurate measurement of the spots
demands appliances which are not likely to be in a beginner's hands;
but there are various ways of arriving at an approximation which is
quite sufficient for the purpose in view--namely, a realization of
the scale of any spot as compared with that of the sun or of our own
earth.

[Illustration: FIG. 14.--SUN-SPOT, JUNE 18, 1889.]

[Illustration: FIG. 15.--SUN-SPOT, JUNE 20, 1889.]

Of these methods, the simplest on the whole seems to be that given
by Mr. W. F. Denning in his admirable volume, 'Telescopic Work for
Starlight Evenings.' Fasten on the diaphragm of an eye-piece (the
blackened brass disc with a central hole which lies between the field
and eye lenses of the eye-piece) a pair of fine wires at right angles
to one another. Bring the edge of the sun up to the vertical wire, the
eye-piece being so adjusted that the sun's motion is along the line
of the horizontal wire. This can easily be accomplished by turning the
eye-piece round until the solar motion follows the line of the wire.
Then note the number of seconds which the whole disc of the sun takes
to cross the vertical wire. Note, in the second place, the time which
the spot to be measured takes to cross the vertical wire; and, having
these two numbers, a simple rule of three sum enables the diameter of
the spot to be roughly ascertained. For the sun's diameter, 866,000
miles, is known, and the proportion which it bears to the number of
seconds which it takes to cross the wire will be the same as that
borne by the spot to its time of transit. Thus, to take Mr. Denning's
example, if the sun takes 133 seconds to cross the wire, and the spot
takes 6·5, then 133: 866,000::6·5:42,323, which latter number will be,
roughly speaking, the diameter of the spot in miles. This, method
is only a very rough approximation; still, it at least enables the
observer to form some conception of the scale of what is being seen.
It will answer best when the sun is almost south, and is, of course,
less and less accurate as the spot in question is removed from
the centre of the disc; for the sun being a sphere, and not a flat
surface, foreshortening comes largely and increasingly into play as
spots near the edge (or limb) of the disc.

Continued observation will speedily lead to the detection of the
exceedingly rapid changes which often affect the spots and their
neighbourhood. There are instances in which a spot passes across the
disc without any other apparent changes save those which are due to
perspective; and the same spot may even accomplish a complete rotation
and appear again with but little change. But, generally speaking, it
will be noticed that the average spot changes very considerably during
the course of a single rotation. Often, indeed, the changes are so
rapid as to be apparent within the course of a few hours. Figs. 14
and 15 represent a spot which was seen on June 18 and 20, 1889, and
sketched by means of a 2-1/2-inch refractor with a power of 80. A
certain proportion of the change noticeable is due to perspective, but
there are also changes of considerable importance in the structure
of the spot which are actual, and due to motion of its parts. Mr.
Denning's drawing ('Telescopic Work,' p. 95) shows the spot on the day
between these two representations, and exhibits an intermediate stage
of the change. The late Professor Langley has stated that when he was
making the exquisite drawing of a typical sun-spot which has become so
familiar to all readers of astronomical text-books and periodicals,
a portion of the spot equal in area to the continent of South America
changed visibly during the time occupied in the execution of the
drawing; and this is only one out of many records of similar tenor.
Indeed, no one who has paid any attention to solar observation can
fail to have had frequent instances of change on a very large scale
brought under his notice; and when the reality of such change has been
actually witnessed, it brings home to the mind, as no amount of mere
statement can, the extraordinary mobility of the solar surface, and
the fact that we are here dealing with a body where the conditions are
radically different from those with which we are familiar on our own
globe. Changes which involve the complete alteration in appearance
of areas of many thousand square miles have to be taken into
consideration as things of common occurrence upon the sun, and must
vitally affect our ideas of his constitution and structure (Figs. 16,
17, 18).

[Illustration: FIG. 16.--SUN-SPOT SEEN IN 1870.]

Little more can be done by ordinary observation with regard to the
spots and the general surface. Common instruments are not likely to
have much chance with the curious structure into which the coarse
mottling of the disc breaks up when viewed under favourable
circumstances. This structure, compared by Nasmyth to willow-leaves,
and by others to rice-grains, is beautifully seen in a number of the
photographs taken by Janssen and others; but it is seldom that it can
be seen to full advantage.

[Illustration: FIG. 17.--ANOTHER PHASE OF SPOT (FIG. 16).]

[Illustration: FIG. 18.--PHASE OF SPOT (FIGS. 16 AND 17).]

On the other hand, the spots afford a ready means by which the
observer may for himself determine approximately the rotation period
of the sun. A spot will generally appear to travel across the solar
disc in about 13 days 14-1/2 hours, and to reappear at the eastern
limb after a similar lapse of time, thus making the apparent
rotation-period 27 days 5 hours. This has to be corrected, as the
earth's motion round the sun causes an apparent slackening in the rate
of the spots, and a deduction of about 2 days has to be made for this
reason, the resulting period being about 25 days 7 hours. It will
quickly be found that no single spot can be relied upon to give
anything like a precise determination, as many have motions of their
own independent of that due to the sun's rotation; and, in addition,
there has been shown to be a gradual lengthening of the period in high
latitudes. Thus, spots near the equator yield a period of 25·09 days,
those in latitude 15° N. or S. one of 25·44, and those in latitude 30°
one of 26·53.

This law of increase, first established by Carrington, has been
confirmed by the spectroscopic measures of Dunér at Upsala. His
periods, while uniformly in excess of those derived from ordinary
observations, show the same progression. For 0° his period is 25·46
days, for 15° 26·35, and for 30° 27·57. Continuing his researches up
to 15° from the solar pole, Dunér has found that at that point the
period of rotation is protracted to 38.5 days.

Reference has already been made to the bright and fantastically
branched features which diversify the solar surface, generally
appearing in connection with the spots, and best seen near the limb,
though existing over the whole disc. These 'faculæ,' as they are
called, will be readily seen with a small instrument--I have seen them
easily with a 2-inch finder and a power of 30. They suggest at once to
the eye the idea that they are elevations above the general surface,
and look almost like waves thrown up by the convulsions which
produce the spots. The rotation-period given by them has also been
ascertained, and the result is shorter than that given by the spots.
In latitude 0° it is 24·66 days, at 15° it is 25·26, at 30° 25·48.
These varieties of rotation show irresistibly that the sun cannot
in any sense of the term be called a rigid body. As Professor Holden
remarks: 'It is more like a vast whirlpool, where the velocities of
rotation depend on the situation of the rotating masses, not only as
to latitude, but also as to depth beneath the rotating surface.' Plate
VII., from a photograph of the sun taken by Mr. Hale, in which the
surface is portrayed by the light of one single calcium ray of the
solar spectrum, presents a view of the mottled appearance of the disc,
together with several bright forms which the author of the photograph
considers to be faculæ. M. Deslandres, of the Meudon Observatory, who
has also been very successful in this new branch of solar photography,
considers, however, that these forms are not faculæ, but distinct
phenomena, to which he proposes to assign the name 'faculides'; and
for various reasons his view appears to be the more probable. They
are, however, in any case, in close relation with the faculæ, and, as
Miss Clerke observes, 'symptoms of the same disturbance.'

[Illustration:

  PLATE VII.

Solar Surface with Faculæ. Yerkes Observatory.]

The question of the nature of the sun spots is one that at once
suggests itself; but it must be confessed that no very satisfactory
answer can yet be given to it. None of the many theories put forward
have covered all the observed facts, and an adequate solution seems
almost as far off as ever. No one can fail to be struck with the
resemblance which the spots present to cavities in the solar surface.
Instinctively the mind seems to regard the umbra of the spot as being
the centre of a great hollow of which the penumbra represents the
sloping sides; and for long it was generally held that Wilson's
theory, which assumed this appearance to correspond to an actual fact,
was correct. Wilson found by observation of certain spots that when
the spot was nearest to one limb the penumbra disappeared, either
altogether or in part, on the side towards the centre, and that this
process was reversed as the spot approached the opposite limb, the
portion of the penumbra nearest the centre of the disc being always
the narrowest.

This is the order of appearances which would naturally follow if the
spot in question were a cavity; and if it were invariable there could
scarcely be any doubt as to its significance. But while the Wilsonian
theory has been recognised in all the text-books for many years,
there has always been a suspicion that it was by no means adequately
established, and that it was too wide an inference from the number of
cases observed; and of late years it has been falling more and more
into discredit. Howlett, for example, an observer of great experience,
has asserted that the appearances on which the theory is based are not
the rule, but the exception, and that therefore it must be given up.
Numbers of spots seem to present the appearance of elevations rather
than of depressions, and altogether it seems as though no category has
yet been attained which will embrace all the varieties of spot-form.
On this point further observation is very much needed, and the
work that has to be done is well within the reach of even moderate
instruments.

The fact that sun-spots wax and wane in numbers in a certain definite
period was first ascertained by the amateur observer Schwabe of
Dessau, whose work is a notable example of what may be accomplished by
steadfast devotion to one particular branch of research. Without any
great instrumental equipment, Schwabe effected the discovery of
this most important fact--a discovery second to none made in the
astronomical field during the last century--simply by the patient
recording of the state of the sun's face for a period of over thirty
years, during which he succeeded in securing an observation, on the
average, on about 300 days out of every year. The period now accepted
differs slightly from that assigned by him, and amounts to 11·11
years. Beginning with a minimum, when few spots or none may be visible
for some time, the spots will be found to increase gradually in
number, until, about four and a half years from the minimum, a maximum
is reached; and from this point diminution sets in, and results,
in about 6·6 years, in a second minimum. The period is not one
of absolute regularity--a maximum or a minimum may sometimes
lag considerably behind its proper time, owing to causes as yet
unexplained. Still, on the whole, the agreement is satisfactory.

This variation is also accompanied by a variation in the latitude of
the spots. Generally they follow certain definite zones, mostly lying
between 10° and 35° on either side of the solar equator. As a minimum
approaches, they tend to appear nearer to the equator than usual; and
when the minimum has passed the reappearance of the spots takes the
opposite course, beginning in high latitudes.

It has further been ascertained that a close connection exists between
the activity which results in the formation of sun-spots, and the
electrical phenomena of our earth. Instances of this connection have
been so repeatedly observed as to leave no doubt of its reality,
though the explanation of it has still to be found. It has been
suggested by Young that there may be immediate and direct action in
this respect between the sun and the earth, an action perhaps kindred
with that solar repulsive force which seems to drive off the material
of a comet's tail. As yet not satisfactorily accounted for is the fact
that it does not always follow that the appearance of a great sun-spot
is answered by a magnetic storm on the earth. On the average the
connection is established; but there are many individual instances
of sun-spots occurring without any answering magnetic thrill from the
earth. To meet this difficulty, Mr. E. W. Maunder has proposed a view
of the sun's electrical influence upon our earth, which, whether it
be proved or disproved in the future, seems at present the most living
attempt to account for the observed facts. Briefly, he considers it
indubitably proved--

  1. That our magnetic disturbances are connected with the sun.

  2. That the sun's action, of whatever nature, is not from the sun as
     a whole, but from restricted areas.

  3. That the sun's action is not radiated, but restricted in
     direction.

On his view, the great coronal rays or streamers seen in total
eclipses (Plate VIII.) are lines of force, and similarly the magnetic
influence which the sun exerts upon the earth acts along definite and
restricted lines. Thus a disturbance of great magnitude upon the sun
would only be followed by a corresponding disturbance on the earth
if the latter happened to be at or near the point where it would fall
within the sweep of the line of magnetic force emanating from the
sun. In proportion as the line of magnetic force approached to falling
perpendicularly on the earth, the magnetic disturbance would be large:
in proportion as it departed from the perpendicular it would diminish
until it vanished finally altogether. The suggestion seems an inviting
one, and has at least revived very considerably the interest in these
phenomena.

Such, then, are the solar features which offer themselves to direct
observation by means of a small telescope. The spots, apart from their
own intrinsic interest, are seen to furnish a fairly accurate method
by which the observer can determine for himself the sun's rotation
period. Their size may be approximately measured, thus conveying to
the mind some idea of the enormous magnitude of the convulsions which
take place upon this vast globe. The spot zones may be noted, together
with the gradual shift in latitude as the period approaches or recedes
from minimum; while observations of individual spots may be conducted
with a view to gathering evidence which shall help either to confirm
or to confute the Wilsonian theory. In this latter department of
observation the main requisite is that the work should be done
systematically. Irregular observation is of little or no value; but
steady work may yield results of high importance. While, however,
systematic observation is desirable, it is not everyone who has the
time or the opportunity to give this; and to many of us daily solar
observation may represent an unattainable ideal. Even if this be the
case, there still remains an inexhaustible fund of beauty and interest
in the sun-spots. It does not take regular observation to enable one
to be interested in the most wonderful intricacy and beauty of the
solar detail, in its constant changes, and in the ideas which even
casual work cannot fail to suggest as to the nature and mystery of
that great orb which is of such infinite importance to ourselves.

A small instrument, used in the infrequent intervals which may be all
that can be snatched from the claims of other work, will give the
user a far more intelligent interest in the sun, and a far better
appreciation of its features, than can be gained by the most careful
study of books. In this, and in all other departments of astronomy,
there is nothing like a little practical work to give life to the
subject.

In the conduct of observation, however, regard must be paid to the
caution given at the beginning of this chapter. Various methods have
been adopted for minimizing the intense glare and heat. For small
telescopes--up to 2-1/2 inches or so--the common device of the
interposition of a coloured glass between the eye-piece and the eye
will generally be found sufficient on the score of safety, though
other arrangements may be found preferable. Such glasses are usually
supplied with small instruments, mounted in brass caps which screw or
slide on to the ends of the various eye-pieces. Neutral tint is
the best, though a combination of green and red also does well.
Red transmits too much heat for comfort. Should dark glasses not be
supplied, it is easy to make them by smoking a piece of glass to the
required depth, protecting it from rubbing by fastening over it a
covering glass which rests at each end on a narrow strip of cardboard.

With anything larger than 2-1/2 inches, dark glass is never quite
safe. A 3-inch refractor will be found quite capable of cracking and
destroying even a fairly thick glass if observation be long continued.
The contrivance known as a polarizing eye-piece was formerly pretty
much beyond the reach of the average amateur by reason of its
costliness. Such eye-pieces are now becoming much cheaper, and
certainly afford a most safe and pleasant way of viewing the sun. They
are so arranged that the amount of light and heat transmitted can be
reduced at will, so as to render the use of a dark glass unnecessary,
thus enabling the observer to see all details in their natural
colouring. The ordinary solar diagonal, in which the bulk of the rays
is rejected, leaving only a small portion to reach the eye, is cheaper
and satisfactory, though a light screen-glass is still required with
it. But unquestionably the best general method of observing, and also
the least costly, is that of projecting the sun's image through the
telescope upon a prepared white surface, which may be of paper, or
anything else that may be found suitable.

To accomplish this a light framework may be constructed in the shape
of a truncated cone. At its narrow end it slips or screws on to the
eye-end of the telescope, and it may be made of any length required,
in proportion to the size of solar disc which it is desired to obtain.
It should be covered with black cloth, and its base may be a board
with white paper stretched on it to receive the image, which is viewed
through a small door in the side. In place of the board with white
paper, other expedients may be tried. Noble recommends a surface of
plaster of Paris, smoothed while wet on plate glass, and this is very
good if you can get the plaster smooth enough. I have found white
paint, laid pretty thickly on glass and then rubbed down to a smooth
matt surface by means of cuttle-fish bone, give very satisfactory
results. Should it be desired to exhibit the sun's image to several
people at once, this can easily be done by projecting it upon a sheet
of paper fastened on a drawing-board, and supported at right angles to
the telescope by an easel. The framework, or whatever takes its place,
being in position, the telescope is pointed at the sun by means of
its shadow; when this is perfectly round, or when the shadow of the
framework perfectly corresponds to the shape of its larger end, the
sun's image should be in the field of view.




CHAPTER IV

THE SUN'S SURROUNDINGS


We have now reached the point beyond which mere telescopic power will
not carry us, a point as definite for the largest instrument as for
the smallest. We have traced what can be seen on the visible sun, but
beyond the familiar disc, and invisible at ordinary seasons or with
purely telescopic means, there lie several solar features of the
utmost interest and beauty, the study of which very considerably
modifies our conception of the structure of our system's ruler. These
features are only revealed in all their glory and wonder during the
fleeting moments in which a total eclipse is central to any particular
portion of the earth's surface.

A solar eclipse is caused by the fact that the moon, in her revolution
round the earth, comes at certain periods between us and the sun, and
obscures the light of the latter body either partially or totally.
Owing to the fact that the plane of the orbit in which the moon
revolves round the earth does not coincide with that in which the
earth revolves round the sun, the eclipse is generally only partial,
the moon not occupying the exact line between the centres of the sun
and the earth. The dark body of the moon then appears to cut off a
certain portion, larger or smaller, of the sun's light; but none of
the extraordinary phenomena to be presently described are witnessed.
Even during a partial eclipse, however, the observer may find
considerable interest in watching the outline of the dark moon, as
projected upon the bright background of the sun. It is frequently
jagged or serrated, the projections indicating the existence, on the
margin of the lunar globe, of lofty mountain ranges.

[Illustration: FIG. 19.--ECLIPSES OF THE SUN AND MOON.]

Occasionally the conditions are such that the moon comes centrally
between the earth and the sun (Fig. 19), and then an eclipse occurs
which may be either total or annular. The proportion between the
respective distances from us of the sun and the moon is such that
these two bodies, so vastly different in real bulk, are sensibly the
same in apparent diameter, so that a very slight modification of the
moon's distance is sufficient to reduce her diameter below that of
the sun. The lunar orbit is not quite circular, but has a small
eccentricity. It may therefore happen that an eclipse occurs when the
moon is nearest the earth, at which point she will cover the sun's
disc with a little to spare; or the eclipse may occur when she is
furthest away from the earth, in which case the lunar diameter will
appear less than that of the sun, and the eclipse will be only an
annular one, and a bright ring or 'annulus' of sunlight will be seen
surrounding the dark body of the moon at the time when the eclipse is
central.

All conditions being favourable, however--that is to say, the eclipse
being central, and the moon at such a position in her orbit as to
present a diameter equal to, or slightly greater than, that of the
sun--a picture of extraordinary beauty and wonder reveals itself the
moment that totality has been established. The centre of the view is
the black disc of the moon. From behind it on every side there streams
out a wonderful halo of silvery light which in some of its furthest
streamers may sometimes extend to a distance of several million
miles. In the Indian Eclipse of 1898, for example, one streamer was
photographed by Mrs. Maunder, which extended to nearly six diameters
from the limb of the eclipsed sun (Plate VIII.). The structure of this
silvery halo is of the most remarkable complexity, and appears to be
subject to continual variations, which have already been ascertained
to be to some extent periodical and in sympathy with the sun-spot
period. At its inner margin this halo rests upon a ring of crimson
fire which extends completely round the sun, and throws up here and
there great jets or waves, which frequently assume the most fantastic
forms and rise to heights varying from 20,000 to 100,000 miles, or
in extreme instances to a still greater height. To these appearances
astronomers have given the names of the Corona, the Chromosphere, and
the Prominences. The halo of silvery light is the Corona, the ring
of crimson fire the Chromosphere, and the jets or waves are the
Prominences.

[Illustration: PLATE VIII.

Coronal Streamers: Eclipse of 1898. From Photographs by Mrs. Maunder.]

The Corona is perhaps the most mysterious of all the sun's
surroundings. As yet its nature remains undetermined, though the
observations which have been made at every eclipse since attention was
first directed to it have been gradually suggesting and strengthening
the idea that there exists a very close analogy between the coronal
streamers and the Aurora or the tails of comets. The extreme rarity
of its substance is conclusively proved by the fact that such
insubstantial things as comets pass through it apparently unresisted
and undelayed. Its structure presents variations in different
latitudes. Near the poles it exhibits the appearance of brushes of
light, the rays shooting out from the sun towards each summit of
his axis, while the equatorial rays curve over, presenting a sort
of fish-tail appearance. These variations are modified, as already
mentioned, by some cause which is at all events coincident with the
sun-spot period. At minimum the corona presents itself with polar
brushes of light and fish-tail equatorial rays, the latter being
sometimes of the most extraordinary length, as in the case of the
eclipse of July 29, 1878, when a pair of these wonderful streamers
extended east and west of the eclipsed sun to a distance of at least
10,000,000 miles.

When an eclipse occurs at a spot-maximum, the distribution of the
coronal features is found to have entirely changed. Instead of being
sharply divided into polar brushes and equatorial wings, the streamers
are distributed fairly evenly around the whole solar margin, in a
manner suggesting the rays from a star, or a compass-card ornament.
The existence of this periodic change has been repeatedly confirmed,
and there can be no doubt that the corona reflects in its structure
the system of variation which prevails upon the sun. 'The form of the
corona,' says M. Deslandres, 'undergoes periodical variations, which
follow the simultaneous periodical variations already ascertained for
spots, faculæ, prominences, and terrestrial magnetism.' Certainty
as to its composition has not yet been attained; nor is this to be
wondered at, for the corona is only to be seen in the all too brief
moments during which a total eclipse is central, and then only over
narrow tracts of country, and all attempts to secure photographs of
it at other times have hitherto failed. When examined with the
spectroscope, it yields evidence that its light is derived from three
sources--from the incandescence of solid or liquid particles, from
reflected sunshine, and from gaseous emissions. The characteristic
feature of the coronal spectrum is a bright green line belonging to an
unknown element which has been named 'coronium.'

The Chromosphere and the Prominences, unlike the elusive corona,
may now be studied continuously by means of the spectroscope, and
instruments are now made at a comparatively moderate price, which, in
conjunction with a small telescope--3 inches will suffice--will enable
the observer to secure most interesting and instructive views of
both. The chromosphere is, to use Miss Clerke's expression, 'a solar
envelope, but not a solar atmosphere.' It surrounds the whole globe of
the sun to a depth of probably from 3,000 to 4,000 miles, and has
been compared to an ocean of fire, but seems rather to present the
appearance of a close bristling covering of flames which rise above
the surface of the visible sun like the blades of grass upon a lawn.
Any one of these innumerable flames may be elevated into unusual
proportions in obedience to the vast and mysterious forces which
are at work beneath, and then becomes a prominence. On the whole
the constitution of the chromosphere is the same as that of the
prominences. Professor Young has found that its normal constituents
are hydrogen, helium, coronium, and calcium. But whenever there is any
disturbance of its surface, the lines which indicate the presence of
these substances are at once reinforced by numbers of metallic
lines, indicating the presence of iron, sodium, magnesium, and other
substances.

The scale to which these upheavals attain in the prominences is very
remarkable. For example, Young records the observation of a prominence
on October 7, 1880. When first seen, at about 10.30 a.m., it was about
40,000 miles in height and attracted no special attention. Half
an hour later it had doubled its height. During the next hour it
continued to soar upwards until it reached the enormous altitude of
350,000 miles, and then broke into filaments which gradually faded
away, until by 12.30 there was nothing left of it. On another occasion
he recorded one which darted upwards in half an hour from a moderate
elevation to a height of 200,000 miles, and in which clouds of
hydrogen must have been hurled aloft with a speed of at least
200 miles per second. (Plate IX. gives a representation of the
chromosphere and prominences from a photograph by M. Deslandres.)
Between the chromosphere and the actual glowing surface of the sun
which we see lies what is known as the 'reversing layer,' from the
fact that owing to its presence the dark lines of the solar spectrum
are reversed in the most beautiful way during the second at the
beginning and end of totality in an eclipse. Young, who was the first
to observe this phenomenon (December 22, 1870), remarks of it that as
soon as the sun has been hidden by the advancing moon, 'through the
whole length of the spectrum, in the red, the green, the violet, the
bright lines flash out by hundreds and thousands, almost startlingly;
as suddenly as stars from a bursting rocket-head, and as evanescent,
for the whole thing is over within two or three seconds.'

[Illustration:

  PLATE IX.

The Chromosphere and Prominences, April 11, 1894. Photographed by M.
H. Deslandres.]

The spectrum of the reversing layer has since been photographed on
several occasions--first by Shackleton, at Novaya Zemlya, on August 9,
1896--and its bright lines have been found to be true reversals of the
dark lines of the normal solar spectrum. This layer may be described
as a thin mantle, perhaps 500 miles deep, of glowing metallic vapours,
surrounding the whole body of the sun, and normally, strange to say,
in a state of profound quiescence. Its presence was of course an
integral part of Kirchhoff's theory of the mode in which the dark
lines of the solar spectrum were produced. Such a covering was
necessary to stop the rays whose absence makes the dark lines; and it
was assumed that the rays so stopped would be seen bright, if only the
splendour of the solar light could be cut off. These assumptions have
therefore been verified in the most satisfactory manner.

Thus, then, the structure of the sun as now known is very different
from the conception of it which would be given by mere naked-eye,
or even telescopic, observation. We have first the visible bright
surface, or photosphere, with its spots, faculæ, and mottling, and
surrounded by a kind of atmosphere which absorbs much of its light, as
is evidenced by the fact that the solar limb is much darker than the
centre of the disc (Plate V.); next the reversing layer, consisting of
an envelope of incandescent vapours, which by their absorption of the
solar rays corresponding to themselves give rise to the dark lines in
the spectrum. Beyond these again lies the chromosphere, rising into
gigantic eruptive or cloud-like forms in the prominences; and yet
further out the strange enigmatic corona.

It must be confessed that the reversing layer, the chromosphere, and
the corona lie somewhat beyond the bounds and purpose of this volume;
but without mention of them any account of the sun is hopelessly
incomplete, and it is not at all improbable that a few years may see
the spectroscope so brought within the reach of ordinary observers as
to enable them in great measure to realize for themselves the facts
connected with the complex structure of the sun. In any case, the mere
recital of these facts is fitted to convey to the mind a sense of the
utter inadequacy of our ordinary conceptions of that great body which
governs the motions of our earth, and supplies to it and to the other
planets of our system life and heat, light and guidance. With the
unaided eye we view the sun as a small tranquil white disc; the
telescope reveals to us that it is a vast globe convulsed by storms
which involve the upheaval or submersion, within a few hours, of areas
far greater than our own world; the spectroscope or the total eclipse
adds to this revelation the further conception of a sweltering ocean
of flame surrounding the whole solar surface, and rising in great
jets of fire which would dissolve our whole earth as a drop of wax
is melted in the flame of a candle; while beyond that again the
mysterious corona stretches through unknown millions of miles its
streamers of silvery light--the great enigma of solar physics. Other
bodies in the universe present us with pictures of beautiful symmetry
and vast size: some even within our own system suggest by their
appearance the presence within their frame of tremendous forces
which are still actively moulding them; but the sun gives us the most
stupendous demonstration of living force that the mind of man can
apprehend. Of course there are many stars which are known to be suns
on which processes similar to those we have been considering are being
carried on on a yet vaster scale; but the nearness of our sun brings
the tremendous energy of these processes home to us in a way that
impresses the mind with a sense almost of fear.

'Is it possible,' says Professor Newcomb, 'to convey to the mind any
adequate conception of the scale on which natural operations are here
carried on? If we call the chromosphere an ocean of fire, we must
remember that it is an ocean hotter than the fiercest furnace, and as
deep as the Atlantic is broad. If we call its movements hurricanes, we
must remember that our hurricanes blow only about 100 miles an hour,
while those of the chromosphere blow as far in a single second. They
are such hurricanes as, coming down upon us from the north, would, in
thirty seconds after they had crossed the St. Lawrence, be in the Gulf
of Mexico, carrying with them the whole surface of the continent in
a mass not simply of ruin, but of glowing vapour.... When we speak of
eruptions, we call to mind Vesuvius burying the surrounding cities in
lava; but the solar eruptions, thrown 50,000 miles high, would engulf
the whole earth, and dissolve every organized being on its surface in
a moment. When the mediæval poets sang, "Dies iræ, dies illa, solvet
sæclum in favilla," they gave rein to their wildest imagination
without reaching any conception of the magnitude or fierceness of the
flames around the sun.'

The subject of the maintenance of the sun's light and heat is one that
scarcely falls within our scope, and only a few words can be devoted
to it. It is practically impossible for us to attain to any adequate
conception of the enormous amount of both which is continually being
radiated into space. Our own earth intercepts less than the two
thousand millionth part of the solar energy. It has been estimated
that if a column of ice 2-1/4 miles in diameter could be erected to
span the huge interval of 92,700,000 miles between the earth and the
sun, and if the sun could concentrate the whole of his heat upon it,
this gigantic pillar of ice would be dissolved in a single second; in
seven more it would be vaporized. The amount of heat developed on
each square foot of solar surface is 'equivalent to the continuous
evolution of about 10,000 horse-power'; or, as otherwise stated,
is equal to that which would be produced by the hourly burning of
nine-tenths of a ton of anthracite coal on the same area of 1 square
foot.

It is evident, therefore, that mere burning cannot be the source of
supply. Lord Kelvin has shown that the sun, if composed of solid coal,
would burn itself out in about 6,000 years.

Another source of heat may be sought in the downfall of meteoric
bodies upon the solar surface; and it has been calculated that the
inrush of all the planets of our system would suffice to maintain the
present energy for 45,604 years. But to suppose the existence near
the sun of anything like the amount of meteoric matter necessary to
account, on this theory, for the annual emission of heat involves
consequences which are quite at variance with observed facts, though
it is possible, or even practically certain, that a small proportion
of the solar energy is derived from this source.

We are therefore driven back upon the source afforded by the slow
contraction of the sun. If this contraction happens, as it must, an
enormous amount of heat must be developed by the process, so much so
that Helmholtz has shown that an annual contraction of 250 feet would
account for the total present emission. This contraction is so
slow that about 9,500 years would need to elapse before it became
measurable with anything like certainty. In the meantime, then, we may
assume as a working hypothesis that the light and heat of the central
body of our system are maintained, speaking generally, by his steady
contraction. Of course this process cannot have gone on, and cannot go
on, indefinitely; but as the best authorities have hitherto regarded
the date when the sun shall have shrunk so far as to be no longer able
to support life on the earth as distant from us by some ten million
years, and as the latest investigations on the subject, those of Dr.
See, point in the direction of a very large extension of this limit,
we may have reasonable comfort in the conviction that the sun will
last our time.




CHAPTER V

MERCURY


The planet nearest to the sun is not one which has proved itself
particularly attractive to observers in the past; and the reasons for
its comparative unattractiveness are sufficiently obvious. Owing to
the narrow limits of his orbit, he never departs further from the sun
either East or West than between 27° and 28°, and the longest period
for which he can be seen before sunrise or after sunset is two hours.
It follows that, when seen, he is never very far from the horizon,
and is therefore enveloped in the denser layers of our atmosphere, and
presents the appearance sadly familiar to astronomers under the name
of 'boiling,' the outlines of the planet being tremulous and confused.
Of course, observers who have powerful instruments provided with
graduated circles can find and follow him during the day, and it is in
daylight that nearly all the best observations have been secured. But
with humbler appliances observation is much restricted; and, in fact,
probably many observers have never seen the planet at all.

Views of Mercury, however, such as they are, are by no means so
difficult to secure as is sometimes supposed. Denning remarks that
he has seen the planet on about sixty-five occasions with the naked
eye--that in May, 1876, he saw it on thirteen different evenings, and
on ten occasions between April 22 and May 11, 1890; and he states
it as his opinion that anyone who will make it a practice to obtain
naked-eye views should succeed from about twelve to fifteen times in
the year. During the spring of 1905, to take a recent example, Mercury
was quite a conspicuous object for some time in the Western sky, close
to the horizon, and there was no difficulty whatever in obtaining
several views of him both with the telescope and with the naked eye,
though the disc was too much disturbed by atmospheric tremors
for anything to be made of it telescopically. In his little book,
'Half-hours with the Telescope,' Proctor gives a method of finding the
planet which would no doubt prove quite satisfactory in practice, but
is somewhat needlessly elaborate. Anyone who takes the pains to
note those dates when Mercury is most favourably placed for
observation--dates easily ascertained from Whitaker or any other good
almanac--and to carefully scan the sky near the horizon after sunset
either with the naked eye, or, better, with a good binocular, will
scarcely fail to detect the little planet which an old English writer
more graphically than gracefully calls 'a squinting lacquey of the
sun.'

Mercury is about 3,000 miles in diameter, and circles round the sun at
a mean distance of 36,000,000 miles. His orbit is very eccentric, so
that when nearest to the sun this distance is reduced to 28,500,000,
while when furthest away from him it rises to 43,500,000. The
proportion of sunlight which falls upon the planet must therefore vary
considerably at different points of his orbit. In fact, when he is
nearest to the sun he receives nine times as much light and heat
as would be received by an equal area of the earth; but when the
conditions are reversed, only four times the same amount. The bulk of
the planet is about one-nineteenth that of the earth, but its weight
is only one-thirtieth, so that its materials are proportionately less
dense than those of our own globe. It is about 3-1/2 times as dense as
water, the corresponding figure for the earth being rather more than
5-1/2.

Further, it is apparent that the materials of which Mercury's globe
is composed reflect light very feebly. It has been calculated that the
planet reflects only 17 per cent. of the light which falls upon it, 83
per cent. being absorbed; and this fact obviously carries with it the
conclusion that the atmosphere of this little world cannot be of any
great density. For clouds in full sunlight are almost as brilliantly
white as new-fallen snow, and if Mercury were surrounded with a
heavily cloud-laden atmosphere, he would reflect nearly five times the
amount of light which he at present sends out into space.

As his orbit falls entirely within that of our own earth, Mercury,
like his neighbour Venus, exhibits phases. When nearest to us the
planet is 'new,' when furthest from us it is 'full,' while at the
stages intermediate between these points it presents an aspect like
that of the moon at its first and third quarters. It may thus be
seen going through the complete series from a thin crescent up to a
completely rounded disc. The smallness of its apparent diameter,
and the poor conditions under which it is generally seen, make the
observation of these phases by no means so easy as in the case of
Venus; yet a small instrument will show them fairly well. Observers
seem generally to agree that the surface has a dull rosy tint, and a
few faint markings have, by patient observation, been detected upon
it (Fig. 20); but these are far beyond the power of small telescopes.
Careful attention to them and to the rate of their apparent motion
across the disc has led to the remarkable conclusion that Mercury
takes as long to rotate upon his axis as he does to complete his
annual revolution in his orbit; in other words, that his day and his
year are of the same length--namely, eighty-eight of our days. This
conclusion, when announced in 1882 by the well-known Italian observer
Schiaparelli, was received with considerable hesitation. It has,
however, been confirmed by many observers, notably by Lowell at
Flagstaff Observatory, Arizona, and is now generally received,
though some eminent astronomers still maintain that really nothing is
certainly known as to the period of rotation.

[Illustration: FIG. 20.--MERCURY AS A MORNING STAR. W. F. DENNING,
10-INCH REFLECTOR.]

If the long period be accepted, it follows that Mercury must always
turn the same face to the sun--that one of his hemispheres must always
be scorching under intense heat, and the other held in the grasp of an
unrelenting cold of which we can have no conception. 'The effects of
these arrangements upon climate,' says Miss Agnes Clerke, 'must be
exceedingly peculiar.... Except in a few favoured localities, the
existence of liquid water must be impossible in either hemisphere.
Mercurian oceans, could they ever have been formed, should long ago
have been boiled off from the hot side, and condensed in "thick-ribbed
ice" on the cold side.'

From what has been said it will be apparent that Mercury is scarcely
so interesting a telescopic object as some of the other planets. Small
instruments are practically ruled out of the field by the diminutive
size of the disc which has to be dealt with, and the average
observer is apt to be somewhat lacking in the patience without which
satisfactory observations of an object so elusive cannot be secured.
At the same time there is a certain amount of satisfaction and
interest in the mere detection of the little sparkling dot of light in
the Western sky after the sun has set, or in the Eastern before it has
risen; and the revelation of the planet's phase, should the telescope
prove competent to accomplish it, gives better demonstration than any
diagram can convey of the interior position of this little world. It
is consoling to think that even great telescopes have made very little
indeed of the surface of Mercury. Schiaparelli detected a number
of brownish stripes and streaks, which seemed to him sufficiently
permanent to be made the groundwork of a chart, and Lowell has made
a remarkable series of observations which reveal a globe seamed and
scarred with long narrow markings; but many observers question the
reality of these features altogether.

It is perhaps just within the range of possibility that, even with
a small instrument, there may be detected that blunting of the South
horn of the crescent planet which has been noticed by several reliable
observers. But caution should be exercised in concluding that such a
phenomenon has been seen, or that, if seen, it has been more than
an optical illusion. Those who have viewed Mercury under ordinary
conditions of observation will be well aware how extremely difficult
it is to affirm positively that any markings on the surface or any
deformations of the outline of the disc are real and actual facts, and
not due to the atmospheric tremors which affect the little image.

Interesting, though of somewhat rare occurrence, are the transits of
Mercury, when the planet comes between us and the sun, and passes as a
black circular dot across the bright solar surface. The first occasion
on which such a phenomenon was observed was November 7, 1631. The
occurrence of this transit was predicted by Kepler four years in
advance; and the transit itself was duly observed by Gassendi, though
five hours later than Kepler's predicted time. It gives some idea
of the uncertainty which attended astronomical calculations in those
early days to learn that Gassendi considered it necessary to begin
his observations two days in advance of the time fixed by Kepler.
If, however, the time of a transit can now be predicted with almost
absolute accuracy, it need not be forgotten that this result is
largely due to the labours of men who, like Kepler, by patient effort
and with most imperfect means, laid the foundations of the most
accurate of all sciences.

The next transit of Mercury available for observation will take place
on November 14, 1907. It may be noted that during transits certain
curious appearances have been observed. The planet, for example,
instead of appearing as a black circular dot, has been seen surrounded
with a luminous halo, and marked by a bright spot upon its dark
surface. No satisfactory explanation of these appearances has been
offered, and they are now regarded as being of the nature of optical
illusions, caused by defects in the instruments employed, or by
fatigue of the eye. It might, however, be worth the while of any who
have the opportunity of observing the transit of 1907 to take notice
whether these features do or do not present themselves. For their
convenience it may be noted that the transit will begin about eleven
o'clock on the forenoon of November 14, and end about 12.45.




CHAPTER VI

VENUS


Next in order to Mercury, proceeding outwards from the sun, comes the
planet Venus, the twin-sister, so to speak, of the earth, and familiar
more or less to everybody as the Morning and Evening Star. The
diameter of Venus, according to Barnard's measures with the 36-inch
telescope of the Lick Observatory, is 7,826 miles; she is therefore
a little smaller than our own world. Her distance from the sun is a
trifle more than 67,000,000 miles, and her orbit, in strong contrast
with that of Mercury, departs very slightly from the circular. Her
density is a little less than that of the earth.

There is no doubt that, to the unaided eye, Venus is by far the most
beautiful of all the planets, and that none of the fixed stars can
for a moment vie with her in brilliancy. In this respect she is
handicapped by her position as an inferior planet, for she never
travels further away from the sun than 48°, and, even under the most
favourable circumstances, cannot be seen for much more than four hours
after sunset. Thus we never have the opportunity of seeing her, as
Mars and Jupiter can be seen, high in the South at midnight, and far
above the mists of the horizon. Were it possible to see her under such
conditions, she would indeed be a most glorious object. Even as it
is, with all the disadvantages of a comparatively low position and a
denser stratum of atmosphere, her brilliancy is extremely striking,
having been estimated, when at its greatest, at about nine times that
of Sirius, which is the brightest of all the fixed stars, and five
times that of Jupiter when the giant planet is seen to the best
advantage. It is, in fact, so great that, when approaching its
maximum, the shadows cast by the planet's light are readily seen, more
especially if the object casting the shadow have a sharply defined
edge, and the shadow be received upon a white surface--of snow, for
instance. This extreme brilliance points to the fact that the surface
of Venus reflects a very large proportion of the sunlight which falls
upon it--a proportion estimated as being at least 65 per cent., or
not very much less than that reflected by newly fallen snow. Such
reflective power at once suggests an atmosphere very dense and heavily
cloud-laden; and other observations point in the same direction.
So that in the very first two planets of the system we are at once
confronted with that diversity in details which coexists throughout
with a broad general likeness as to figure, shape of orbit, and other
matters. Mercury's reflective power is very small, that of Venus is
exceedingly great; Mercury's atmosphere seems to be very attenuated,
that of Venus, to all appearance, is much denser than that of our own
earth.

Periodically, when Venus appears in all her splendour in the Western
sky, one meets with the suggestion that we are having a re-appearance
of the Star of Bethlehem; and it seems to be a perpetual puzzle to
some people to understand how the same body can be both the Morning
and the Evening Star. Those who have paid even the smallest attention
to the starry heavens are not, however, in the least likely to make
any mistake about the sparkling silver radiance of Venus; and it
would seem as though the smallest application of common-sense to the
question of the apparent motion of a body travelling round an almost
circular orbit which is viewed practically edgewise would solve for
ever the question of the planet's alternate appearance on either side
of the sun. Such an orbit must appear practically as a straight line,
with the sun at its middle point, and along this line the planet will
appear to travel like a bead on a wire, appearing now on one side of
the sun, now on another. If the reader will draw for himself a diagram
of a circle (sufficiently accurate in the circumstances), with the
sun in the centre, and divide it into two halves by a line supposed to
pass from his eye through the sun, he will see at once that when this
circle is viewed edgewise, and so becomes a straight line, a planet
travelling round it is bound to appear to move back and forward along
one half of it, and then to repeat the same movement along the other
half, passing the sun in the process.

Like Mercury, and for the same reason of a position interior to our
orbit, Venus exhibits phases to us, appearing as a fully illuminated
disc when she is furthest from the earth, as a half-moon at the
two intermediate points of her orbit, and as a new moon when she is
nearest to us. The actual proof of the existence of these phases was
one of the first-fruits which Galileo gathered by means of his
newly invented telescope. It is said that Copernicus predicted their
discovery, and they certainly formed one of the conclusive proofs
of the correctness of his theory of the celestial system. It was the
somewhat childish custom of the day for men of science to put forth
the statement of their discoveries in the form of an anagram, over
which their fellow-workers might rack their brains; probably this was
done somewhat for the same reason which nowadays makes an inventor
take out a patent, lest someone should rob the discoverer of the
credit of his discovery before he might find it convenient to make
it definitely public. Galileo's anagram, somewhat more poetically
conceived than the barbarous alphabetic jumble in which Huygens
announced his discovery of the nature of Saturn's ring, read as
follows: 'Hæc immatura a me jam frustra leguntur o. y.' This,
when transposed into its proper order, conveyed in poetic form the
substance of the discovery: 'Cynthiæ figuras æmulatur Mater Amorum'
(The Mother of the Loves [Venus] imitates the phases of Cynthia). It
is true that two letters hang over the end of the original sentence,
but too much is not to be expected of an anagram.

As a telescopic object, Venus is apt to be a little disappointing. Not
that her main features are difficult to see, or are not beautiful. A
2-inch telescope will reveal her phases with the greatest ease, and
there are few more exquisite sights than that presented by the silvery
crescent as she approaches inferior conjunction. It is a picture which
in its way is quite unique, and always attractive even to the most
hardened telescopist.

Still, what the observer wants is not merely confirmation of the
statement that Venus exhibits phases. The physical features of a
planet are always the most interesting, and here Venus disappoints.
That very brilliant lustre which makes her so beautiful an object to
the naked eye, and which is even so exquisite in the telescopic view,
is a bar to any great progress in the detection of the planet's actual
features. For it means that what we are seeing is not really the
surface of Venus, but only the sunward side of a dense atmosphere--the
'silver lining' of heavy clouds which interpose between us and the
true surface of the planet, and render it highly improbable that
anything like satisfactory knowledge of her features will ever be
attained. Newcomb, indeed, roundly asserts that all markings hitherto
seen have been only temporary clouds and not genuine surface markings
at all; though this seems a somewhat absolute verdict in view of the
number of skilled observers who have specially studied the planet and
assert the objective reality of the markings they have detected. The
blunting of the South horn of the planet, visible in Mr. MacEwen's
fine drawing (Plate X.), is a feature which has been noted by so many
observers that its reality must be conceded. On the other hand, some
of the earlier observations recording considerable irregularities of
the terminator (margin of the planet between light and darkness), and
detached points of light at one of the horns, must seemingly be given
up. Denning, one of the most careful of observers, gives the following
opinion: 'There is strong negative evidence among modern observations
as to the existence of abnormal features, so that the presence of
very elevated mountains must be regarded as extremely doubtful....
The detached point at the South horn shown in Schröter's telescope
was probably a false appearance due to atmospheric disturbances or
instrumental defects.' It will be seen, therefore, that the observer
should be very cautious in inferring the actual existence of any
abnormal features which may be shown by a small telescope; and
the more remarkable the features shown, the more sceptical he may
reasonably be as to their reality. The chances are somewhat heavily
in favour of their disappearance under more favourable conditions of
seeing.

[Illustrations (2):

  PLATE X.

Venus. H. MacEwen. 5-inch Refractor.]

The same remark applies, with some modifications, to the dark markings
which have been detected on the planet by all sorts of observers
with all sorts of telescopes. There is no doubt that faint grey
markings, such as those shown in Plate X., are to be seen; the
observations of many skilled observers put this beyond all question.
Even Denning, who says that personally he has sometimes regarded the
very existence of these markings as doubtful, admits that 'the evidence
affirming their reality is too weighty and too numerously attested to
allow them to be set aside'; and Barnard, observing with the Lick
telescope, says that he has repeatedly seen markings, but always so
'vague and ill-defined that nothing definite could be made of them.'

The observations of Lowell and Douglass at Flagstaff, Arizona, record
quite a different class of markings, consisting of straight, dark,
well-defined lines; as yet, however, confirmation of these remarkable
features is scanty, and it will be well for the beginner who, with a
small telescope and in ordinary conditions of observing, imagines he
has detected such markings to be rather more than less doubtful about
their reality. The faint grey areas, which are real features, at least
of the atmospheric envelope, if not of the actual surface, are
beyond the reach of small instruments. Mr. MacEwen's drawings, which
accompany this chapter, were made with a 5-inch Wray refractor, and
represent very well the extreme delicacy of these markings. I have
suspected their existence when observing with an 8-1/2-inch With
reflector in good air, but could never satisfy myself that they were
really seen.

Up till the year 1890 the rotation period of Venus was usually stated
at twenty-three hours twenty-one minutes, or thereby, though this
figure was only accepted with some hesitation, as in order to
arrive at it there had to be some gentle squeezing of inconvenient
observations. But in that year Schiaparelli announced that his
observations were only consistent with a long period of rotation,
which could not be less than six months, and was not greater
than nine. The announcement naturally excited much discussion.
Schiaparelli's views were strongly controverted, and for a time the
astronomical world seemed to be almost equally divided in opinion.
Gradually, however, the conclusion has come to be more and more
accepted that Venus, like Mercury, rotates upon her axis in the same
time as she takes to make her journey round the sun--in other words,
that her day and her year are of the same length, amounting to about
225 of our days. In 1900 the controversy was to some extent reopened
by the statement of the Russian astronomer Bélopolsky that his
spectroscopic investigations pointed to a much more rapid rotation--to
a period, indeed, considerably shorter than twenty-four hours. It
is difficult, however, to reconcile this with the absence of polar
flattening in the globe of Venus. Lowell's spectroscopic observations
are stated by him to point to a period in accordance with his
telescopic results--namely, 225 days. The matter can scarcely be
regarded as settled in the meantime, but the balance of evidence seems
in favour of the longer period.

Another curious and unexplained feature in connection with the planet
is what is frequently termed the 'phosphorescence' of the dark side.
This is an appearance precisely similar to that seen in the case of
the moon, and known as 'the old moon in the young moon's arms.' The
rest of the disc appears within the bright crescent, shining with a
dull rusty light. In the case of Venus, however, an explanation is
not so easily arrived at as in that of the moon, where, of course,
earth-light accounts for the visibility of the dark portion. Had the
planet been possessed of a satellite, the explanation might have lain
there; but Venus has no moon, and therefore no moonlight to brighten
her unilluminated portion; and our world is too far distant for
earth-shine to afford an explanation. It has been suggested that
electrical discharges similar to the aurora may be at the bottom of
the mystery; but this seems a little far-fetched, as does also the
attribution of the phenomenon to real phosphorescence of the oceans
of Venus. Professor Newcomb cuts the Gordian knot by observing: 'It
is more likely due to an optical illusion.... To whatever we might
attribute the light, it ought to be seen far better after the end of
twilight in the evening than during the daytime. The fact that it is
not seen then seems to be conclusive against its reality.' But the
appearance cannot be disposed of quite so easily as this, for it is
not accurate to say that it is only seen in the daytime, and against
Professor Newcomb's dictum may be set the judgment of the great
majority of the observers who have made a special study of the planet.

We may, however, safely assign to the limbo of exploded ideas that of
the existence of a satellite of Venus. For long this object was one
of the most persistent of astronomical ghosts, and refused to be
laid. Observations of a companion to the planet, much smaller, and
exhibiting a similar phase, were frequent during the eighteenth
century; but no such object has presented itself to the far finer
instruments of modern times, and it may be concluded that the moon of
Venus has no real existence.

Venus, like Mercury, transits the sun's disc, but at much longer
intervals which render her transits among the rarest of astronomical
events. Formerly they were also among the most important, as they were
believed to furnish the most reliable means for determining the sun's
distance; and most of the estimates of that quantity, up to within the
last twenty-five years, were based on transit of Venus observations.
Now, however, other methods, more reliable and more readily
applicable, are coming into use, and the transit has lost somewhat of
its former importance. The interest and beauty of the spectacle still
remain; but it is a spectacle not likely to be seen by any reader of
these pages, for the next transit of Venus will not take place until
June, 2004.

As already indicated, Venus presents few opportunities for useful
observation to the amateur. The best time for observing, as in
the case of Mercury, is in broad daylight; and for this, unless in
exceptional circumstances, graduated circles and a fairly powerful
telescope are required. Practically the most that can be done by the
possessor of a small instrument is to convince himself of the reality
of the phases, and of the non-existence of a satellite of any size,
and to enjoy the exquisite and varying beauty of the spectacle
which the planet presents. Should his telescope be one of the small
instruments which show hard and definite markings on the surface,
he may also consider that he has learned a useful lesson as to the
possibility of optical illusion, and, incidentally, that he may be
well advised to procure a better glass when the opportunity of doing
so presents itself. The 'phosphorescence' of the dark side may be
looked for, and it may be noted whether it is not seen after dark,
or whether it persists and grows stronger. Generally speaking,
observations should be made as early in the evening as the planet can
be seen in order that the light of the sky may diminish as much as
possible the glare which is so evident when Venus is viewed against a
dark background.




CHAPTER VII

THE MOON


Our attention is next engaged by the body which is our nearest
neighbour in space and our most faithful attendant and useful servant.
The moon is an orb of 2,163 miles in diameter, which revolves round
our earth in a slightly elliptical orbit, at a mean distance of about
240,000 miles. The face which she turns to us is a trifle greater
in area than the Russian Empire, while her total surface is almost
exactly equal to the areas of North and South America, islands
excluded. Her volume is about 2/99 of that of the earth; her materials
are, however, much less dense than those of which our world is
composed, so that it would take about eighty-one moons to balance the
earth. One result of these relations is that the force of gravity at
the lunar surface is only about one-sixth of that at the surface of
the earth, so that a twelve-stone man, if transported to the moon,
would weigh only two stone, and would be capable of gigantic feats
in the way of leaping and lifting weights. The fact of the diminished
force of gravity is of importance in the consideration of the question
of lunar surfacing.

[Illustration: FIG. 21.--THE TIDES.

A, Spring Tide (New Moon); B, Neap Tide.]

The most conspicuous service which our satellite performs for us is
that of raising the tides. The complete statement of the manner in
which she does this would be too long for our pages; but the general
outline of it will be seen from the accompanying rough diagram (Fig.
21), which, it must be remembered, makes no attempt at representing
the scale either of the bodies concerned or of their distances from
one another, but simply pictures their relations to one another at the
times of spring and neap tides. The moon (M in Fig. 21, A) attracts
the whole earth towards it. Its attraction is greatest at the point
nearest to it, and therefore the water on the moonward side is drawn
up, as it were, into a heap, making high tide on that side of the
earth. But there is also high tide at the opposite side, the reason
being that the solid body of the earth, which is nearer to the moon
than the water on the further side, is more strongly attracted, and
so leaves the water behind it. Thus there are high tides at the two
opposite sides of the earth which lie in a straight line with the
moon, and corresponding low tides at the intermediate positions. Tides
are also produced by the attraction of the sun, but his vastly greater
distance causes his tide-producing power to be much less than that of
the moon. His influence is seen in the difference between spring and
neap tides. Spring tides occur at new or full moon (Fig. 21, A, case
of new moon). At these two periods the sun, moon, and earth, are all
in one straight line, and the pull of the sun is therefore added to
that of the moon to produce a spring tide. At the first and third
quarters the sun and moon are at right angles to one another; their
respective pulls therefore, to some extent, neutralize each other, and
in consequence we have neap tide at these seasons.

[Illustration:

  PLATE XI.

The Moon, April 5, 1900. Paris Observatory.]

No one can fail to notice the beautiful set of phases through which
the moon passes every month. A little after the almanac has announced
'new moon,' she begins to appear as a thin crescent low down in the
West, and setting shortly after the sun. Night by night we can watch
her moving eastward among the stars, and showing more and more of
her illuminated surface, until at first quarter half of her disc is
bright. The reader must distinguish this real eastward movement from
the apparent east to west movement due to the daily rotation of the
earth. Its reality can readily be seen by noting the position of the
moon relatively to any bright star. It will be observed that if she
is a little west of the star on one night, she will have moved to a
position a little east of it by the next. Still moving farther East,
she reaches full, and is opposite to the sun, rising when he sets, and
setting when he rises. After full, her light begins to wane, till at
third quarter the opposite half of her disc is bright, and she is seen
high in the heavens in the early morning, a pale ghost of her evening
glories. Gradually she draws nearer to the sun, thinning down to the
crescent shape again until she is lost once more in his radiance, only
to re-emerge and begin again the same cycle of change.

The time which the moon actually takes to complete her journey round
the earth is twenty-seven days, seven hours, and forty-three minutes;
and if the earth were fixed in space, this period, which is called the
_sidereal month_, would be the actual time from new moon to new moon.
While the moon has been making her revolution, however, the earth has
also been moving onwards in its journey round the sun, so that the
moon has a little further to travel in order to reach the 'new
moon' position again, and the time between two new moons amounts to
twenty-nine days, twelve hours, forty-four minutes. This period
is called a _lunar month_, and is also the _synodic period_ of our
satellite, a term which signifies generally the period occupied by any
planet or satellite in getting back to the same position with respect
to the sun, as observed from the earth.

The fact that the moon shows phases signifies that she shines only
by reflected light; and it is surprising to notice how little of the
light that falls upon her is really reflected by her. On an ordinarily
clear night most people would probably say that the moon is much
brighter than any terrestrial object viewed in the daytime, when it
also is lit by the sun, as the moon is. Yet a very simple comparison
will show that this is not so. If the moon be compared during the
daytime with the clouds floating around her, she will be seen to be
certainly not brighter than they, generally much less bright; indeed,
even an ordinary surface of sandstone will look as bright as her
disc. In fact, the reason of her great apparent brightness at night is
merely the contrast between her and the dark background against which
she is seen; a fragment of our own world, put in her place, would
shine quite as brightly, perhaps even more so. It is possibly rather
difficult at first to realize that our earth is shining to the moon
and to the other planets as they do to us, but anyone who watches the
moon for a few days after new will find convincing evidence of the
fact. Within the arms of the thin crescent can be seen the whole body
of the lunar globe, shining with a dingy coppery kind of light--'the
ashen light,' as it is called. People talk of this as 'the old moon
in the young moon's arms,' and weather-wise (or foolish) individuals
pronounce it to be a sign of bad weather. It is, of course, nothing
of the sort, for it can be seen every month when the sky is reasonably
clear; but it is the sign that our world shines to the other worlds of
space as they do to her; for this dim light upon the part of the moon
unlit by the sun is simply the light which our own world reflects from
her surface to the moon. In amount it is thirteen times more than that
which the moon gives to us, as the earth presents to her satellite a
disc thirteen times as large as that exhibited by the latter.

The moon's function in causing eclipses of the sun has already been
briefly alluded to. In turn she is herself eclipsed, by passing behind
the earth and into the long cone of shadow which our world casts
behind it into space (Fig. 19). It is obvious that such eclipses can
only happen when the moon is full. A total eclipse of the moon, though
by no means so important as a solar eclipse, is yet a very interesting
and beautiful sight. The faint shadow or penumbra is often scarcely
perceptible as the moon passes through it; but the passage of the dark
umbra over the various lunar formations can be readily traced, and
is most impressive. Cases of 'black eclipses' have been sometimes
recorded, in which the moon at totality has seemed actually to
disappear as though blotted out of the heavens; but in general this
is not the case. The lunar disc still remains visible, shining with
a dull coppery light, something like the ashen light, but of a
redder tone. This is due to the fact that our earth is not, like
its satellite, a next to airless globe, but is possessed of a pretty
extensive atmosphere. By this atmosphere those rays of the sun which
would otherwise have just passed the edge of the world are caught
and refracted so that they are directed upon the face of the eclipsed
moon, lighting it up feebly. The redness of the light is due to that
same atmospheric absorption of the green and blue rays which causes
the body of the setting sun to seem red when viewed through the dense
layer of vapours near the horizon. When the moon appears totally
eclipsed to us, the sun must appear totally eclipsed to an observer
stationed on the moon. A total solar eclipse seen from the moon must
present features of interest differing to some extent from those which
the similar phenomenon exhibits to us. The duration of totality will
be much longer, and, in addition to the usual display of prominences
and corona, there will be the strange and weird effect of the black
globe of our world becoming gradually bordered with a rim of ruddy
light as our atmosphere catches and bends the solar rays inwards upon
the lunar surface.

In nine cases out of ten the moon will be the first object to which
the beginner turns his telescope, and he will find in our satellite
a never-failing source of interest, and a sphere in which, by patient
observation and the practice of steadily recording what is seen, he
may not only amuse and instruct himself, but actually do work that
may become genuinely useful in the furtherance of the science. The
possession of powerful instrumental means is not an absolute essential
here, for the comparative nearness of the object brings it well within
the reach of moderate glasses. The writer well remembers the keen
feeling of delight with which he first discovered that a very humble
and commonplace telescope--nothing more, in fact, than a small
ordinary spy-glass with an object-glass of about 1 inch in
aperture--was able to reveal many of the more prominent features of
lunar scenery; and the possessor of any telescope, no matter whether
its powers be great or small, may be assured that there is enough work
awaiting him on the moon to occupy the spare time of many years with
one of the most enthralling of studies. The view that is given by even
the smallest instrument is one of infinite variety and beauty; and its
interest is accentuated by the fact that the moon is a sphere where
practically every detail is new and strange.

If the moon be crescent, or near one or other of her quarters at the
time of observation, the eye will at once be caught by a multitude
of circular, or nearly circular depressions, more clearly marked the
nearer they are to the line of division between the illuminated
and unilluminated portions of the disc. (This line is known as the
Terminator, the circular outline, fully illuminated, being called the
Limb). The margins of some of these depressions will be seen actually
to project like rings of light into the darkness, while their
interiors are filled with black shadow (Plates XI., XIII., XV., and
XVI.). At one or two points long bright ridges will be seen, extending
for many miles across the surface, and marking the line of one or
other of the prominent ranges of lunar mountains (Plates XI., XIII.,
XVI., XVII.); while the whole disc is mottled over with patches of
varied colour, ranging from dark grey up to a brilliant yellow which,
in some instances, nearly approaches to white.

If observation be conducted at or near the full, the conditions will
be found to have entirely changed. There are now very few ruggednesses
visible on the edge of the disc, which now presents an almost smooth
circular outline, nor are there any shadows traceable on the surface.
The circular depressions, formerly so conspicuous, have now almost
entirely vanished, though the positions and outlines of a few of them
may still be traced by their contrast in colour with the surrounding
regions. The observer's attention is now claimed by the extraordinary
brilliance and variety of the tones which diversify the sphere, and
particularly by the curious systems of bright streaks radiating from
certain well-marked centres, one of which, the system originating
near Tycho, a prominent crater not very far from the South Pole, is
so conspicuous as to give the full moon very much the appearance of a
badly-peeled orange (Plate XII.).

[Illustration:

  PLATE XII.

The Moon, November 13, 1902. Paris Observatory.]

As soon as the moon has passed the full, the ruggedness of its margin
begins once more to become apparent, but this time on the opposite
side; and the observer, if he have the patience to work late at night
or early in the morning, has the opportunity of seeing again all
the features which he saw on the waxing moon, but this time with the
shadows thrown the reverse way--under evening instead of under morning
illumination. In fact the character of any formation cannot be truly
appreciated until it has been carefully studied under the setting as
well as under the rising and meridian sun.

We must now turn our attention to the various types of formation which
are to be found upon the moon. These may be roughly summarized as
follows: (1) The great grey plains, commonly known as Maria, or seas;
(2) the circular or approximately circular formations, known generally
as the lunar craters, but divided by astronomers into a number of
classes to which reference will be made later; (3) the mountain
ranges, corresponding with more or less closeness to similar features
on our own globe; (4) the clefts or rills; (5) the systems of bright
rays, to which allusion has already been made.

1. THE GREAT GREY PLAINS.--These are, of course, the most conspicuous
features of the lunar surface. A number of them can be easily seen
with the naked eye; and, so viewed, they unite with the brighter
portions to form that resemblance to a human face--'the man in
the moon'--with which everyone is familiar. A field-glass or small
telescope brings out their boundaries with distinctness, and suggests
a likeness to our own terrestrial oceans and seas. Hence the name
Maria, which was applied to them by the earlier astronomers, whose
telescopes were not of sufficient power to reveal more than their
broader outlines. But a comparatively small aperture is sufficient
to dispel the idea that these plains have any right to the title of
'seas.' The smoothness which at first suggests water proves to be only
relative. They are smooth compared with the brighter regions of the
moon, which are rugged beyond all terrestrial precedent; but they
would probably be considered no smoother than the average of our own
non-mountainous land surfaces. A 2 or 2-1/2-inch telescope will reveal
the fact that they are dotted over with numerous irregularities, some
of them very considerable. It is indeed not common to find a crater of
the largest size associated with them; but, at the same time, craters
which on our earth would be considered huge are by no means uncommon
upon their surface, and every increase of telescopic power reveals a
corresponding increase in the number of these objects (Plates XIII.,
XV., XVII.).

[Illustration:

  PLATE XIII.

The Moon, September 12, 1903. Paris Observatory.]

Further, the grey plains are characterized by features of which
instances may be seen with a very small instrument, though the more
delicate specimens require considerable power--namely, the long
winding ridges which either run concentrically with the margins of the
plains, or cross their surface from side to side. Of these the
most notable is the great serpentine ridge which traverses the Mare
Serenitatis in the north-west quadrant of the moon. As it runs,
approximately, in a north and south direction, it is well placed
for observation, and even a low power will bring out a good deal of
remarkable detail in connection with it. It rises in some places to a
height of 700 or 800 feet (Neison), and is well shown on many of the
fine lunar photographs now so common. Another point of interest in
connection with the Maria is the existence on their borders of a
number of large crater formations which present the appearance of
having had their walls breached and ruined on the side next the mare
by the action of some obscure agency. From consideration of these
ruined craters, and of the 'ghost craters,' not uncommon on the
plains, which present merely a faint outline, as though almost
entirely submerged, it has been suggested, by Elger and others, that
the Maria, as we see them represent, not the beds of ancient seas,
but the consolidated crust of some fluid or viscous substance such as
lava, which has welled forth from vents connected with the interior
of the moon, overflowing many of the smaller formations, and partially
destroying the walls of these larger craters. Notable instances of
these half-ruined formations will be found in Fracastorius (Plate
XIX., No. 78, and Plate XI.), and Pitatus (Plate XIX., No. 63,
and Plate XV.). The grey plains vary in size from the vast Oceanus
Procellarum, nearly 2,000,000 square miles in area, down to the Mare
Humboldtianum, whose area of 42,000 square miles is less than that of
England.

2. THE CIRCULAR, OR APPROXIMATELY CIRCULAR FORMATIONS.--These, the
great distinguishing feature of lunar scenery, have been classified
according to the characteristics, more or less marked, which
distinguish them from one another, as walled-plains, mountain-rings,
ring-plains, craters, crater-cones, craterlets, crater-pits, and
depressions. For general purposes we may content ourselves with the
single title craters, using the more specific titles in outstanding
instances.

[Illustration:

  PLATE XIV.

Region of Maginus: Overlapping Craters. Paris Observatory.]

To these strange formations we have scarcely the faintest analogy
on earth. Their multitude will at once strike even the most casual
observer. Galileo compared them to the 'eyes' in a peacock's tail, and
the comparison is not inapt, especially when the moon is viewed with
a small telescope and low powers. In the Southern Hemisphere
particularly, they simply swarm to such an extent that the district
near the terminator presents much the appearance of a honeycomb with
very irregular cells, or a piece of very porous pumice (Plate XIV.).
Their vast size is not less remarkable than their number. One of the
most conspicuous, for example, is the great walled-plain Ptolemäus,
which is well-placed for observation near the centre of the visible
hemisphere. It measures 115 miles from side to side of its great
rampart, which, in at least one peak, towers more than 9,000 feet
above the floor of the plain within. The area of this enormous
enclosure is about equal to the combined areas of Yorkshire,
Lancashire, and Westmorland--an extent so vast that an observer
stationed at its centre would see no trace of the mountain-wall which
bounds it, save at one point towards the West, where the upper part of
the great 9,000-feet peak already referred to would break the line of
the horizon (Plate XIX., No. 111; Plate XIII.).

Nor is Ptolemäus by any means the largest of these objects. Clavius,
lying towards the South Pole, measures no less than 142 miles from
wall to wall, and includes within its tremendous rampart an area of at
least 16,000 square miles. The great wall which encloses this space,
itself no mean range of mountains, stands some 12,000 feet above the
surface of the plain within, while in one peak it rises to a height
of 17,000 feet. Clavius is remarkable also for the number of smaller
craters associated with it. There are two conspicuous ones, one on the
north, one on the south side of its wall, each about twenty-five
miles in diameter, while the floor is broken by a chain of four large
craters and a considerable number of smaller ones.

Though unfavourably placed for observation, there is no lunar feature
which can compare in grandeur with Clavius when viewed either at
sunrise or sunset. At sunrise the great plain appears first as a huge
bay of black shadow, so large as distinctly to blunt the southern horn
of the moon to the naked eye. As the sun climbs higher, a few bright
points appear within this bay of darkness--the summits of the walls of
the larger craters--these bright islands gradually forming fine rings
of light in the shadow which still covers the floor of the great
plain. In the East some star-like points mark where the peaks of the
eastern wall are beginning to catch the dawn. Then delicate streaks
of light begin to stream across the floor, and the dark mass of shadow
divides itself into long pointed shafts, which stretch across the
plain like the spires of some great cathedral. The whole spectacle
is so magnificent and strange that no words can do justice to it; and
once seen it will not readily be forgotten. Even a small telescope
will enable the student to detect and draw the more important features
of this great formation; and for those whose instruments are more
powerful there is practically no limit to the work that may be done
on Clavius, which has never been studied with the minuteness that so
great and interesting an object deserves. (Clavius is No. 13, Plate
XIX. See also Plates XIII. and XV., and Fig. 22, the latter a rough
sketch with a 2-5/8-inch refractor.)

From such gigantic forms as these, the craters range downwards in an
unbroken sequence through striking objects such as Tycho and the grand
Copernicus, both distinguished for their systems of bright rays, as
well as for their massive and regular ramparts, to tiny pits of black
shadow, a few hundred feet across, and with no visible walls, which
tax the powers of the very finest instruments. Schmidt's great map
lays down nearly 33,000 craters, and it is quite certain that these
are not nearly all which can be seen even with a moderate-sized
telescope.

[Illustration:

  PLATE XV.

Clavius, Tycho, and Mare Nubium. Yerkes Observatory.]

As to the cause which has resulted in this multitude of circular
forms, there is no definite consensus of opinion. Volcanic action is
the agency generally invoked; but, even allowing for the diminished
force of gravity upon the moon, it is difficult to conceive of
volcanic action of such intensity as to have produced some of the
great walled-plains. Indeed, Neison remarks that such formations are
much more akin to the smaller Maria, and bear but little resemblance
to true products of volcanic action. But it seems difficult to tell
where a division is to be made, with any pretence to accuracy, between
such forms as might certainly be thus produced and those next above
them in size. The various classes of formation shade one into the
other by almost imperceptible degrees.

[Illustration: FIG. 22.

CLAVIUS, June 7, 1889, 10 p.m., 2-5/8 inch.]

3. THE MOUNTAIN RANGES.--These are comparatively few in number, and
are never of such magnitude as to put them, like the craters, beyond
terrestrial standards of comparison. The most conspicuous range is
that known as the Lunar Apennines, which runs in a north-west and
south-east direction for a distance of upwards of 400 miles along
the border of the Mare Imbrium, from which its mass rises in a steep
escarpment, towering in one instance (Mount Huygens) to a height of
more than 18,000 feet. On the western side the range slopes gradually
away in a gentle declivity. The spectacle presented by the Apennines
about first quarter is one of indescribable grandeur. The shadows of
the great peaks are cast for many miles over the surface of the Mare
Imbrium, magnificently contrasting with the wild tract of hill-country
behind, in which rugged summits and winding valleys are mingled in a
scene of confusion which baffles all attempt at delineation. Two other
important ranges--the Caucasus and the Alps--lie in close proximity
to the Apennines; the latter of the two notable for the curious Alpine
Valley which runs through it in a straight line for upwards of eighty
miles. This wonderful chasm varies in breadth from about two miles,
at its narrowest neck, to about six at its widest point. It is closely
bordered, for a considerable portion of its length, by almost vertical
cliffs thousands of feet in height, and under low magnifying powers
appears so regular as to suggest nothing so much as the mark of
a gigantic chisel, driven by main force through the midst of the
mountain mass. The Alpine Valley is an easy object, and a power of
50 on a 2-inch telescope will show its main outlines quite clearly.
Indeed, the whole neighbourhood is one which will well repay the
student, some of the finest of the lunar craters, such as Plato,
Archimedes, Autolycus, and Aristillus, lying in the immediate vicinity
(Plates XIII. and XVII.).

[Illustration:

  PLATE XVI.

Region of Theophilus and Altai Mountains. Yerkes Observatory.]

Among the other mountain-ranges may be mentioned the Altai Mountains,
in the south-west quadrant (Plate XVI.), the Carpathians, close to the
great crater Copernicus, and the beautiful semicircle of hills which
borders the Sinus Iridum, or Bay of Rainbows, to the east of the
Alpine range. This bay forms one of the loveliest of lunar landscapes,
and under certain conditions of illumination its eastern cape, the
Heraclides Promontory, presents a curious resemblance, which I have
only seen once or twice, to the head of a girl with long floating
hair--'the moon-maiden.' The Leibnitz and Doerfel Mountains, with
other ranges whose summits appear on the edge of the moon, are
seldom to be seen to great advantage, though they are sometimes
very noticeably projected upon the bright disc of the sun during the
progress of an eclipse.[*] They embrace some of the loftiest lunar
peaks reaching 26,000 feet in one of or two instances, according to
Schröter and Mädler.

[Illustration: FIG. 23.

ARISTARCHUS and HERODOTUS, February 20, 1891, 6.15 p.m., 3-7/8 inch.]

4. THE CLEFTS OR RILLS.--In these, and in the ray-systems, we again
meet with features to which a terrestrial parallel is absolutely
lacking. Schröter of Lilienthal was the first observer to detect the
existence of these strange chasms, and since his time the number known
has been constantly increasing, till at present it runs to upwards of
a thousand. These objects range from comparatively coarse features,
such as the Herodotus Valley (Fig. 23), and the well-known Ariadæus
and Hyginus clefts, down to the most delicate threads, only to be seen
under very favourable conditions, and taxing the powers of the finest
instruments. They present all the appearance of cracks in a shrinking
surface, and this is the explanation of their existence which at
present seems to find most favour. In some cases, such as that of
the great Sirsalis cleft, they extend to a length of 300 miles; their
breadth varies from half a mile, or less, to two miles; their depth is
very variously estimated, Nasmyth putting it at ten miles, while Elger
only allows 100 to 400 yards. In a number of instances they appear
either to originate from a small crater, or to pass through one or
more craters in their course. The student will quickly find out for
himself that they frequently affect the neighbourhood of one or other
of the mountain ranges (as, for example, under the eastern face of the
Apennines, Plate XVII.), or of some great crater, such as Archimedes.
They are also frequently found traversing the floor of a great
walled-plain, and at least forty have been detected in the interior
of Gassendi (Plate XIX., No. 90). Smaller instruments are, of course,
incompetent to reveal more than a few of the larger and coarser of
these strange features. The Serpentine Valley of Herodotus, the cleft
crossing the floor of Petavius, and the Ariadæus and Hyginus rills
are among the most conspicuous, and may all be seen with a 2-1/2-inch
telescope and a power of 100.

[Illustration:

  PLATE XVII.

Apennines, Alps, and Caucasus. Paris Observatory.]

5. THE SYSTEMS OF BRIGHT RAYS, radiating from certain craters, remain
the most enigmatic of the features of lunar scenery. Many of these
systems have been traced and mapped, but we need only mention the
three principal--those connected with Tycho, Copernicus, and
Kepler, all shown on Plate XII. The Tycho system is by far the most
noteworthy, and at once attracts the eye when even the smallest
telescope is directed towards the full moon. The rays, which are of
great brilliancy, appear to start, not exactly from the crater itself,
but from a greyish area surrounding it, and they radiate in all
directions over the surface, passing over, and almost completely
masking in their course some of the largest of the lunar craters.
Clavius, for example, and Maginus (Plate XIV.), become at full almost
unidentifiable from this cause, though Neison's statement that 'not
the slightest trace of these great walled-plains, with their extremely
lofty and massive walls, can be detected in full,' is certainly
exaggerated. The rays are not well seen save under a high sun--_i.e._,
at or near full, though some of them can still be faintly traced under
oblique illumination.

In ordinary telescopes, and to most eyes, the Tycho rays appear to
run on uninterruptedly for enormous distances, one of them traversing
almost the whole breadth of the moon in a north-westerly direction,
and crossing the Mare Serenitatis, on whose dark background it is
conspicuous. Professor W. H. Pickering, who has made a special study
of the subject under very favourable conditions, maintains, however,
that this appearance of great length is an illusion, and that the
Tycho rays proper extend only for a short distance, being reinforced
at intervals by fresh rays issuing from small craters on their track.
The whole subject is one which requires careful study with the best
optical means.

None of the other ray-systems are at all comparable with that of
Tycho, though those in connection with Copernicus and Kepler are
very striking. As to the origin and nature of these strange features,
little is known. There are almost as many theories as there are
systems; but it cannot be said that any particular view has commanded
anything like general acceptance. Nasmyth's well-known theory was
that they represented cracks in the lunar surface, caused by internal
pressure, through which lava had welled forth and spread to a
considerable distance on either side of the original chasm. Pickering
suggests that they may be caused by a deposit of white powder, pumice,
perhaps, emitted by the craters from which the rays originate. Both
ideas are ingenious, but both present grave difficulties, and neither
has commended itself to any very great extent to observers, a remark
which applies to all other attempts at explanation.

Such are the main objects of interest upon the visible hemisphere of
our satellite. In observing them, the beginner will do well, after the
inevitable preliminary debauch of moon-gazing, during which he may
be permitted to range over the whole surface and observe anything
and everything, not to attempt an attack on too wide a field. Let
him rather confine his energies to the detailed study of one or two
particular formations, and to the delineation of all their features
within reach of his instrument under all aspects and illuminations.
By so doing he will learn more of the actual condition of the lunar
surface than by any amount of general and haphazard observation; and
may, indeed, render valuable service to the study of the moon.

Neither let him think that observations made with a small telescope
are now of no account, in view of the number of large instruments
employed, and of the great photographic atlases which are at present
being constructed. It has to be remembered that the famous map of
Beer and Mädler was the result of observations made with a 3-3/4-inch
telescope, and that Lohrmann used an instrument of only 4-4/5 inches,
and sometimes one of 3-1/4. Anyone who has seen the maps of these
observers will not fail to have a profound respect for the work that
can be done with very moderate means. Nor have even the beautiful
photographs of the Paris, Lick, and Yerkes Observatories superseded
as yet the work of the human eye and hand. The best of the Yerkes
photographs, taken with a 40-inch refractor, are said to show detail
'sufficiently minute to tax the powers of a 6-inch telescope.' But
this can be said only of a very few photographs; and, generally
speaking, a good 3-inch glass will show more detail than can be seen
on any but a few exceptionally good negatives.

In conducting his observations, the student should be careful to
outline his drawing on such a scale as will permit of the easy
inclusion of all the details which he can see, otherwise the sketch
will speedily become so crowded as to be indistinct and valueless. A
scale of 1 inch to about 20 miles, corresponding roughly to 100 inches
to the moon's diameter, will be found none too large in the case of
formations where much detail has to be inserted--that is to say, in
the case of the vast majority of lunar objects. Further, only such a
moderate amount of surface should be selected for representation as
can be carefully and accurately sketched in a period of not much over
an hour at most; for, though the lunar day is so much longer than our
own, yet the changes in aspect of the various formations due to the
increasing or diminishing height of the sun become very apparent if
observation be prolonged unduly; and thus different portions of the
sketch represent different angles of illumination, and the finished
drawing, though true in each separate detail, will be untrue as a
whole.

Above all, care must be taken to set down only what is seen with
certainty, _and nothing more_. The drawing may be good or bad, but it
must be true. A coarse or clumsy sketch which is truthful to the
facts seen is worth fifty beautiful works of art where the artist has
employed imagination or recollection to eke out the meagre results of
observation. The astronomer's primary object is to record facts, not
to make pictures. If he is skilful in recording what he sees, his
sketch will be so much the more truthful; but the facts must come
first. Such practical falsehoods as the insertion of uncertain
details, or the practice of drawing upon one's recollection of the
work of other observers, or of altering portions of a sketch which
do not please the eye, are to be studiously avoided. The observer's
record of what he has seen should be above suspicion. It may
be imperfect; it should never be false. Such cautions may seem
superfluous, but a small acquaintance with the subject of astronomical
drawing will show that they are not.

The want of a good lunar chart will speedily make itself felt.
Fortunately in these days it can be easily supplied. The great
photographic atlases now appearing are, of course, for the luxurious;
and the elaborate maps of Beer and Mädler or Schmidt are equally
out of the question for beginners. The smaller chart of the former
observers is, however, inexpensive and good, though a little crowded.
For a start there is still nothing much better than Webb's reduction
of Beer and Mädler's large chart, published in 'Celestial Objects for
Common Telescopes.' It can also be obtained separately; but requires
to be backed before use. Mellor's chart is also useful, and is
published in a handy form, mounted on mill-board. Those who wish
charts between these and the more elaborate ones will find their
wants met by such books as those of Neison or Elger. Neison's volume
contains a chart in twenty-two sections on a scale of 2 feet to
the moon's diameter. It includes a great amount of detail, and
is accompanied by an elaborate description of all the features
delineated. Its chief drawbacks are the fact that it was published
thirty years ago, and that it is an extremely awkward and clumsy
volume to handle, especially in the dim light of an observatory.
Elger's volume is, perhaps, for English students, the handiest general
guide to the moon. Its chart is on a scale of 18 inches to the moon's
diameter, and is accompanied by a full description. With either this
or Webb's chart, the beginner will find himself amply provided with
material for many a long and delightful evenings work.

[Illustration:

  PLATE XVIII.

Chart of the Moon. Nasmyth and Carpenter.]

[Illustration:

  PLATE XIX.

Key to Chart of Moon. Nasmyth and Carpenter.]

The small chart which accompanies this chapter, and which, with its
key-map, I owe to the courtesy of Mr. John Murray, the publisher of
Messrs. Nasmyth and Carpenter's volume on the moon, is not in any
sense meant as a substitute for those already mentioned, but merely
as an introduction to some of the more prominent features of lunar
scenery. The list of 229 named and numbered formations will be
sufficient to occupy the student for some time; and the essential
particulars with regard to a few of the more important formations are
added in as brief a form as possible (Appendix I.).

Before we leave our satellite, something must be said as to the
conditions prevailing on her surface. The early astronomers who
devoted attention to lunar study were drawn on in their labours
largely by the hope of detecting resemblances to our own earth, or
even traces of human habitation. Schröter and Gruithuisen imagined
that they had discovered not only indications of a lunar atmosphere,
but also evidence of change upon the surface, and traces of the
handiwork of lunarian inhabitants. Gruithuisen, in particular, was
confident that in due time it would become possible to trace the
cities and the works of the Lunarians. Gradually these hopes have
receded into the distance. The existence of a lunar atmosphere is,
indeed, no longer positively denied now, as it was a few years ago;
but it is certain that such atmosphere as may exist is of extreme
rarity, quite inadequate to support animal life as we understand such
a thing. Certain delicate changes of colour which take place within
some of the craters--Plato for instance--have been referred to
vegetation; and Professor Pickering has intimated his observation
of something which he considers to be the forming and melting of
hoar-frost within certain areas, Messier and a small crater near
Herodotus among others. But the observations at best are very delicate
and the inferences uncertain. It cannot be denied that the moon may
have an atmosphere; but positive traces of its existence are so faint
that, even if their reality be admitted, very little can be built upon
them.

At the same time when the affirmation is made that the moon is 'a
world where there is no weather, and where nothing ever happens,' the
most careful modern students of lunar matters would be the first
to question such a statement. Even supposing it to be true that no
concrete evidence of change upon the lunar surface can be had, this
would not necessarily mean that no change takes place. The moon has
certainly never been studied to advantage with any power exceeding
1,000, and the average powers employed have been much less. Nasmyth
puts 300 as about the profitable limit, and 500 would be almost an
outside estimate for anything like regular work. But even assuming the
use of a power of 1,000, that means that the moon is seen as large as
though she were only 240 miles distant from us. The reader can judge
how entirely all but the very largest features of our world would
be lost to sight at such a distance, and how changes involving the
destruction of large areas might take place and the observer be none
the wiser. When it is remembered that even at this long range we are
viewing our object through a sea of troubled air of which every tremor
is magnified in proportion to the telescopic power employed, until the
finer details are necessarily blurred and indistinct, it will be seen
that the case has been understated. Indeed it may be questioned if the
moon has ever been as well seen as though it had been situated at a
distance of 500 miles from the earth. At such a distance nothing short
of the vastest cataclysms would be visible; and it is therefore going
quite beyond the mark to assume that nothing ever happens on the moon
simply because we do not see it happening. Moreover, the balance of
evidence does appear to be inclining, slightly perhaps, but still
almost unquestionably, towards the view that change does occur upon
the moon. Some of the observations which seem to imply change may
be explained on other grounds; but there is a certain residuum which
appears to defy explanation, and it is very noteworthy that while
those who at once dismiss the idea of lunar change are, generally
speaking, those who have made no special study of the moon's surface,
the contrary opinion is most strongly maintained by eminent observers
who have devoted much time to our satellite with the best modern
instruments to aid them in their work.

The admission of the possibility of change does not, however, imply
anything like fitness for human habitation. The moon, to use Beer
and Mädler's oft-quoted phrase, is 'no copy of the earth'; and the
conditions of her surface differ widely from anything that we are
acquainted with. The extreme rarity of her atmosphere must render her,
were other conditions equally favourable, an ideal situation for an
observatory. From her surface the stars, which are hidden from us
in the daytime by the diffused light in our air, would be visible at
broad noonday; while multitudes of the smaller magnitudes which here
require telescopic power would there be plain to the unaided eye. The
lunar night would be lit by our own earth, a gigantic moon, presenting
a surface more than thirteen times as large as that which the full
moon offers us, and hanging almost stationary in the heavens, while
exhibiting all the effects of rapid rotation upon its own axis. Those
appendages of the sun, which only the spectroscope or the fleeting
total eclipse can reveal to us, the corona, the chromosphere, and the
prominences, would there be constantly visible.

Our astronomers who are painfully wrestling with atmospheric
disturbance, and are gradually being driven from the plains to the
summits of higher and higher hills in search of suitable sites for
the giant telescopes of to-day, may well long for a world where
atmospheric disturbance must be unknown, or at least a negligible
quantity.

[Footnote *: See drawings by Colonel Markwick with 2-3/4-inch
refractor, of the eclipse of August 30, 1905, 'The Total Solar
Eclipse, 1905,' British Astronomical Association, pp. 59, 60.]




CHAPTER VIII

MARS


The Red Planet is our nearest neighbour on the further, as Venus is on
the hither side. He is also in some ways the planet best situated for
our observation; for while the greatest apparent diameter of his disc
is considerably less than that of Venus, he does not hide close to the
sun's rays like the inferior planets, but may be seen all night
when in opposition.[*] Not all oppositions, however, are equally
favourable. Under the best circumstances he may come as near to us as
35,000,000 miles; when less favourably situated, he may come no nearer
than 61,000,000. This very considerable variation in his distance
arises from the eccentricity of the planet's orbit, which amounts to
nearly one-tenth, and, so far as we are concerned, it means that his
disc is three times larger when he comes to opposition at his least
distance from the sun than it is when the conditions are reversed.
Under the most favourable circumstances--_i.e._, when opposition and
perihelion[†] occur together, he presents, it has been calculated, a
disc of the same diameter as a half sovereign held up 2,000 yards from
the spectator. Periods of opposition recur at intervals of about 780
days, and at the more favourable ones the planet's brilliancy is very
striking. The 1877 opposition was very notable in this respect, and in
others connected with the study of Mars, and that which preceded the
Crimean War was also marked by great brilliancy. Readers of Tennyson
will remember how Maud

  'Seem'd to divide in a dream from a band of the blest,
  And spoke of a hope for the world in the coming wars--
                              ... and pointed to Mars
  As he glow'd like a ruddy shield on the Lion's breast.'

Ancient records tell us of his brightness having been so great on
some occasions as to create a panic. Panics were evidently more easily
created by celestial phenomena then than they are now; but possibly
such statements have to be taken with a small grain of salt.

The diameter of Mars is 4,200 miles. In volume he is equal to
one-seventh of the world; but his density is somewhat smaller, so that
nine globes such as Mars would be required to balance the earth. He
turns upon his axis in twenty-four hours thirty-seven minutes, and as
the inclination of the axis is not much different from that of our
own world he will experience seasonal effects somewhat similar to
the changes of our own seasons. The Martian seasons, however, will be
considerably longer than ours, as the year of Mars occupies 687 days,
and they will be further modified by the large variation which
his distance from the sun undergoes in the course of his year--the
difference between his greatest and least distances being no less than
26,500,000 miles.

The telescopic view of Mars at once reveals features of considerable
interest. We are no longer presented with anything like the beautiful
phases of Venus, though Mars does show a slight phase when his
position makes a right angle with the sun and the earth. This phase,
however, never amounts to more than a dull gibbosity, like that of the
moon two or three days before or after full--the most uninteresting of
phases. But the other details which are visible much more than atone
for any deficiency in this respect. The brilliant ruddy star expands
under telescopic power into a broad disc whose ground tint is a warm
ochre. This tint is diversified in two ways. At the poles there are
brilliant patches of white, larger or smaller according to the Martian
season; while the whole surface of the remaining orange-tinted portion
is broken up by patches and lines of a dark greenish-grey tone.
The analogy with Arctic and Antarctic ice and snow-fields, and with
terrestrial continents and seas, is at once and almost irresistibly
suggested, although, as will be seen, there are strong reasons for not
pressing it too far.

The dark markings, though by no means so sharply defined as the
outlines of lunar objects, are yet evidently permanent features; at
least this may be confidently affirmed of the more prominent among
them. Some of these can be readily recognised on drawings dating from
200 years back, and have served to determine with very satisfactory
accuracy the planet's rotation period. In accordance with the almost
irresistible evidence which the telescope was held to present, these
features were assumed to be seas, straits and bays, while the general
ochre-tinted portion of the planet's surface was considered to be dry
land. On this supposition the land area of Mars amounts to 5/7 of the
planet's surface, water being confined to the remaining 2/7. But it
is by no means to be taken as an accepted fact that the dark and light
areas do represent water and land. One fact most embarrassing to those
who hold this traditional view is that in the great wealth of detail
which observation with the huge telescopes of to-day has accumulated
the bulk belongs to the dark areas. Gradations of shade are seen
constantly in them; delicate details are far more commonly to be
observed upon them than upon the bright portions of the surface, and
several of the 'canals' have been traced clear through the so-called
seas. Speaking of his observations of Mars in 1894 with the 36-inch
refractor of the Lick observatory, Professor Barnard says: 'Though
much detail was shown on the bright "continental" regions, the
greater amount was visible on the so-called "seas."... During these
observations the impression seemed to force itself upon me that I was
actually looking down from a great altitude upon just such a surface
as that in which our observatory was placed. At these times there was
no suggestion that the view was one of far-away seas and oceans, but
exactly the reverse.' Such observations are somewhat disconcerting
to the old belief, which, nevertheless, continues to maintain itself,
though in somewhat modified form.

It is indeed difficult, if not impossible, to explain the observed
facts with regard, for instance, to the white polar caps, on any other
supposition than that of the existence of at least a considerable
amount of water upon the planet. These caps are observed to be large
after the Martian winter has passed over each particular hemisphere.
As the season progresses, the polar cap diminishes, and has even been
seen to melt away altogether. In one of the fine drawings by the Rev.
T. E. R. Phillips, which illustrate this chapter (Plate XX.), the
north polar snow will be seen accompanied by a dark circular line,
concerning which the author of the sketch says: 'The _melting_ cap is
always girdled by a narrow and intensely dark line. This is not seen
when the cap is forming.' It is hard to believe that this is anything
else than the result of the melting of polar snows, and where there
is melting snow there must be water. Such results as those obtained by
Professor Pickering by photography point in the same direction. In one
of his photographs the polar cap was shown much shrunken; in another,
taken a few days later, it had very considerably increased in
dimensions--as one would naturally conclude, from a fall of snow in
the interval. The quantity of water may not be anything like so
great as was at one time imagined; still, to give any evidence of
its presence at all at a distance of 40,000,000 miles it must be very
considerable, and must play an important part in the economy of the
planet.

[Illustration: PLATE XX.

Mars: Drawing 1, January 30, 1899--12 hours. [lambda] = 301°, [phi] =
+10°.

Drawing 2, April 22, 1903--10 hours. [lambda] = 200°, [phi] = +24°.

Rev. T. E. R. Phillips.]

In 1877 Schiaparelli of Milan announced that he had discovered that
the surface of Mars was covered with a network of lines running with
perfect straightness often for hundreds of miles across the surface,
and invariably connecting two of the dark areas. To these markings
he gave the name of 'canali,' a word which has been responsible for
a good deal of misunderstanding. Translated into our language by
'canals,' it suggested the work of intelligent beings, and imagination
was allowed to run riot over the idea of a globe peopled by Martians
of superhuman intelligence and vast engineering skill. The title
'canals' is still retained; but it should be noted that the term is
not meant to imply artificial construction any more than the term
'rill' on the moon implies the presence of water.

At the next opposition of Mars, Schiaparelli not only rediscovered his
canals, but made the astonishing announcement that many of them were
double, a second streak running exactly parallel to the first at some
distance from it. His observations were received with a considerable
amount of doubt and hesitation. Skilled observers declared that
they could see nothing in the heavens the least corresponding to the
network of hard lines which the Italian observer drew across the globe
of Mars; and therein to some extent they were right, for the canals
are not seen with that hardness of definition with which they
are sometimes represented. But, at the same time, each successive
opposition has added fresh proof of the fact that Schiaparelli was
essentially right in his statement of what was seen. The question
of the doubling of the canals is still under dispute, and it seems
probable that it is not a real objective fact existing upon the
planet, but is merely an optical effect due to contrast. There can be
no question, however, about the positive reality of a great number
of the canals themselves; their existence is too well attested by
observers of the highest skill and experience. 'There is really no
doubt whatever,' says Mr. Denning, 'about the streaked or striated
configuration of the Northern hemisphere of Mars. The canals do not
appear as narrow straight deep lines in my telescope, but as soft
streams of dusky material with frequent condensations.' The drawings
by Mr. Phillips well represent the surface of the planet as seen with
an instrument of considerable power; and the reader will notice that
his representation of the canals agrees remarkably well with Denning's
description. The 'soft streams with frequent condensations' are
particularly well shown on the drawing of April 22, 1903, which
represents the region of 200° longitude (see Chart, Plate XXI.) on
the centre of the disc. 'The main results of Professor Schiaparelli's
work,' remarks Mr. Phillips, 'are imperishable and beyond question.
During recent years some observers have given to the so-called
"canals" a hardness and an artificiality which they do not possess,
with the result that discredit has been brought upon the whole canal
system.... But of the substantial accuracy and truthfulness (as a
basis on which to work) of the planet's configuration as charted by
the great Italian in 1877 and subsequent years, there is in my mind no
doubt.' The question of the reality of the canal system may almost
be said to have received a definite answer from the remarkable
photographs of Mars secured in May, 1905, by Mr. Lampland at the
Flagstaff Observatory, which prove that, whatever may be the nature
of the canals, the principal ones at all events are actual features of
the planet's surface.

Much attention has been directed within the last few years to the
observations of Lowell, made with a fine 24-inch refractor at the same
observatory, which is situated at an elevation of over 7,000 feet. His
conclusion as to the reality of the canals is most positive; but in
addition to his confirmation of their existence, he has put forward
other views with regard to Mars which as yet have found comparatively
few supporters. He has pointed out that in almost all instances the
canals radiate from certain round spots which dot the surface of the
planet. These spots, which have been seen to a certain extent by
other observers, he calls 'oases,' using the term in its ordinary
terrestrial significance. His conclusions are, briefly, as follows:
That Mars has an atmosphere; that the dark regions are not seas, but
marshy tracts of vegetation; that the polar caps are snow and ice, and
the reddish portions of the surface desert land. The canals he holds
to be waterways, lined on either bank by vegetation, so that we see,
not the actual canal, but the green strip of fertilized land through
which it passes, while the round dark spots or 'oases' he believes to
be the actual population centres of the planet, where the inhabitants
cluster to profit by the fertility created by the canals. In support
of this view he adduces the observed fact that the canals and oases
begin to darken as the polar caps melt, and reasons that this implies
that the water set free by the melting of the polar snows is conveyed
by artificial means to make the wilderness rejoice.

Lowell's theories may seem, very likely are, somewhat fanciful. It
must be remembered, however, that the ground facts of his argument are
at least unquestionable, whatever may be thought of his inferences.
The melting of the polar caps is matter of direct observation; nor
can it be questioned that it is followed by the darkening of the canal
system. It is probably wiser not to dogmatize upon the reasons and
purposes of these phenomena, for the very sufficient reason that we
have no means of arriving at any certitude. Terrestrial analogies
cannot safely be used in connection with a globe whose conditions are
so different from those of our own earth. The matter is well summed up
by Miss Agnes Clerke: 'Evidently the relations of solid and liquid in
that remote orb are abnormal; they cannot be completely explained by
terrestrial analogies. Yet a series of well-authenticated phenomena
are intelligible only on the supposition that Mars is, in some real
sense a terraqueous globe. Where snows melt there must be water; and
the origin of the Rhone from a great glacier is scarcely more evident
to our senses than the dissolution of the Martian ice-caps into pools
and streams.'

[Illustration:

  PLATE XXI.

Chart of Mars. 'Memoirs of the British Astronomical Association,' Vol.
XI., Part III., Plate VI.]

Closely linked with the question of the existence of water on the
planet, and indeed a fundamental point in the settlement of it, is the
further question of whether there is any aqueous vapour in the Martian
atmosphere. The evidence is somewhat conflicting. It is quite apparent
that in the atmosphere of Mars there is nothing like the volume of
water vapour which is present in that of the earth, for if there were,
his features would be much more frequently obscured by cloud than
is found to be the case. Still there are many observations on record
which seem quite unaccountable unless the occasional presence of
clouds is allowed. Thus on May 21, 1903, Mr. Denning records that the
Syrtis Major (see Chart, Plate XXI.) being then very dark and sharply
outlined, a very bright region crossed its southern extremity. By May
23, the Syrtis Major, 'usually the most conspicuous object in Mars,
had become extremely feeble, as if covered with highly reflective
vapours.' On May 24, Mr. Phillips observed the region of Zephyria and
Aeolis to be also whitened, while the Syrtis Major was very faint; and
on the 25th, Mr. Denning observed the striking whiteness of the same
region observed by Mr. Phillips the day before. Illusion, so often
invoked to explain away inconvenient observations, seems here
impossible, in view of the prominence of the markings obscured, and
the experience of the observers; and the evidence seems strongly in
favour of real obscuration by cloud. It might have been expected that
the evidence of the spectroscope would in such a case be decisive, but
Campbell's negative conclusion is balanced by the affirmative result
reached by Huggins and Vogel. It is safe to say, however, that
whatever be the constitution of the Martian atmosphere, it is
considerably less dense than our own air mantle.

During the last few years the public mind has been unusually exercised
over Mars, largely by reason of a misapprehension of the terms
employed in the discussion about his physical features. The talk of
'canals' has suggested human, or at all events intelligent, agency,
and the expectation arose that it might not be quite impossible to
establish communication between our world and its nearest neighbour on
the further side. The idea is, of course, only an old one furbished up
again, for early in last century it was suggested that a huge triangle
or ellipse should be erected on the Siberian steppes to show the
Lunarians or the Martians that we were intelligent creatures who
knew geometry. In these circumstances curiosity was whetted by the
announcement, first made in 1890, and since frequently repeated, of
the appearance of bright projections on the terminator of Mars. These
were construed, by people with vivid imaginations, as signals from
the Martians to us; while a popular novelist suggested a more sinister
interpretation, and harrowed our feelings with weird descriptions of
the invasion of our world by Martian beings of uncouth appearance and
superhuman intelligence, who were shot to our globe by an immense gun
whose flashes occasioned the bright projections seen. The projections
were, however, prosaically referred by Campbell to snow-covered
mountains, while Lowell believed that one very large one observed at
Flagstaff in May, 1903, was due to sunlight striking on a great cloud,
not of water-vapour, but of dust.

As a matter of fact, Mars is somewhat disappointing to those who
approach the study of his surface with the hope of finding traces of
anything which might favour the idea of human habitation. He presents
an apparently enticing general resemblance to the earth, with his
polar caps and his bright and dark markings; and his curious network
of canals may suggest intelligent agency. But the resemblances are
not nearly so striking when examined in detail. The polar caps are
the only features that seem to hold their own beside their terrestrial
analogues, and even their resemblance is not unquestioned; the dark
areas, so long thought to be seas, are now proved to be certainly not
seas, whatever else they may be; and the canal system presents nothing
but the name of similarity to anything that we know upon earth. It is
quite probable that were Mars to come as near to us as our own moon,
the fancied resemblances would disappear almost entirely, and we
should find that the red planet is only another instance of the
infinite variety which seems to prevail among celestial bodies. That
being so, it need scarcely be remarked that any talk about Martian
inhabitants is, to say the least of it, premature. There may be such
creatures, and they may be anything you like to imagine. There is no
restraint upon the fancy, for no one knows anything about them, and no
one is in the least likely to know anything.

The moons of Mars are among the most curious finds of modern
astronomy. When the ingenious Dr. Jonathan Swift, in editing the
travels of Mr. Lemuel Gulliver, of Wapping, wrote that the astronomers
of Laputa had discovered 'two lesser stars, or satellites, which
revolve about Mars,' the suggestion was, no doubt, put in merely
because some detail of their skill had to be given, and as well
one unlikely thing as another. Probably no one would have been more
surprised than the Dean of St. Patrick's, had he lived long enough,
or cared sixpence about the matter, to hear that his bow drawn at a
venture had hit the mark, and that Professor Asaph Hall had detected
two satellites of Mars. The discovery was one of the first-fruits of
the 26-inch Washington refractor, and was made in 1877, the year from
which the new interest in Mars may be said to date. The two moons
have been called Deimos and Phobos, or Fear and Panic, and are, in
all probability, among the very tiniest bodies of our system, as their
diameter can scarcely be greater than ten miles. Deimos revolves in an
orbit which takes him thirty hours eighteen minutes to complete, at
a distance of 14,600 miles from the centre of Mars. Phobos is much
nearer the planet, his distance from its centre being 5,800, while
from its surface he is distant only 3,700 miles. In consequence of
this nearness, he can never be seen by an observer on Mars from any
latitude higher than 69°, the bulge of the globe permanently shutting
him out from view. His period of revolution is only seven hours
thirty-nine minutes, so that to the Martian inhabitants, if there are
any, the nearer of the planet's moons must appear to rise in the west
and set in the east. By the combination of its own revolution and the
opposite rotation of Mars it will take about eleven hours to cross the
heavens; and during that period it will go through all its phases and
half through a second display.

These little moons are certainly among the most curious and
interesting bodies of the solar system; but, unfortunately, the sight
of them is denied to most observers. That they were not seen by Sir
William Herschel with his great 4-foot reflector probably only points
to the superior defining power of the 26-inch Washington refractor as
compared with Herschel's celebrated but cumbrous instrument. Still,
they were missed by many telescopes quite competent to show them, and
of as good defining quality as the Washington instrument--a fact which
goes to add proof, if proof were needed, that the power which makes
discoveries is the product of telescope × observer, and that of the
two factors concerned the latter is the more important. It is said
that the moons have been seen by Dr. Wentworth Erck with a 7-1/3-inch
refractor. The ordinary observer is not likely to catch even a glimpse
of them with anything much smaller than a 12-inch instrument, and even
then must use precautions to exclude the glare of the planet, and may
count himself lucky if he succeed in the observation.

A word or two may be said as to what a beginner may expect to see with
a small instrument. It has been stated that nothing under 6 inches can
make much of Mars; but this is a somewhat exaggerated statement of the
case. It is quite certain that the bulk of the more prominent markings
can be seen with telescopes of much smaller aperture. Some detail
has been seen with only 1-3/4-inch, while Grover has, with a 2-inch,
executed drawings which show how much can be done with but little
telescopic power. The fact is, that observers who are only in the
habit of using large telescopes are apt to be unduly sceptical of the
powers of small ones, which are often wonderfully efficient. The fine
detail of the canal system is, of course, altogether beyond small
instruments; and, generally speaking, it will take at least a 4-inch
to show even the more strongly marked of these strange features. At
the 1894 opposition, the writer, using a 3-7/8-inch Dollond of good
quality, was able to detect several of the more prominent canals,
but only on occasions of the best definition. The accompanying rough
sketch (Fig. 24) gives an idea of what may be expected to be seen,
under favourable conditions, with an instrument of between 2 and 3
inches. It represents Mars as seen with a glass of 2-5/8-inch aperture
and fair quality. The main marking in the centre of the disc is
that formerly known as the Kaiser or Hour-glass Sea. Its name in
Schiaparelli's nomenclature, now universally used, is the Syrtis
Major. The same marking will also be seen in Mr. Phillips's drawing of
1899, January 30, in which it is separated by a curious bright bridge
from the Nilosyrtis to the North. The observer need scarcely expect to
see much more than is depicted in Fig. 24, with an instrument of
the class mentioned, but Plate XX. will give a very good idea of the
appearance of the planet when viewed with a telescope of considerable
power. The polar caps will be within reach, and sometimes present the
effect of projecting above the general level of the planet's surface,
owing, no doubt, to irradiation.

[Illustration: FIG. 24.

MARS, June 25, 1890, 10 hours 15 minutes; 2-5/8-inch, power 120.]

To the intending observer one important caution may be suggested. In
observing and sketching the surface of Mars, do so _independently_.
The chart which accompanies this chapter is given for the purpose of
identifying markings which have been already seen, not for that of
enabling the observer to see details which are beyond the power of his
glass. No planet has been the cause of more illusion than Mars, and
drawings of him are extant which resemble nothing so much as the
photograph of an umbrella which has been turned inside out by a gust
of wind. In such cases it may reasonably be concluded that there is
something wrong, and that, unconsciously, 'the vision and the faculty
divine' have been exercised at the expense of the more prosaic, but
in this case more useful, quality of accuracy. By prolonged study of
a modern chart of Mars, and a little gentle stretching of the
imagination, the most unskilled observer with the smallest instrument
will detect a multitude of canals upon the planet, to which there is
but one objection, that they do not exist. There is enough genuine
interest about Mars, even when viewed with a small glass, without the
importation of anything spurious. In observation it will be noticed
that as the rotation period of Mars nearly coincides with that of the
earth, the change in the aspect presented from night to night will
be comparatively small, the same object coming to the meridian
thirty-seven minutes later each successive evening. Generally
speaking, Mars is an easier object to define than either Venus or
Jupiter, though perhaps scarcely bearing high powers so well as
Saturn. There is no planet more certain to repay study and to maintain
interest. He and Jupiter may be said to be at present the 'live'
planets of the solar system in an astronomical sense.


    [Footnote *: The opposition of a planet occurs 'whenever
    the sun, the earth, and the planet, as represented in their
    projected orbits, are in a straight line, with the earth in
    the middle.']

    [Footnote †: That point in the orbit of a planet or comet
    which is nearest to the sun.]




CHAPTER IX

THE ASTEROIDS


In the year 1772 Bode of Berlin published the statement of a curiously
symmetrical relation existing among the planets of our system. The
gist of this relation, known as Bode's law, though it was really
discovered by Titius of Wittenberg, may be summed up briefly thus:
'The interval between the orbits of any two planets is about twice as
great as the inferior interval, and only half the superior one.'
Thus the distance between the orbits of the earth and Venus should,
according to Bode's law, be half of that between the earth and Mars,
which again should be half of that which separates Mars from the
planet next beyond him. Since the discovery of Neptune, this so-called
law has broken down, for Neptune is very far within the distance which
it requires; but at the time of its promulgation it represented with
considerable accuracy the actual relative positions of the planets,
with one exception. Between Mars and Jupiter there was a blank which
should, according to the law, have been filled by a planet, but to all
appearance was not. Noticing this blank in the sequence, Bode ventured
to predict that a planet would be found to fill it; and his foresight
was not long in being vindicated.

Several continental astronomers formed a kind of planet-hunting
society to look out for the missing orb; but their operations were
anticipated by the discovery on January 1, 1801, of a small planet
which occupied a place closely approximating to that indicated for the
missing body by Bode's law. The news of this discovery, made by Piazzi
of Palermo in the course of observations for his well-known catalogue
of stars, did not reach Bode till March 20, and 'the delay just
afforded time for the publication, by a young philosopher of Jena
named Hegel, of a "Dissertation" showing, by the clearest light of
reason, that the number of the planets could not exceed seven, and
exposing the folly of certain devotees of induction who sought a new
celestial body merely to fill a gap in a numerical series.'

The remarkable agreement of prediction and discovery roused a
considerable amount of interest, though the planet actually found, and
named Ceres after the patron-goddess of Sicily, seemed disappointingly
small. But before very long Olbers, one of the members of the original
planet-hunting society, surprised the astronomical world by the
discovery of a second planet which also fulfilled the condition of
Bode's law; and by the end of March, 1807, two other planets equally
obedient to the required numerical standard were found, the first by
Harding, the second by Olbers. Thus a system of four small planets,
Ceres, Pallas, Juno, and Vesta, was found to fill that gap in the
series which had originally suggested the search. To account for their
existence Olbers proposed the theory that they were the fragments of
a large planet which had been blown to pieces either by the disruptive
action of internal forces or by collision with a comet; and this
theory remained in favour for a number of years, though accumulating
evidence against it has forced its abandonment.

It was not till 1845 that there was any addition to the number of the
asteroids, as they had come to be named. In that year, however, Hencke
of Driessen in Prussia, discovered a fifth, which has been named
Astræa, and in 1847 repeated his success by the discovery of a sixth,
Hebe. Since that time there has been a steady flow of discoveries,
until at the present time the number known to exist is close upon 700,
of which 569 have received permanent numbers as undoubtedly distinct
members of the solar system; and this total is being steadily added to
year by year, the average annual number of discoveries for the years
1902 to 1905 inclusive, being fifty-two. For a time the search for
minor planets was a most laborious business. The planet-hunter had
to construct careful maps of all the stars visible in a certain small
zone of the ecliptic, and to compare these methodically with the
actual face of the sky in the same zone, as revealed by his telescope.
Any star seen in the telescope, and not found to be marked upon the
chart, became forthwith an object of grave suspicion, and was watched
until its motion, or lack of motion, relatively to the other stars
either proved or disproved its planetary nature. At present this
lengthy and wearisome process has been entirely superseded by the
photographic method, in which a minor planet is detected by the fact
that, being in motion relatively to the fixed stars, its image will
appear upon the plate in the shape of a short line or trail, the
images of the fixed stars being round dots. Of course the trail may be
due to a planet which has already been discovered; but should there
be no known minor planet in the position occupied by the trail, then
a new member has been added to the system. Minor-planet hunting
has always been a highly specialized branch of astronomy, and a few
observers, such as Peters, Watson, Charlois and Palisa, and at present
Wolf, have accounted for the great majority of the discoveries.

It was, however, becoming more and more a matter of question what
advantage was to be gained by the continuance of the hunt, when a
fresh fillip was given to interest by the discovery in 1898 of the
anomalous asteroid named Eros. Hitherto no minor planet had been known
to have the greater portion of its orbit within that of Mars, though
several do cross the red planet's borders; but the mean distance of
Eros from the sun proves to be about 135,000,000, while that of Mars
is 141,000,000 miles. In addition, the orbit of the new planet is
such that at intervals of sixty-seven years it comes within 15,000,000
miles of the earth, or in other words nearer to us than any other
celestial body except the moon or a chance comet. It may thus come
to afford a means of revising estimates of celestial distances. Eros
presents another peculiarity. It has been found by E. von Oppolzer
to be variable in a period of two hours thirty-eight minutes; and the
theory has been put forward that the planet is double, consisting of
two bodies which revolve almost in contact and mutually eclipse one
another--in short, that Eros as a planet presents the same phenomenon
which we shall find as a characteristic of that type of variable stars
known as the Algol type. An explanation, in some respects more simple
and satisfactory, is that the variation in light is caused by the
different reflective power of various parts of its surface; but the
question is still open.

The best results for the sizes of the four asteroids first discovered
are those of Barnard, from direct measurements with the Lick telescope
in 1894. He found the diameter of Ceres to be 485 miles, that of
Pallas 304, those of Vesta and Juno 243 and 118 miles respectively.
There appears to be as great diversity in the reflective power of
these original members of the group as in their diameters. Ceres is
large and dull, and, in Miss Clerke's words, 'must be composed of
rugged and sombre rock, unclothed probably by any vestige of air,'
while Vesta has a surface which reflects light with four times the
intensity of that of Ceres, and is, in fact, almost as brilliantly
white as newly fallen snow.

In the place of Olbers' discredited hypothesis of an exploded planet,
has now been set the theory first suggested by Kirkwood, that instead
of having in the asteroids the remnants of a world which has become
defunct, we have the materials of one which was never allowed to
form, the overwhelming power of Jupiter's attraction having exerted
a disruptive influence over them while their formation was still only
beginning.

So far as I am aware, they share with Mars the distinction of being
the only celestial bodies which have been made the subjects of a
testamentary disposition. In the case of Mars, readers may remember
that some years ago a French lady left a large sum of money to be
given to the individual who should first succeed in establishing
communication with the Planet of War; in that of the asteroids, the
late Professor Watson, a mighty hunter of minor planets in his day,
made provision for the supervision of the twenty-two planets captured
by him, lest any of them should get lost, stolen, or strayed.

Small telescopes are, of course, quite impotent to deal with such
diminutive bodies as the asteroids; nor, perhaps, is it desirable
that the ranks of the minor-planet hunters should be reinforced to any
extent.




CHAPTER X

JUPITER


Passing outwards from the zone of the minor planets, we come to the
greatest and most magnificent member of the solar system, the giant
planet Jupiter. To most observers, Jupiter will probably appear not
only the largest, but also the most interesting telescopic object
which our system affords. Some, no doubt, will put in a claim for
Mars, and some will share Sir Robert Ball's predilection for Saturn;
but the interest attaching to Mars is of quite a different character
from that which belongs to Jupiter, and while Saturn affords a picture
of unsurpassed beauty, there is not that interest of variety and
change in his exquisite system which is to be found in that of his
neighbour planet. Jupiter is constantly attractive by reason of the
hope, or rather the certainty, that he will always provide something
fresh to observe; and the perpetual state of flux in which the details
of his surface present themselves to the student offers to us the
only instance which can be conveniently inspected of the process of
world-formation. Jupiter is at the very opposite end of the scale
from such a body, for example, as our own moon. On the latter it would
appear as though all things were approaching the fixity of death; such
changes as are suspected are scarcely more than suspected, and,
even if established, are comparatively so small as to tax the utmost
resources of observation. On the former, such a thing as fixity or
stability appears to be unknown, and changes are constantly occurring
on a scale so gigantic as not to be beyond the reach of small
instruments, at least in their broader outlines.

The main facts relating to the planet may be briefly given before
we go on to consider the physical features revealed to us by the
telescope. Jupiter then travels round the sun in a period of 11
years, 314·9 days, at an average distance of almost 483,000,000 miles.
According to Barnard's measures, his polar diameter is 84,570, and his
equatorial diameter 90,190 miles. He is thus compressed at the poles
to the extent of 1/16th, and there is no planet which so conspicuously
exhibits to the eye the actual effect of this polar flattening, though
the compression of Saturn is really greater still. In volume he is
equal to more than 1,300 earths, but his density is so small that only
316 of our worlds would be needed to balance him. This low density,
not much greater than that of water, is quite in accordance with all
the other features which are revealed by observation, and appears to
be common to all the members of that group of large exterior planets
of which Jupiter is at once the first and the chief.

The brilliancy of the great planet is exceedingly remarkable, far
exceeding that of Mars or Saturn, and only yielding to that of Venus.
In 1892 his lustre was double that of Sirius, which is by far the
brightest of all the fixed stars; and he has been repeatedly seen by
the unaided eye even when the sun was above the horizon. According to
one determination he reflects practically the same amount of light as
newly fallen snow; and even if this be rejected as impossibly high,
Zöllner's more moderate estimate, which puts his reflective power
at 62 per cent. of the light received, makes him almost as bright as
white paper. Yet to the eye it is very evident that his light has
a distinct golden tinge, and in the telescopic view this remains
conspicuous, and is further emphasized by the presence on his disc of
a considerable variety of colouring.

Under favourable circumstances Jupiter presents to us a disc which
measures as much as 50″ in diameter. The very low magnifying power of
50 will therefore present him to the eye with a diameter of 2,500″,
which is somewhat greater than the apparent diameter of the moon. In
practice it is somewhat difficult to realize that this is the case,
probably owing to the want of any other object in the telescopic field
with which to compare the planet. But while there may be a little
disappointment at the seeming smallness of the disc even with a power
double that suggested, this will quickly be superseded by a growing
interest in the remarkable picture which is revealed to view.

[Illustration: FIG. 25.

JUPITER, October 9, 1891, 9.30 p.m.; 3-7/8-inch, power 120.]

Some idea of the ordinary appearance of the planet may be gained from
Fig. 25, which reproduces a sketch made with a small telescope on
October 9, 1891. The first feature that strikes the eye on even the
most casual glance is the polar compression. The outline of the disc
is manifestly not circular but elliptical, and this is emphasized by
the fact that nearly all the markings which are visible run parallel
to one another in the direction of the longest diameter of the oval.
A little attention will reveal these markings as a series of dark
shadowy bands, of various breadths and various tones, which stretch
from side to side of the disc, fading a little in intensity as they
approach its margin, and giving the whole planet the appearance of
being girdled by a number of cloudy belts. The belts may be seen with
very low powers indeed, the presence of the more conspicuous ones
having repeatedly been evident to the writer with the rudimentary
telescope mentioned in Chapter II., consisting of a non-achromatic
double convex lens of 1-1/2-inch aperture, and a single lens eye-piece
giving a power of 36. Anything larger and more perfect than this will
bring them out with clearness, and an achromatic of from 2 to 3 inches
aperture will give views of the highest beauty and interest, and
will even enable its possessor to detect some of the more prominent
evidences of the changes which are constantly taking place.

The number of belts visible varies very considerably. As many as
thirty have sometimes been counted; but normally the number is much
smaller than this. Speaking generally, two belts, one on either side
of a bright equatorial zone, will be found to be conspicuous, while
fainter rulings may be traced further north and south, and the dusky
hoods which cover the poles will be almost as easily seen as the
two main belts. It will further become apparent that this system
of markings is characterized by great variety of colouring. In this
respect no planet approaches Jupiter, and when seen under favourable
circumstances and with a good instrument, preferably a reflector,
some of the colour effects are most exquisite. Webb remarks: 'There is
often "something rich and strange" in the colouring of the disc.
Lord Rosse describes yellow, brick-red, bluish, and even full-blue
markings; Hirst, a belt edged with crimson lake; Miss Hirst, a small
sea-green patch near one of the poles.' The following notes of colour
were made on December 26, 1905: The south equatorial belt distinct
reddish-brown; the equatorial zone very pale yellow, almost white,
with faint slaty-blue shades in the northern portion; the north polar
regions a decided reddish-orange; while the south polar hood was of a
much colder greyish tone. But the colours are subject to considerable
change, and the variations of the two great equatorial belts appear,
according to Stanley Williams, to be periodic, maxima and minima of
redness being separated by a period of about twelve years, and the
maximum of the one belt coinciding with the minimum of the other.

[Illustration:

  PLATE XXII.

Jupiter, January 6, 1906--8 hours 20 minutes. Instrument, 9-1/4-inch
Reflector.

[lambda] = 238° (System 1); [lambda] = 55° (System 2).

Rev. T. E. R. Phillips.]

These changes in colouring bring us to the fact that the whole system
of the Jovian markings is liable to constant and often very rapid
change. Anyone who compares drawings made a few years ago with those
made at the present time, such as Plates XXII. and XXIII., cannot fail
to notice that while there is a general similarity, the details have
changed so much that there is scarcely one individual feature which
has not undergone some modification. Indeed, this process of change is
sometimes so rapid that it can be actually watched in its occurrence.
Thus Mr. Denning remarks that 'on October 17, 1880, two dark spots,
separated by 20° of longitude, broke out on a belt some 25° north
of the equator. Other spots quickly formed on each side of the pair
alluded to, and distributed themselves along the belt, so that by
December 30 they covered three-fourths of its entire circumference.'
The dark belts, according to his observations, 'appear to be sustained
in certain cases by eruptions of dark matter, which gradually spread
out into streams.'

Even the great equatorial belts are not exempt from the continual flux
which affects all the markings of the great planet, and the details
of their structure will be found to vary to a considerable extent at
different periods. At present the southern belt is by far the most
conspicuous feature of the surface, over-powering all other details by
its prominence, while its northern rival has shrunk in visibility to
a mere shadow of what it appears in drawings made in the seventies.
Through all the changes of the last thirty years, however, one very
remarkable feature of the planet has remained permanent at least in
form, though varying much in visibility. With the exception of the
canals of Mars, no feature of any of the planets has excited so
much interest as the great red spot on Jupiter. The history of this
extraordinary phenomenon as a subject of general study begins in 1878,
though records exist as far back as 1869 of a feature which almost
certainly was the same, and it has been suggested that it was observed
by Cassini two centuries ago. In 1878 it began to attract general
attention, which it well deserved. In appearance it was an enormous
ellipse of a full brick-red colour, measuring some 30,000 miles in
length by 7,000 in breadth, and lying immediately south of the south
equatorial belt. With this belt it appears to have some mysterious
connection. It is not actually joined to it, but seems, as Miss
Clerke observes, to be 'jammed down upon it'; at least, in the south
equatorial belt, just below where the spot lies, there has been formed
an enormous bay, bounded on the following side (_i.e._, the right
hand as the planet moves through the field), by a sharply upstanding
shoulder or cape. The whole appearance of this bay irresistibly
suggests to the observer that it has somehow or other been hollowed
out to make room for the spot, which floats, as it were, within it,
surrounded generally by a margin of bright material, which divides it
from the brown matter of the belt. The red spot, with its accompanying
bay and cape, is shown in Fig. 25 and in Plate XXII., which represents
the planet as seen by the Rev. T. E. R. Phillips on January 6, 1906.
The spot has varied very much in colour and in visibility, but on the
whole its story has been one of gradual decline; its tint has paled,
and its outline has become less distinct, as though it were being
obscured by an outflow of lighter-coloured matter, though there have
been occasional recoveries both of colour and distinctness. In 1891 it
was a perfectly easy object with 3-7/8 inches; at the present time
the writer has never found it anything but difficult with an 18-inch
aperture, though some observers have been able to see it steadily in
1905 and 1906 with much smaller telescopes. The continued existence
of the bay already referred to seems to indicate that it is only the
colour of the spot that has temporarily paled, and that observers may
in course of time witness a fresh development of this most interesting
Jovian feature.

The nature of the red spot remains an enigma. It may possibly
represent an opening in the upper strata of Jupiter's dense
cloud-envelope, through which lower strata, or even the real body of
the planet, may be seen. The suggestion has also been made that it is
the glow of some volcanic fire on the body of the planet, seen through
the cloud-screen as the light of a lamp is seen through ground-glass.
But, after all, such ideas are only conjectures, and it is impossible
to say as yet even whether the spot is higher or lower than the
average level of the surface round it. A curious phenomenon which
was witnessed in 1891 suggested at first a hope that this question of
relative height would at least be determined. This phenomenon was the
overtaking of the red spot by a dark spot which had been travelling
after it on the same parallel, but with greater speed, for some
months. It appeared to be quite certain that the dark spot must either
transit the face of the red spot or else pass behind it; and in either
case interesting information as to the relative elevations of the two
features in question would have been obtained. The dark spot, however,
disappointed expectation by drifting round the south margin of the red
one, much as the current of a river is turned aside by the buttress of
a bridge. In fact, it would almost appear as though the red spot had
the power of resisting any pressure from other parts of the planet's
surface; yet in itself it has no fixity, for its period of rotation
steadily lengthened for several years until 1899, since when it has
begun to shorten again, so that it would appear to float upon the
surface of currents of variable speed rather than to be an established
landmark of the globe itself. The rotation period derived from it was,
in 1902, 9 hours 55 minutes 39·3 seconds.

The mention of the changing period of rotation of the red spot lends
emphasis to the fact that no single period of rotation can be assigned
to Jupiter as a whole. It is impossible to say of the great planet
that he rotates in such and such a period: the utmost that can be said
is that certain spots upon his surface have certain rotation periods;
but these periods are almost all different from one another, and even
the period of an individual marking is subject, as already seen, to
variation. In fact, as Mr. Stanley Williams has shown, no fewer than
nine different periods of rotation are found to coexist upon the
surface; and though the differences in the periods seem small when
expressed in time, amounting in the extreme cases only to eight and
half minutes, yet their significance is very great indeed. In the case
of Mr. Williams's Zones II. and III., the difference in speed of these
two surface currents amounts to 400 miles per hour. Certain bright
spots near the equator have been found to move so much more rapidly
than the great red spot as to pass it at a speed of 260 miles an hour,
and to 'lap' it in forty-four and a half days, completing in that time
one whole rotation more than their more imposing neighbour. It cannot,
therefore, be said that Jupiter's rotation period is known; but the
average period of his surface markings is somewhere about nine hours
fifty-two minutes.

Thus the rotation period adds its evidence to that already afforded
by the variations in colour and in form of the planet's markings that
here we are dealing with a body in a very different condition from
that of any of the other members of our system hitherto met with. We
have here no globe whose actual surface we can scrutinize, as we can
in the case of Mars and the moon, but one whose solid nucleus, if
it has such a thing, is perpetually veiled from us by a mantle which
seems more akin to the photosphere of the sun than to anything else
that we are acquainted with. The obvious resemblances may, and very
probably do, mask quite as important differences. The mere difference
in scale between the two bodies concerned must be a very important
factor, to say nothing of other causes which may be operative in
producing unlikeness. Still, there is a considerable and suggestive
general resemblance.

In the sun and in Jupiter alike we have a view, not of the true
surface, but of an envelope which seems to represent the point of
condensation of currents of matter thrown up from depths below--an
envelope agitated in both cases, though more slowly in that of
Jupiter, by disturbances which bear witness to the operation of
stupendous forces beneath its veil. In both bodies there is a similar
small density: neither the sun nor Jupiter is much denser than water;
in both the determination of the rotation period is complicated by
the fact that the markings of the bright envelope by which the
determinations must be made move with entirely different speeds in
different latitudes. Here, however, there is a divergence, for while
in the case of the sun the period increases uniformly from the equator
to the poles, there is no such uniformity in the case of Jupiter. Thus
certain dark spots in 25° north latitude were found in 1880 to have a
shorter period than even the swift equatorial white markings.

One further circumstance remains to be noted in pursuance of these
resemblances. Not only does the disc of Jupiter shade away at its
edges in a manner somewhat similar to that of the sun, being much
more brilliant in the centre than at the limb, but his remarkable
brilliancy, already noticed, has given rise to the suggestion that to
some small extent he may shine by his own inherent light. There are
certain difficulties, however, in the way of such a suggestion. The
satellites, for example, disappear absolutely when they enter the
shadow of their great primary--a fact which is conclusive against the
latter being self-luminous to anything more than a very small extent,
as even a small emission of native light from Jupiter would suffice
to render them visible. But even supposing that the idea of
self-luminosity has to be abandoned, everything points to the fact
that in Jupiter we have a body which presents much stronger analogies
to the sun than to those planets of the solar system which we have
so far considered. The late Mr. R. A. Proctor's conclusion probably
represents the true state of the case with regard to the giant planet:
'It may be regarded as practically proved that Jupiter's condition
rather resembles that of a small sun which has nearly reached the dark
stage than that of a world which is within a measurable time-interval
from the stage of orb-life through which our own Earth is passing.'

Leaving the planet itself, we turn to the beautiful system of
satellites of which it is the centre. The four moons which, till 1892,
were thought to compose the complete retinue of Jupiter, were among
the first-fruits of Galileo's newly-invented telescope, and were
discovered in January, 1610. The names attached to them--Io, Europa,
Ganymede, and Callisto--have now been almost discarded in favour of
the more prosaic but more convenient numbers I., II., III., IV. The
question of their visibility to the unaided eye has been frequently
discussed, but with little result; nor is it a matter of much
importance whether or not some person exceptionally gifted with
keenness of sight may succeed in catching a momentary glimpse of one
which happens to be favourably placed. The smallest telescope or a
field-glass will show them quite clearly. They are, in fact, bodies
of considerable size, III., which is the largest, being 3,558 miles
in diameter, while IV. is only about 200 miles less; and a moderate
magnifying power will bring out their discs.

[Illustration: PLATE XXIII.

Jupiter, February 17, 1906. J. Baikie, 18-inch Reflector.]

The beautiful symmetry of this miniature system was broken in 1892 by
Barnard's discovery of a fifth satellite--so small and so close to the
great planet that very few telescopes are of power sufficient to show
it. This was followed in 1904 by Perrine's discovery, from photographs
taken at the Lick Observatory with the Crossley reflector, of two
more members of the system, so that the train of Jupiter as at present
known numbers seven. The fifth, sixth, and seventh satellites are, of
course, far beyond the powers of any but the very finest instruments,
their diameters being estimated at 120, 100, and 30 miles
respectively. It will be a matter of interest, however, for the
observer to follow the four larger satellites, and to watch their
rapid relative changes of position; their occultations, when they pass
behind the globe of Jupiter; their eclipses, when they enter the great
cone of shadow which the giant planet casts behind him into space;
and, most beautiful of all, their transits. In occultations the
curious phenomenon is sometimes witnessed of an apparent flattening of
the planet's margin as the satellite approaches it at ingress or draws
away from it at egress. This strange optical illusion, which also
occurs occasionally in the case of transits, was witnessed by several
observers on various dates during the winter of 1905-1906. It is, of
course, merely an illusion, but it is curious why it should happen on
some occasions and not on others, when to all appearance the seeing is
of very much the same quality. The gradual fading away of the light of
the satellites as they enter into eclipse is also a very interesting
feature, but the transits are certainly the most beautiful objects of
all for a small instrument. The times of all these events are given in
such publications as the 'Nautical Almanac' or the 'Companion to the
Observatory'; but should the student not be possessed of either of
these most useful publications, he may notice that when a satellite is
seen steadily approaching Jupiter on the following side, a transit
is impending. The satellite will come up to the margin of the planet,
looking like a brilliant little bead of light as it joins itself to
it (a particularly exquisite sight), will glide across the margin, and
after a longer or shorter period will become invisible, being merged
in the greater brightness of the central portions of Jupiter's disc,
unless it should happen to traverse one of the dark belts, in which
case it may be visible throughout its entire journey. It will be
followed or preceded, according to the season, by its shadow, which
will generally appear as a dark circular dot. In transits which occur
before opposition the shadows precede the satellites; after opposition
they travel behind them. The transit of the satellite itself will
in most cases be a pretty sharp test of the performance of a 3-inch
telescope, or anything below that aperture; but the transit of the
shadow may be readily seen with a 2-1/2-inch, probably even with a
2-inch. There are certain anomalies in the behaviour of the shadows
which have never been satisfactorily explained. They have not always
been seen of a truly circular form, nor always of the same degree of
darkness, that of the second satellite being notably lighter in most
instances than those of the others. There are few more beautiful
celestial pictures than that presented by Jupiter with a satellite and
its shadow in transit. The swift rotation of the great planet and the
rapid motion of the shadow can be very readily observed, and the whole
affords a most picturesque illustration of celestial mechanics.

A few notes may be added with regard to observation. In drawing the
planet regard must first of all be paid to the fact that Jupiter's
disc is not circular, and should never be so represented. It is easy
for the student to prepare for himself a disc of convenient size, say
about 2-1/2 inches in diameter on the major axis, and compressed
to the proper extent (1/16), which may be used in outlining all
subsequent drawings. Within the outline thus sketched the details must
be drawn with as great rapidity as is consistent with accuracy. The
reason for rapidity will soon become obvious. Jupiter's period of
rotation is so short that the aspect of his disc will be found to
change materially even in half an hour. Indeed, twenty minutes
is perhaps as long as the observer should allow himself for any
individual drawing, and a little practice will convince him that it
is quite possible to represent a good deal of detail in that time, and
that, even with rapid work, the placing of the various markings may be
made pretty accurate. The darker and more conspicuous features should
be laid down first of all, and the more delicate details thereafter
filled in, care being taken to secure first those near the preceding
margin of the planet before they are carried out of view by rotation.
The colours of the various features should be carefully noted at
the sides of the original drawings, and for this work twilight
observations are to be preferred.

Different observers vary to some extent, as might be expected, in
their estimates of the planet's colouring, but on the whole there is
a broad general agreement. No planet presents such a fine opportunity
for colour-study as Jupiter, and on occasions of good seeing the
richness of the tones is perfectly astonishing. In showing the natural
colours of the planet the reflector has a great advantage over the
refractor, and observers using the reflecting type of instrument
should devote particular attention to this branch of the subject, as
there is no doubt that the colour of the various features is liable to
considerable, perhaps seasonal, variation, and systematic observation
of its changes may prove helpful in solving the mystery of Jupiter's
condition. The times of beginning and ending observation should be
carefully noted, and also the magnifying powers employed. These should
not be too high. Jupiter does not need, and will not stand, so much
enlargement as either Mars or Saturn. It is quite easy to secure
a very large disc, but over-magnifying is a great deal worse than
useless: it is a fertile source of mistakes and illusions. If the
student be content to make reasonable use of his means, and not to
overpress either his instrument or his imagination, he will find upon
Jupiter work full of absorbing interest, and may be able to make his
own contribution to the serious study of the great planet.




CHAPTER XI

SATURN


At nearly double the distance of Jupiter from the sun circles the
second largest planet of our system, unique, so far as human knowledge
goes, in the character of its appendages. The orbit of Saturn has a
mean radius of 886,000,000 miles, but owing to its eccentricity, his
distance may be diminished to 841,000,000 or increased to 931,000,000.
This large variation may not play so important a part in his economy
as might have been supposed, owing to the fact that the sun heat
received by him is not much more than 1/100th of that received by the
earth. The planet occupies twenty-nine and a half years in travelling
round its immense orbit. Barnard's measures with the Lick telescope
give for the polar diameter 69,770, and for the equatorial 76,470
miles. Saturn's polar compression is accordingly very great, amounting
to about 1/12th. Generally speaking, however, it is not so obvious
in the telescopic view as the smaller compression of Jupiter, being
masked by the proximity of the rings.

[Illustration: PLATE XXIV.

Saturn, July 2, 1894. E. E. Barnard, 36-inch Equatorial.]

Saturn is the least dense of all the planets; in fact, this enormous
globe, nine times the diameter of the earth, would float in water.
This fact of extremely low density at once suggests a state of matters
similar to that already seen to exist, in all likelihood, in the case
of Jupiter; and all the evidence goes to support the view that Saturn,
along with the other three large exterior planets, is in the condition
of a semi-sun.

The globe presents, on the whole, similar characteristics to those
already noticed as prevailing on Jupiter, but, as was to be expected,
in a condition enfeebled by the much greater distance across which
they are viewed and the smaller scale on which they are exhibited.
It is generally girdled by one or two tropical belts of a grey-green
tone; the equatorial region is yellow, and sometimes, like the
corresponding region of Jupiter, bears light spots upon it and a
narrow equatorial band of a dusky tone; the polar regions are of a
cold ashy or leaden colour. Professor Barnard's fine drawing (Plate
XXIV.) gives an admirable representation of these features as seen
with the 36-inch Lick telescope. Altogether, whether from greater
distance or from intrinsic deficiency, the colouring of Saturn is by
no means so vivid or so interesting as that of his larger neighbour.

The period of rotation was, till within the last few years, thought
to be definitely and satisfactorily ascertained. Sir William Herschel
fixed it, from his observations, at ten hours sixteen minutes.
Professor Asaph Hall, from observations of a white spot near the
equator, reduced this period to ten hours fourteen minutes twenty-four
seconds. Stanley Williams and Denning, in 1891, reached results
differing only by about two seconds from that of Hall; but the former,
discussing observations of 1893, arrived at the conclusion that there
were variations of rotation presented in different latitudes and
longitudes of the planet's surface, the longest period being ten hours
fifteen minutes, and the shortest ten hours twelve minutes forty-five
seconds. Subsequently Keeler obtained, by spectroscopic methods, a
result exactly agreeing with that of Hall. It appeared, therefore,
that fairly satisfactory agreement had been reached on a mean period
of ten hours fourteen minutes twenty-four seconds.

In 1903, however, a number of bright spots appeared in a middle north
latitude which, when observed by Barnard, Comas Solà, Denning, and
other observers, gave a period remarkably longer than that deduced
from spots in lower latitudes--namely, about ten hours thirty-eight
minutes. Accordingly, it follows that the surface of Saturn's
equatorial regions rotates much more rapidly than that of the regions
further north--a state of affairs which presents an obvious likeness
to that prevailing on Jupiter. But in the case of Saturn the
equatorial current must move relatively to the rest of the surface at
the enormous rate of from 800 to 900 miles an hour, a speed between
three and four times greater than that of the corresponding current on
Jupiter!

The resemblance between the two great planets is thus very marked
indeed. Great size, coupled with small density; very rapid rotation,
with its accompaniment of large polar compression; and, even more
markedly in the case of the more distant planet than in that of
Jupiter, a variety of rotation periods for different markings, which
indicates that these features have been thrown up from different
strata of the planet's substance--such points of likeness are too
significant to be ignored. It is not at all likely that Saturn has
any solidity to speak of, any more than Jupiter; the probabilities all
point in the direction of a comparatively small nucleus of somewhat
greater solidity than the rest, surrounded by an immense condensation
shell, where the products of various eruptions are represented.

Were this all that can be said about Saturn, the planet would scarcely
be more than a reduced and somewhat less interesting edition of
Jupiter. As it is, he possesses characteristics which make him
Jupiter's rival in point of interest, and, as a mere telescopic
picture, perhaps even his superior. When Galileo turned his telescope
upon Saturn, he was presented with what seemed an insoluble enigma.
It appeared to him that, instead of being a single globe, the planet
consisted of three globes in contact with one another; and this
supposed fact he intimated to Kepler in an anagram, which, when
rearranged, read: 'Altissimum planetam tergeminum observavi'--'I
have observed the most distant planet to be threefold.' Under better
conditions of observation, he remarked subsequently, the planet
appeared like an olive, as it still does with low powers. This was
sufficiently puzzling, but worse was to follow. After an interval,
on observing Saturn again, he found that the appearances which had so
perplexed him had altogether disappeared; the globe was single, like
those of the other planets. In his letter to Welser, dated December
4, 1612, the great astronomer describes his bewilderment, and his
fear lest, after all, it should turn out that his adversaries had been
right, and that his discoveries had been mere illusions.

Then followed a period when observers could only command optical power
sufficient to show the puzzling nature of the planet's appendages,
without revealing their true form. It appeared that Saturn had 'ansæ,'
or handles, on either side of him, between which and his body the
sky could be seen; and many uncouth figures are still preserved which
eloquently testify to the bewilderment of those who drew them, though
some of them are wonderfully accurate representations of the planet's
appearance when seen with insufficient means. The bewilderment was
sometimes veiled, in amusing cuttle-fish fashion, under an inky cloud
of sesquipedalian words. Thus Hevelius describes the aspects of Saturn
in the following blasting flight of projectiles: 'The mono-spherical,
the tri-spherical, the spherico-ansated, the elliptico-ansated,
and the spherico-cuspidated,' which is very beautiful no doubt, but
scarcely so simple as one could wish a popular explanation to be.

In the year 1659, however, Huygens, who had been observing Saturn with
a telescope of 2-1/3 inches aperture and 23 feet focal length, bearing
a magnifying power of 100, arrived at the correct solution of the
mystery, which he announced to, or rather concealed from, the world
in a barbarous jumble of letters, which, when properly arranged, read
'annulo cingitur, tenui, plano, nusquam cohaerente, ad eclipticam
inclinato'--'he (Saturn) is surrounded by a thin flat ring, nowhere
touching (him, and) inclined to the ecliptic.' Huygens also discovered
the first and largest of Saturn's satellites, Titan. His discoveries
were followed by those of Cassini, who in 1676 announced his
observation of that division in the ring which now goes by his name.
From Cassini's time onwards to the middle of the nineteenth century,
nothing was observed to alter to any great extent the conception
of the Saturnian system which had been reached; though certain
observations were made, which, though viewed with some suspicion,
seemed to indicate that there were more divisions in the ring than
that which Cassini had discovered, and that the system was thus a
multiple one. In particular a marking on the outer ring was detected
by Encke, and named after him, though generally seen, if seen at all,
rather as a faint shading than as a definite division. (It is not
shown in Barnard's drawing, Plate XXIV.). But in 1850 came the last
great addition to our knowledge of the ring system, W. C. Bond in
America, and Dawes in England making independently the discovery of
the faint third ring, known as the Crape Ring, which lies between the
inner bright ring and the globe.

The extraordinary appendages thus gradually revealed present a
constantly varying aspect according to the seasons of the long
Saturnian year. At Saturn's equinoxes they disappear, being turned
edgewise; then, reappearing, they gradually broaden until at the
solstice, 7-1/3 years later, they are seen at their widest expansion;
while from this point they narrow again to the following equinox,
and repeat the same process with the opposite side of the ring
illuminated, the whole set of changes being gone through in 29 years
167·2 days. Barnard's measures give for the outer diameter of the
outer ring 172,310 miles; while the clear interval between the inner
margin of the Crape Ring and the ball is about 5,800 miles, and the
width of the great division in the ring-system (Cassini's) 2,270
miles. In sharp contrast to these enormous figures is the fact
that the rings have no measurable thickness at all, and can only be
estimated at not more than 50 miles. They disappear absolutely when
seen edgewise; even the great Lick telescope lost them altogether for
three days in October, 1891.[*]

The answer to the question of what may be the constitution of these
remarkable features may now be given with a moderate approach to
certainty. It has been shown successively that the rings could not be
solid, or liquid, and in 1857 Clerk-Maxwell demonstrated that the only
possible constitution for such a body is that of an infinite number
of small satellites. The rings of Saturn thus presumably consist of
myriads of tiny moonlets, each pursuing its own individual orbit
in its individual period, and all drawn to their present form of
aggregation by the attraction of Saturn's bulging equator. The
appearances presented by the rings are explicable on this theory, and
on no other. Thus the brightness of the two rings A and B would arise
from the closer grouping of the satellites within these zones; while
the semi-darkness of the Crape Ring arises from the sparser sprinkling
of the moonlets, which allows the dark sky to be seen between them.
Cassini's division corresponds to a zone which has been deprived of
satellites; and as it has been shown that this vacant zone occupies a
position where a revolving body would be subject to disturbance from
four of Saturn's satellites, the force which cleared this gap in the
ring is obvious. It has been urged as an objection to the satellite
theory that while the thin spreading of the moonlets would account for
the comparative darkness of the Crape Ring when seen against the sky,
it by no means accounts for the fact that this ring is seen as a dark
stripe upon the body of the planet. Seeliger's explanation of this is
both satisfactory and obvious, when once suggested--namely, that the
darkness of the Crape Ring against the planet is due to the fact that
what we see is not the actual transits of the satellites themselves,
but the perpetual flitting of their shadows across the ball. The final
and conclusive argument in favour of this theory of the constitution
of the rings was supplied by the late Professor Keeler by means of the
spectroscope. It is evident that if the rings were solid, the speed
of rotation should increase from their inner to their outer
margin--_i.e._, the outer margin must move faster, in miles per
second, than the inner does. If, on the contrary, the rings are
composed of a great number of satellites, the relation will be exactly
reversed, and, owing to the superior attractive force exercised upon
them by the planet through their greater nearness to him, the inner
satellites will revolve faster than the outer ones. Now, this point
is capable of settlement by spectroscopic methods involving the
application of the well-known Doppler's principle, that the speed of a
body's motion produces definite and regular effects upon the pitch of
the light emitted or reflected by it. The measurements were of extreme
delicacy, but the result was to give a rate of motion of 12-1/2 miles
per second for the inner edge of ring B, and of 10 miles for the outer
edge of A, thus affording unmistakable confirmation of the satellite
theory of the rings. Keeler's results have since been confirmed by
Campbell and others; and it may be regarded as a demonstrated fact
that the rings, as already stated, consist of a vast number of small
satellites.

It has been maintained that the ball of Saturn is eccentrically placed
within the ring, and further, that this eccentricity is essential to
the stability of the system; while the suggestion has also been made
that the ring-system is undergoing progressive change, and that the
interval between it and the ball is lessening. It has to be noticed,
however, that the best measures, those of Barnard, indicate that the
ball is symmetrically placed within the rings; and the suggestion of a
diminishing interval between the ring-system and the ball receives no
countenance from comparison of the measures which have been made at
different times.

There can be no question that of all objects presented to observation
in the solar system, there is not one, which, for mere beauty and
symmetry can be for a moment compared with Saturn, even though, as
already indicated, Mars and Jupiter present features of more lasting
interest. To quote Proctor's words: 'The golden disc, faintly striped
with silver-tinted belts; the circling rings, with their various
shades of brilliancy and colour; and the perfect symmetry of the
system as it sweeps across the dark background of the field of
view, combine to form a picture as charming as it is sublime and
impressive.' Fortunately the main features of this beautiful picture
are within the reach of very humble instruments. Webb states that
when the ring system was at its greatest breadth he has seen it with
a power of about twenty on only 1-1/3-inch aperture. A beginner cannot
expect to do so much with such small means; but at all events a 2-inch
telescope with powers of from 50 to 100 will reveal the main outlines
of the ring very well indeed, and, with careful attention will show
the shadow of the ring upon the ball, and that of the ball upon the
ring. When we come to the question of the division in the ring, we are
on somewhat more doubtful ground. Proctor affirms that 'the division
in the ring (Cassini's) can be seen in a good 2-inch aperture in
favourable weather.' One would have felt inclined to say that the
weather would require to be very favourable indeed, were it not that
Proctor's statement is corroborated by Denning, who remarks that
'With a 2-inch refractor, power about ninety, not only are the rings
splendidly visible, but Cassini's division is readily glimpsed, as
well as the narrow dark belt on the body of the planet.' The student
may, however, be warned against expecting that such statements will
apply to his own individual efforts. There are comparatively few
observers whose eyes have had such systematic training as to qualify
them for work like this, and those who begin by expecting to see all
that skilled observers see with an instrument of the same power are
only laying up for themselves stores of disappointment. Mr. Mee's
frank confession may be commended to the notice of those who hope to
see at the first glance all that old students have learned to see
by years of hard work. 'The first time I saw Saturn through a large
telescope, a fine 12-inch reflector, I confess I could not see
the division (Cassini's), though the view of the planet was one of
exquisite beauty and long to be remembered, and notwithstanding the
fact that the much fainter division of Encke was at the moment visible
to the owner of the instrument!' It is extremely unlikely that the
beginner will see the division with anything much less than 3 inches,
and even with that aperture he will not see it until the rings are
well opened. The writer's experience is that it is not by any means so
readily seen as is sometimes supposed. Three inches will show it under
good conditions; with 3-7/8 it can be steadily held, even when the
rings are only moderately open (steady holding is a very different
thing from 'glimpsing'), but even with larger apertures the division
becomes by no means a simple object as the rings close up (Fig. 26).
In fact, there is nothing better fitted to fill the modern observer's
mind with a most wholesome respect for the memory of a man like
Cassini, than the thought that with his most imperfect appliances this
great observer detected the division, a much more difficult feat than
the mere seeing it when its existence and position are already known,
and discovered also four of the Saturnian satellites. As for the minor
divisions in the ring, if they are divisions, they are out of the
question altogether for small apertures, and are often invisible even
to skilled observers using the finest telescopes. Barnard's drawing
(Plate XXIV.), as already noted, shows no trace of Encke's division;
but nine months later the same observer saw it faintly in both ansæ of
the ring. The conclusion from this and many similar observations seems
to be that the marking is variable, as may very well be, from the
constitution of the ring. The Crape Ring is beyond any instrument
of less than four inches, and even with such an aperture requires
favourable circumstances.

[Illustration: FIG. 26.

SATURN, 3-7/8-inch.]

With regard to a great number of very remarkable details which of
late years have been seen and drawn by various observers, it may be
remarked that the student need not be unduly disappointed should his
small instrument fail, as it almost certainly will, to show these.
This is a defect which his telescope shares with an instrument of such
respectable size and undoubted optical quality as the Lick 36-inch.
Writing in January, 1895, concerning the beautiful drawing which
accompanies this chapter, Professor Barnard somewhat caustically
observes: 'The black and white spots lately seen upon Saturn by
various little telescopes were totally beyond the reach of the
36-inch--as well as of the 12-inch--under either good or bad
conditions of seeing.... The inner edge (of the Crape Ring) was a
uniform curve; the serrated or saw-toothed appearance of its inner
edge which had previously been seen with some small telescopes
was also beyond the reach of the 36-inch.' Such remarks should be
consoling to those who find themselves and their instruments unequal
to the remarkable feats which are sometimes accomplished, or recorded.

So far as one's personal experience goes, Saturn is generally the
most easily defined of all the planets. Of late years he has been very
badly placed for observers in the Northern Hemisphere, and this has
considerably interfered with definition. But when well placed the
planet presents a sharpness and steadiness of outline which render
him capable of bearing higher magnifying powers than Jupiter, and even
than Mars, though a curious rippling movement will often be noticed
passing along the rings. It can scarcely be said, however, that
there is much work for small instruments upon Saturn--the seeing
of imaginary details being excluded. Accordingly, in spite of the
undoubted beauty of the ringed planet, Jupiter will on the whole be
found to be an object of more permanent interest. Yet, viewed merely
as a spectacle, and as an example of extraordinary grace and symmetry,
Saturn must always command attention. The sight of his wonderful
system can hardly fail to excite speculation as to its destiny; and
the question of the permanence of the rings is one that is almost
thrust upon the spectator. With regard to this matter it may be noted
that, according to Professor G. H. Darwin, the rings represent merely
a passing stage in the evolution of the Saturnian system. At present
they are within the limit proved by Roche, in 1848, to be that within
which no secondary body of reasonable size could exist; and thus the
discrete character of their constituents is maintained by the strains
of unequal attraction. Professor Darwin believes that in time the
inner particles of the ring will be drawn inwards, and will eventually
fall upon the planet's surface, while the outer ones will disperse
outwards to a point beyond Roche's limit, where they may eventually
coalesce into a satellite or satellites--a poor compensation for the
loss of appendages so brilliant and unique as the rings.

Saturn's train of satellites is the most numerous and remarkable in
our system. As already mentioned, Huygens, the discoverer of the true
form of the ring, discovered also the first and brightest satellite,
Titan, which is a body somewhat larger than our own moon, having a
diameter of 2,720 miles. A few years later came Cassini's discoveries
of four other satellites, beginning in 1671 and ending in 1684. For
more than 100 years discovery paused there, and it was not until
August and September, 1789, that Sir William Herschel added the sixth
and seventh to our knowledge of the Saturnian system.

In 1848 Bond in America and Lassell in England made independently the
discovery of the eighth satellite--another of the coincidences which
marked the progress of research upon Saturn, and in both of which Bond
was concerned. Then followed another pause of fifty years broken by
the discovery, in 1898, by Professor Pickering, of a ninth, whose
existence was not completely confirmed till 1904. The motion of this
satellite has proved to be retrograde, unlike that of the earlier
discovered members of the family, so that its discovery has introduced
us to a new and abnormal feature of the Saturnian system. The
discoverer of Ph[oe]be, as the ninth satellite has been named, has
followed up his success by the discovery of a tenth member of Saturn's
retinue, known provisionally as Themis. Accordingly the system, as at
present known, consists of a triple ring and ten satellites. The last
discovered moons are very small bodies, the diameter of Ph[oe]be, for
instance, being estimated at 150 miles; while its distance from Saturn
is 8,000,000 miles. From the surface of the planet Ph[oe]be would
appear like a star of fifth or sixth magnitude; to observers on our
own earth its magnitude is fifteenth or sixteenth. The ten satellites
have been named as follows: 1, Titan, discovered by Huygens; 2,
Japetus; 3, Rhea; 4, Dione; 5, Tethys, all discovered by Cassini; 6,
Enceladus; and 7, Mimas, Sir William Herschel; 8, Hyperion, Bond and
Lassell; 9, Ph[oe]be; and 10, Themis, W. H. Pickering. Titan, the
largest satellite, has been found to be considerably denser than
Saturn himself.

The most of these little moons are, of course, beyond the power of
small glasses; but a 2-inch will show Titan perfectly well. Japetus
also is not a difficult object, but is much easier at his western than
at his eastern elongation, a fact which probably points to a surface
of unequal reflective power. Rhea, Dione, and Tethys are much more
difficult. Kitchiner states that a friend of his saw them with
2-7/10-inch aperture, the planet being hidden; but probably his friend
had been amusing himself at the quaint old gentleman's expense.
Noble concludes that with a first-class 3-inch and under favourable
circumstances four, or as a bare possibility even five, satellites may
be seen; and I have repeatedly seen all the five with 3-7/8-inches.
The only particular advantages of seeing them are the test which they
afford of the instrument used, and the accompanying practice of the
eye in picking up minute points of light. There is a considerable
interest in watching the gradual disappearance of the brilliant disc
of Saturn behind the edge of the field, or of the thick wire which may
be placed in the eye-piece to hide the planet, and then catching the
sudden flash up of the tiny dots of light which were previously lost
in the glare of the larger body. For purposes of identification,
recourse must be had to the 'Companion to the Observatory,' which
prints lists of the elongations of the various satellites and a
diagram of their orbits which renders it an easy matter to identify
any particular satellite seen. Transits are, with the exception
of that of Titan, beyond the powers of such instruments as we are
contemplating. The shadow of Titan has, however, been seen in transit
with a telescope of only 2-7/8-inch aperture.


    [Footnote *: The plane of the rings passes through the earth
    on April 13, and through the sun on July 27, 1907, at
    which periods it is probable that the rings will altogether
    disappear.]




CHAPTER XII

URANUS AND NEPTUNE


Hitherto we have been dealing with bodies which, from time immemorial,
have been known to man as planets. There must have been a period when
one by one the various members of our system known to the ancients
were discriminated from the fixed stars by unknown but patient and
skilful observers; but, from the dawn of historical astronomy, up to
the night of March 13, 1781, there had been no addition to the number
of those five primary planets the story of whose discovery is lost in
the mists of antiquity.

It may be questioned whether any one man, Kepler and Newton being
possible exceptions, has ever done so much for the science of
astronomy as was accomplished by Sir William Herschel. Certainly
no single observer has ever done so much, or, which is almost more
important than the actual amount of his achievement, has so completely
revolutionized methods and ideas in observing.

A Hanoverian by birth, and a member of the band of the Hanoverian
Guards, Herschel, after tasting the discomforts of war in the shape
of a night spent in a ditch on the field of Hastenbeck, where that
egregious general the Duke of Cumberland was beaten by the French,
concluded that he was not designed by Nature for martial distinction,
and abruptly solved the problem of his immediate destiny by recourse
to the simple and unheroic expedient of desertion. He came to England,
got employment after a time as organist of the Octagon Chapel at Bath,
and was rapidly rising into notice as a musician, when the force of
his genius, combined with a discovery which came certainly unsought,
but was grasped as only a great man can grasp the gifts of Fortune,
again changed the direction of his life, and gave him to the science
of astronomy.

He had for several years employed his spare time in assiduous
observation; and, finding that opticians' prices were higher than he
could well afford, had begun to make Newtonian reflectors for
himself, and had finally succeeded in constructing one of 6-1/2 inches
aperture, and of high optical quality. With this instrument, on the
night of March 13, 1781, he was engaged in the execution of a plan
which he had formed of searching the heavens for double stars, with a
view to measuring their distance from the earth by seeing whether the
apparent distance of the members of the double from one another varied
in any degree in the course of the earth's journey round the sun. He
was working through the stars in the constellation Gemini, when his
attention was fixed by one which presented a different appearance from
the others which had passed his scrutiny.

In a good telescope a fixed star shows only a very small disc, which
indeed should be but a point of light; and the finer the instrument
the smaller the disc. The disc of this object, however, was
unmistakably larger than those of the fixed stars in its
neighbourhood--unmistakably, that is, to an observer of such skill as
Herschel, though those who have seen Uranus under ordinary powers will
find their respect considerably increased for the skill which at
once discriminated the tiny greenish disc from that of a fixed star.
Subsequent observation revealed to Herschel that he was right in
supposing that this body was not a star, for it proved to be in motion
relatively to the stars among which it was seen. But, in spite of
poetic authority, astronomical discoveries do not happen quite so
dramatically as the sonnet 'On First looking into Chapman's Homer'
suggests.

  'Then felt I like some watcher of the skies,
  When a new planet swims into his ken'

is a noble simile, were it only true to the facts. But new planets
do not swim around promiscuously in this fashion; and in the case of
Uranus, which more nearly realizes the thought of Keats than any other
in the history of astronomy, the 'watcher of the skies' felt probably
more puzzlement than anything else. Herschel was far from realizing
that he had found a new planet. When unmistakable evidence was
forthcoming that the newly discovered body was not a fixed star, he
merely felt confirmed in the first conjecture which had been suggested
by the size of its disc--namely, that he had discovered a new comet;
and it was as a new comet that Uranus was first announced to the
astronomical world.

It quickly became evident, however, that the new discovery moved in no
cometary orbit, but in one which marked it out as a regular member
of the solar system. A search was then instituted for earlier
observations of the planet, and it was found to have been observed
and mistaken for a fixed star on twenty previous occasions! One
astronomer, Lemonnier, had actually observed it no fewer than twelve
times, several of them within a few weeks of one another, and, had he
but reduced and compared his observations, could scarcely have failed
to have anticipated Herschel's discovery. But perhaps an astronomer
who, like Lemonnier, noted some of his observations on a paper-bag
which had formerly contained hair-powder, and whose astronomical
papers have been described as 'the image of Chaos,' scarcely deserved
the honour of such a discovery!

When it became known that this new addition to our knowledge of the
solar system had been made by the self-taught astronomer at Bath,
Herschel was summoned to Court by George III., and enabled to devote
himself entirely to his favourite study by the bestowal of the not
very magnificent pension of £200 a year, probably the best investment
that has ever been made in the interests of astronomical science. In
gratitude to the penurious monarch who had bestowed on him this meagre
competence, Herschel wished to call his planet the Georgium Sidus--the
Georgian Star, and this title, shortened in some instances to the
Georgian, is still to be found in some ancient volumes on astronomy.
The astronomers of the Continent, however, did not feel in the least
inclined to elevate Farmer George to the skies before his due time,
and for awhile the name of Herschel was given to the new planet, which
still bears as its symbol the first letter of its discoverer's name
with a globe attached to the cross-bar [Uranus]. Finally, the name
Urᾰnus ('a' short) prevailed, and has for long been in universal
use.

Uranus revolves round the sun at a distance from him of about
1,780,000,000 miles, in an orbit which takes eighty-four of our years
to complete. Barnard gives his diameter at 34,900 miles, and if this
measure be correct, he is the third largest planet of the system.
Other measures give a somewhat smaller diameter, and place Neptune
above him in point of size.

Subsequent observers have been able to see but little more than
Herschel saw upon the diminutive disc to which even so large a body
is reduced at so vast a distance. When near opposition, Uranus can
readily be seen with the naked eye as a star of about the sixth
magnitude, and there is no difficulty in picking him up with the
finder of an ordinary telescope by means of an almanac and a good star
map, nor in raising a small disc by the application of a moderately
high power, say 200 and upwards. (Herschel was using 227 at the time
of his discovery.) But small telescopes do little more than give their
owners the satisfaction of seeing, pretty much as Herschel saw it,
the object on which his eye was the first to light. Nor have even the
largest instruments done very much more. Rings, similar to those of
Saturn, were once suspected, but have long since been disposed of,
and most of the observations of spots and belts have been gravely
questioned. The Lick observers in 1890 and 1891 describe the belts as
'the merest shades on the planet's surface.'

The spectrum of Uranus is marked by peculiarities which distinguish
it from that of the other planets. It is crossed by six dark
absorption-bands, which indicate at all events that the medium
through which the sunlight which it reflects to us has passed is of
a constitution markedly different from that of our own atmosphere. It
was at first thought that the spectrum gave evidence of the planet's
self-luminosity; but this has not proved to be the case, though
doubtless Uranus, like Jupiter and Saturn, is in the condition of
a semi-sun. Like the other members of the group of large exterior
planets, his density is small, being only 1/5 greater than that of
water.

Six years after his great discovery, Herschel, with the 40-foot
telescope of 4 feet in aperture which he had now built, discovered two
satellites, and believed himself to have discovered four more. Later
observations have shown that, in the case of the four, small stars
near the planet had been mistaken for satellites. Subsequently two
more were discovered, one by Lassell, and one by Otto Struve, making
the number of the Uranian retinue up to four, so far as our present
knowledge goes. These four satellites, known as Ariel, Umbriel,
Oberon, and Titania, are distinguished by the fact that their orbits
are almost perpendicular to the plane of the orbit of Uranus, and that
the motions of all of them are retrograde. Titania and Oberon, the two
discovered by Herschel, are the easiest objects; but although they are
said to have been seen with a 4·3-inch refractor, this is a feat which
no ordinary observer need hope to emulate. An 8-inch is a more likely
instrument for such a task, and a 12-inch more likely still;
the average observer will probably find the latter none too big.
Accordingly, they are quite beyond the range of such observation as we
are contemplating. The rotation period of Uranus is not known.

In a few years after the discovery of Uranus, it became apparent that
by no possible ingenuity could his places as determined by present
observation be satisfactorily combined with those determined by the
twenty observations available, as already mentioned, from the period
before he was recognised as a planet. Either the old observations were
bad, or else the new planet was wandering from the track which it had
formerly followed. It appeared to Bouvard, who was constructing the
tables for the motions of Uranus, the simplest course to reject the
old observations as probably erroneous, and to confine himself to the
modern ones. Accordingly this course was pursued, and his tables were
published in 1821, but only for it to be found that in a few years
they also began to prove unsatisfactory; discrepancies began to appear
and to increase, and it quickly became apparent that an attempt must
be made to discover the cause of them.

Bouvard himself appears to have believed in the existence of a planet
exterior to Uranus whose attraction was producing these disturbances,
but he died in 1843 before any progress had been made with the
solution of the enigma. In 1834 Hussey approached Airy, the Astronomer
Royal, with the suggestion that he might sweep for the supposed
exterior planet if some mathematician would help him as to the most
likely region to investigate. Airy, however, returned a sufficiently
discouraging answer, and Hussey apparently was deterred by it from
carrying out a search which might very possibly have been rewarded
by success. Bessel, the great German mathematician, had marked the
problem for his own, and would doubtless have succeeded in solving
it, but shortly after he had begun the gathering of material for his
researches, he was seized with the illness which ultimately proved
fatal to him.

The question was thus practically untouched when in 1841, John Couch
Adams, then an undergraduate of St. John's College, Cambridge, jotted
down a memorandum in which he indicated his resolve to attack it and
attempt the discovery of the perturbing planet, 'as soon as possible
after taking my degree.' The half-sheet of notepaper on which the
memorandum was made is still extant, and forms part of the volume
of manuscripts on the subject preserved in the library of St. John's
College.

On October 21, 1845, Adams, who had taken his degree (Senior Wrangler)
in 1843, communicated to Airy the results of his sixth and final
attempt at the solution of the problem, and furnished him with the
elements and mass of the perturbing planet, and an indication of its
approximate place in the heavens. Airy, whose record in the matter
reads very strangely, was little more inclined to give encouragement
to Adams than to Hussey. He replied by propounding to the young
investigator a question which he considered 'a question of vast
importance, an _experimentum crucis_,' which Adams seemingly
considered of so little moment, that strangely enough he never
troubled to answer it. Then the matter dropped out of sight, though,
had the planet been sought for when Adams's results were first
communicated to the Astronomer Royal, it would have been found within
3-1/2 lunar diameters of the place assigned to it.

Meanwhile, in France, another and better-known mathematician had taken
up the subject, and in three memoirs presented to the French Academy
of Sciences in 1846, Leverrier furnished data concerning the new
planet which agreed in very remarkable fashion with those furnished by
Adams to Airy. The coincidence shook Airy's scepticism, and he asked
Dr. Challis, director of the Cambridge Observatory, to begin a search
for the planet with the large Northumberland equatorial. Challis, who
had no complete charts of the region to be searched, began to make
observations for the construction of a chart which would enable him to
detect the planet by means of its motion. It is more than likely that
had he adopted Hussey's suggestion of simply sweeping in the vicinity
of the spot indicated, he would have been successful, for the
Northumberland telescope was of 11 inches aperture, and would have
borne powers sufficient to distinguish readily the disc of Neptune
from the fixed stars around it. However, Challis chose the more
thorough, but longer method of charting; and even to that he did
not devote undivided attention. 'Some wretched comet,' says Proctor,
'which he thought it his more important duty to watch, prevented
him from making the reductions which would have shown him that the
exterior planet had twice been recorded in his notes of observations.'

Indeed, a certain fatality seems to have hung over the attempts made
in Britain to realize Adams's discovery. In 1845, the Rev. W. R.
Dawes, one of the keenest and most skilful of amateur observers, was
so much impressed by some of Adams's letters to the Astronomer Royal
that he wrote to Lassell, asking him to search for the planet. When
Dawes's letter arrived, Lassell was suffering from a sprained ankle,
and laid the letter aside till he should be able to resume work. In
the meantime the letter was burned by an officious servant-maid, and
Lassell lost the opportunity of a discovery which would have crowned
the fine work which he accomplished as an amateur observer.

A very different fate had attended Leverrier's calculations. On
September 23, 1846, a letter from Leverrier was received at the Berlin
Observatory, asking that search should be made for the planet in the
position which his inquiries had pointed out. The same night Galle
made the search, and within a degree of the spot indicated an object
was found with a measurable disc of between two and three seconds
diameter. As it was not laid down on Bremiker's star-chart of the
region, it was clearly not a star, and by next night its planetary
nature was made manifest. The promptitude with which Leverrier's
results were acted upon by Encke and Galle is in strong contrast to
the sluggishness which characterized the British official astronomers,
who, indeed, can scarcely be said to have come out of the business
with much credit.

A somewhat undignified controversy ensued. The French astronomers,
very naturally, were eager to claim all the laurels for their
brilliant countryman, and were indignant when a claim was put in on
behalf of a young Englishman whose name had never previously been
heard of. Airy, however, displayed more vigour in this petty squabble
than in the search for Neptune, and presented such evidence in support
of his fellow-countryman's right to recognition that it was impossible
to deny him the honour which, but for official slackness, would have
fallen to him as the actual as well as the potential discoverer of the
new planet. Adams himself took no part in the strife; spoke, indeed,
no words on the matter, except to praise the abilities of Leverrier,
and gave no sign of the annoyance which most men in like circumstances
would have displayed.

Galle suggested that the new planet should be called Janus; but the
name of the two-faced god was felt to be rather too pointedly suitable
at the moment, and that of Neptune was finally preferred. Neptune
is about 32,900 miles in diameter, his distance from the sun is
2,792,000,000 miles, and he occupies 165 years in the circuit of his
gigantic orbit. The spectroscopic evidence, such as it is, seems to
point to a condition somewhat similar to that of Uranus.

Neptune had only been discovered seventeen days when Lassell found him
to be attended by one satellite. First seen on October 10, 1846, it
was not till the following July that the existence of this body
was verified by Lassell himself and also by Otto Struve and Bond
of Harvard. From the fact that it is visible at such an enormous
distance, it is evident that this satellite must be of considerable
size--probably at least equal to our own moon.

Small instruments can make nothing of Neptune beyond, perhaps,
distinguishing the fact that, whatever the tiny disc may be, it is
not that of a star. His satellite is an object reserved for the very
finest instruments alone.

Should Neptune have any inhabitants, their sky must be somewhat barren
of planets. Jupiter's greatest elongation from the sun would be about
10°, and he would be seen under somewhat less favourable conditions
than those under which we see Mercury; while the planets between
Jupiter and the sun would be perpetually invisible. Saturn and Uranus,
however, would be fairly conspicuous, the latter being better seen
than from the earth.

Suspicions have been entertained of the existence of another planet
beyond Neptune, and photographic searches have been made, but hitherto
without success. So far as our present knowledge goes, Neptune is the
utmost sentinel of the regular army of the solar system.




CHAPTER XIII

COMETS AND METEORS


There is one type of celestial object which seldom fails to stir up
the mind of even the most sluggishly unastronomical member of the
community and to inspire him with an interest in the science--an
interest which is usually conspicuous for a picturesque inaccuracy
in the details which it accumulates, for a pathetic faith in the most
extraordinary fibs which may be told in the name of science, and for
a subsidence which is as rapid as the changes in the object which gave
the inspiration. The sun may go on shining, a perpetual mystery and
miracle, without attracting any attention, save when a wet spring
brings on the usual talk of sun-spots and the weather; Jupiter
and Venus excite only sufficient interest to suggest an occasional
question as to whether that bright star is the Star of Bethlehem; but
when a great comet spreads its fiery tail across the skies everybody
turns astronomer for the nonce, and normally slumber-loving people
are found willing, or at least able, to desert their beds at the
most unholy hours to catch a glimpse of the strange and mysterious
visitant. And, when the comet eventually withdraws from view again, as
much inaccurate information has been disseminated among the public as
would fill an encyclopædia, and require another to correct.

Comets are, however, really among the most interesting of celestial
objects. Though we no longer imagine them to foretell wars, famines,
and plagues, or complacently to indicate the approbation of heaven
upon some illustrious person deceased or about to decease, and have
almost ceased to shiver at the possibilities of a collision between a
comet and the earth, they have within the last half century taken on a
new and growing interest of a more legitimate kind, and there are few
departments of science in which the advance of knowledge has been more
rapid or which promise more in the immediate future, given material to
work upon.

The popular idea of a comet is that it is a kind of bright wandering
star with a long tail. Indeed, the star part of the conception is
quite subsidiary to the tail part. The tail is _the_ thing, and a
comet without a tail is not worthy of attention, if it is not rather
guilty of claiming notice on false pretences. As a matter of fact, the
tail is absent in many comets and quite inconspicuous in many more;
and a comet may be a body with any degree of resemblance or want of
resemblance to the popular idea, from the faint globular stain of
haze, scarcely perceptible in the telescopic field against the dark
background of the sky, up to a magnificent object, which, like the
dragon in the Revelation, seems to draw the third part of the stars
of heaven after it--an object like the Donati comet of 1858, with a
nucleus brighter than a first-magnitude star, and a tail like a great
feathery plume of light fifty millions of miles in length. It seems
as impossible to set limits to the variety of form of which comets are
capable as it is to set limits to their number.

Generally speaking, however, a comet consists of three parts: The
nucleus--which appears as a more or less clearly defined star-like
point, and is the only part of the comet which will bear any
magnification to speak of--the coma, and the tail. In many telescopic
comets the nucleus is entirely absent, and, in the comets in which
it is present, it is of very varied size, and often presents curious
irregularities in shape, and even occasionally the appearance of
internal motions. It frequently changes very much in size during the
period of the comet's visibility. The nucleus is the only part of a
comet's structure which has even the most distant claim to solidity;
but even so the evidence which has been gradually accumulated all goes
to show that while it may be solid in the sense of being composed of
particles which have some substance, it is not solid in the sense of
being one coherent mass, but rather consists of something like a swarm
of small meteoric bodies. Surrounding the nucleus is the coma, from
which the comet derives its name. This is a sort of misty cloud
through which the nucleus seems to shine like a star in a nebula or
a gas-lamp in a fog. Its boundaries are difficult to trace, as it
appears to fade away gradually on every side into the background; but
generally its appearance is more or less of a globular shape except
where the tail streams away from it behind. Sometimes the coma is of
enormous extent--the Great Comet of 1811 showed a nucleus of 428 miles
diameter, enclosed within a nebulous globe 127,000 miles across, which
in its turn was wrapped in a luminous atmosphere of four times
greater diameter, with an outside envelope covering all, and extending
backwards to form the tail. But it is also of the most extraordinary
tenuity, the light of the very faintest stars having been frequently
observed to shine undimmed through several millions of miles of coma.
Finally, there is the tail, which may be so short as to be barely
distinguishable; or may extend, as in the case of Comet 1811 (ii.), to
130,000,000 miles; or, as in that of Comet 1843 (i.), to 200,000,000.
The most tenuous substances with which we are acquainted seem to be
solidity itself compared with the material of a comet's tail. It is
'such stuff as dreams are made of.'

Comets fall into two classes. There are those whose orbits follow
curves that are not closed, like the circle or the ellipse, but appear
to extend indefinitely into space. A comet following such an orbit
(parabolic or hyperbolic) seems to come wandering in from the depths
of space, passes round the sun, and then gradually recedes into the
space from which it came, never again to be seen of human eye. It is
now becoming questionable, however, whether any comet can really
be said to come in from infinite space; and the view is being more
generally held that orbits which to us appear portions of unclosed
curves may in reality be only portions of immensely elongated
ellipses, and that all comets are really members of the solar system,
travelling away, indeed, to distances that are immense compared with
even the largest planetary orbit, but yet infinitely small compared
with the distances of the fixed stars.

Second, there are those comets whose orbits form ellipses with a
greater or less departure from the circular form. Such comets must
always return again, sooner or later, to the neighbourhood of the sun,
which occupies one of the foci of the ellipse, and they are known as
Periodic Comets. The orbits which they follow may have any degree of
departure from the circular form, from one which does not differ very
notably from that of such a planet as Eros, up to one which may be
scarcely distinguishable from a parabola. Thus we have Periodic Comets
again divided into comets of short and comets of long period. In the
former class, the period ranges from that of Encke's comet which never
travels beyond the orbit of Jupiter, and only takes 3·29 years to
complete its journey, up to that of the famous comet whose periodicity
was first discovered by Halley, whose extreme distance from the sun
is upwards of 3,200,000,000 miles, and whose period is 76·78 years.
Comets of long period range from bodies which only require a paltry
two or three centuries to complete their revolution, up to others
whose journey has to be timed by thousands of years. In the case of
these latter bodies, there is scarcely any distinction to be made
between them and those comets which are not supposed to be periodic;
the ellipse of a comet which takes three or four thousand years to
complete its orbit is scarcely to be distinguished, in the small
portion of it that can be traced, from a parabola.

Several comets have been found to be short period bodies, which,
though bright enough to have been easily seen, have yet never been
noticed at any previous appearance. It is known that some at least of
these owe their present orbits to the fact that having come near to
one or other of the planets they have been, so to speak, captured, and
diverted from the track which they formerly pursued. Several of the
planets have more or less numerous flocks of comets associated with
them which they have thus captured and introduced into a short period
career. Jupiter has more than a score in his group, while Saturn,
Uranus and Neptune have smaller retinues. There can be no question
that a comet of first-class splendour, such as that of 1811, that of
1858, or that of 1861, is one of the most impressive spectacles that
the heavens have to offer. Unfortunately it is one which the present
generation, at least in the northern hemisphere, has had but little
opportunity of witnessing. Chambers notices 'that it may be taken as
a fact that a bright and conspicuous comet comes about once in ten
years, and a very remarkable comet once every thirty years;' and adds,
'tested then by either standard of words "bright and conspicuous," or
"specially celebrated," it may be affirmed that a good comet is now
due.' It is eleven years since that hopeful anticipation was penned,
and we are still waiting, not only for the 'specially celebrated,' but
even for the 'bright and conspicuous' comet; so that on the whole we
may be said to have a grievance. Still, there is no saying when the
grievance may be removed, as comets have a knack of being unexpected
in their developments; and it may be that some unconsidered little
patch of haze is even now drawing in from the depths which may yet
develop into a portent as wonderful as those that astonished the
generation before us in 1858 and 1861.

The multitude of comets is, in all probability, enormous. Between
the beginning of the Christian era and 1888 the number recorded was,
according to Chambers, 850; but the real number for that period must
have been indefinitely greater, as, for upwards of 1600 out of the
1888 years, only those comets which were visible to the naked eye
could have been recorded--a very small proportion of the whole. The
period 1801 to 1888 shows 270, so that in less than one century
there has been recorded almost one-third of the total for nineteen
centuries. At present no year goes by without the discovery of several
comets; but very few of them become at all conspicuous. For example,
in 1904, six comets were seen--three of these being returns of comets
previously observed, and three new discoveries; but none of these
proved at all notable objects in the ordinary sense, though Comet 1904
(_a_), discovered by Brooks, was pretty generally observed.

It would serve no useful purpose to repeat here the stories of any of
the great comets. These may be found in considerable detail in such
volumes as Chambers's 'Handbook of Astronomy,' vol. i., or Miss Agnes
Clerke's 'History of Astronomy.' Attention must rather be turned to
the question, 'What are comets?' It is a question to which no answer
of a satisfactory character could be given till within the last fifty
years. Even the great comet of 1858, the Donati, which made so deep an
impression on the public mind, and was so closely followed and
studied by astronomers, was not the medium of any great advance in
the knowledge of cometary nature. The many memoirs which it elicited
disclosed nothing fundamentally new, and broke out no new lines of
inquiry. Two things have since then revolutionized the study of the
subject--the application of the spectroscope to the various comets
that have appeared in the closing years of the nineteenth century, and
the discovery of the intimate connection between comets and meteors.

It was in 1864, a year further made memorable astronomically by Sir
William Huggins's discovery of the gaseous nature of some of the
nebulæ, that the spectroscope was first applied to the study of
a comet. The celestial visitor thus put to the question, a comet
discovered by Tempel, was in nowise a distinguished object, appearing
like a star of the second magnitude, or less, with a feeble though
fairly long tail. When analyzed by Donati, it was found to yield a
spectrum consisting of three bright bands, yellow, green, and blue,
separated by dark spaces. This observation at once modified ideas as
to cometary structure. Hitherto it had been supposed that comets shone
by reflected light; but Donati's observation revealed beyond question
that the light of the 1864 comet at all events was inherent, and that,
so far as the observation went, the comet consisted of glowing gas.

[Illustration:

  PLATE XXV.

Great Comet. Photographed May 5, 1901, with the 13-inch Astrographic
Refractor of the Royal Observatory, Cape of Good Hope.]

In 1868 Sir William Huggins carried the matter one step further by
showing that the spectrum of Winnecke's comet of that year agreed
with that of olefiant gas rendered luminous by electricity; and the
presence of the hydrocarbon spectrum has since been detected in
a large number of comets. The first really brilliant comet to be
analyzed by the spectroscope was Coggia's (1874), and it presented not
only the three bright bands that had been already seen, but the whole
range of five bands characteristic of the hydrocarbon spectrum. In
certain cases, however--notably, that of Holmes's comet of 1892 and
that of the great southern comet of 1901 (Plate XXV.)--the spectrum
has not exhibited the usual bright band type, but has instead shown
merely a continuous ribbon of colour. From these analyses certain
facts emerge. First, that the gaseous surroundings of comets consist
mainly of hydrogen and carbon, and that in all probability their
luminosity is due, not to mere solar heat, but to the effect of some
electric process acting upon them during their approach to the sun;
and second, that, along with these indications of the presence
of luminous hydrocarbon compounds, there is also evidence of the
existence of solid particles, mainly in the nucleus, but also to some
extent in the rest of the comet, which shine by reflected sunlight. It
is further almost certain, from the observation by Elkin and Finlay
of the beginning of the transit of Comet 1882 (iii.) across the sun's
face, that this solid matter is not in any sense a solid mass. The
comet referred to disappeared absolutely as soon as it began to pass
the sun's edge. Had it been a solid mass or even a closely compacted
collection of small bodies it would have appeared as a black spot upon
the solar surface. The conclusion, then, is obvious that the solid
matter must be very thinly and widely spread, while its individual
particles may have any size from that of grains of sand up to that of
the large meteoric bodies which sometimes reach our earth.

Thus the state of the case as regards the constitution of comets is,
roughly speaking, this: They consist of a nucleus of solid
matter, held together, but with a very slack bond, by the power of
gravitation. From this nucleus, as the comet approaches perihelion,
the electric action of the sun, working in a manner at present
unknown, drives off volumes of luminous gas, which form the tail; and
in some comets the waves of this vapour have been actually seen rising
slowly in successive pulses from the nucleus, and then being driven
backwards much as the smoke of a steamer is driven. It has been found
also by investigation of Comet Wells 1882 and the Great Comet of 1882
that in some at least of these bodies sodium and iron are present.

The question next arises, What becomes of comets in the end? Kepler
long ago asserted his belief that they perished, as silkworms perish
by spinning their own thread, exhausting themselves by the very
efforts of tail-production which render them sometimes so brilliant to
observation; and this seems to be pretty much the case. Thus Halley's
comet, which was once so brilliant and excited so much attention,
was at its last visit a very inconspicuous object indeed. At its
apparition in 1845-1846 Biela's comet was found to have split into
two separate bodies, which were found at their return in 1852 to have
parted company widely. Since that year it has never been observed
again in the form of a comet, though, as we shall see, it has
presented itself in a different guise. The same fate has overtaken the
comets of De Vico (1844), and Brorsen (1846). The former should have
returned in 1850, but failed to keep its appointment; and the latter,
after having established a character for regularity by returning to
observation on four occasions, failed to appear in 1890, and has never
since been seen.

The mystery of such disappearances has been at least partially
dispelled by the discovery, due to Schiaparelli and other workers in
the same field, that various prominent meteor-showers travel in orbits
precisely the same as those of certain comets. Thus the shower of
meteors which takes place with greater or less brilliancy every year
from a point in the constellation Perseus has been proved to follow
the orbit of the bright comet of 1862; while the great periodic shower
of the Leonids follows the track of the comet of 1866; the orbit of
the star-shower of April 20--the Lyrids--corresponds with that of a
comet seen in 1861; and the disappearance of Biela's comet appears to
be accounted for by the other November shower whose radiant point is
in the constellation Andromeda. In fact, the state of the matter is
well summed up by Kirkwood's question: 'May not our periodic meteors
be the débris of ancient but now disintegrated comets, whose matter
has become distributed round their orbits?' The loosely compacted mass
which forms the nucleus of the comet appears to gradually lose its
cohesion under the force of solar tidal action, and its fragments
come to revolve independently in their orbit, for a time in a loosely
gathered swarm, and then gradually, as the laggards drop behind, in
the form of a complete ring of meteoric bodies, which are distributed
over the whole orbit. The Leonid shower is in the first condition, or,
rather, was when it was last seen, for it seems to be now lost to us;
the Perseid shower is in the second. The shower of the Andromedes has
since confirmed its identity with the lost comet of Biela by displays
in 1872, 1885, and 1892, at the seasons when that comet should
have returned to the neighbourhood of the sun. It appears to be
experiencing the usual fate of such showers, and becoming more
widely distributed round its orbit, and the return in 1905 was very
disappointing, the reason apparently being that the dense group in
close attendance on the comet has suffered disturbance from Jupiter
and Saturn, and now passes more than a million miles outside the
earth's orbit.

In 1843 there appeared one of the most remarkable of recorded comets.
It was not only of conspicuous brilliancy and size, though its tail
at one stage reached the enormous length of 200,000,000 miles, but was
remarkable for the extraordinarily close approach which it made to the
sun. Its centre came as near to the sun as 78,000 miles, leaving no
more than 32,000 miles between the surfaces of the two bodies; it
must, therefore, have passed clear through the corona, and very
probably through some of the prominences. Its enormous tail was
whirled, or rather appeared to be whirled, right round the sun in a
little over two hours, thus affording conclusive proof that the
tail of a comet cannot possibly be an appendage, but must consist of
perpetually renewed emanations from the nucleus. But in addition to
these wonders, the comet of 1843 proved the precursor of a series of
fine comets travelling in orbits which were practically identical. The
great southern comet of 1880 proved, when its orbit had been computed,
to follow a path almost exactly the same as that of its predecessor
of thirty-seven years before. It seemed inconceivable that a body so
remarkable as the 1843 comet should have a period of only thirty-seven
years, and yet never previously have attracted attention. Before
the question had been fairly discussed, it was accentuated by
the discovery, in 1881, of a comet whose orbit was almost
indistinguishable from that of the comet of 1807. But the 1807 comet
was not due to return till A.D. 3346. Further, the comet of 1881
proved to have a period, not of seventy-four years, as would have been
the case had it been a return of that of 1807, but of 2,429 years.
The only possible conclusion was that here were two comets which were
really fragments of one great comet which had suffered disruption,
as Biela's comet visibly did, and that one fragment followed in the
other's wake with an interval of seventy-four years.

Meanwhile, the question of the 1843 and 1880 comets was still
unsettled, and it received a fresh complication by the appearance
of the remarkable comet of 1882, whose transit of the sun has been
already alluded to, for the orbit of this new body proved to be a
reproduction, almost, but not quite exact, of those of the previous
two. Astronomers were at a greater loss than ever, for if this were a
return of the 1880 comet, then the conclusion followed that something
was so influencing its orbit as to have shortened its period from
thirty-seven to two years. The idea of the existence of some medium
round the sun, capable of resisting bodies which passed through it,
and thus causing them to draw closer to their centre of attraction and
shortening their periods, was now revived, and it seemed as though,
at its next return, this wonderful visitant must make the final plunge
into the photosphere, with what consequences none could foretell.
These forebodings proved to be quite baseless. The comet passed so
close to the sun (within 300,000 miles of his surface), that it must
have been sensibly retarded at its passage by the resisting medium,
had such a thing existed; but not the slightest retardation was
discernible. The comet suffered no check in its plunge through the
solar surroundings, and consequently the theory of the resisting
medium may be said to have received its quietus.

Computation showed that the 1882 comet followed nearly the same orbit
as its predecessors; and thus we are faced by the fact of families
of comets, travelling in orbits that are practically identical, and
succeeding one another at longer or shorter intervals. The idea that
these families have each sprung from the disruption of some much
larger body seems to be most probable, and it appears to be confirmed
by the fact that in the 1882 comet the process of further disruption
was actually witnessed. Schmidt of Athens detected one small offshoot
of the great comet, which remained visible for several days. Barnard
a few days later saw at least six small nebulous bodies close to their
parent, and a little later Brooks observed another. 'Thus,' as Miss
Agnes Clerke remarks, 'space appeared to be strewn with the filmy
débris of this beautiful but fragile structure all along the track of
its retreat from the sun.'

The state of our knowledge with regard to comets may be roughly summed
up. We have extreme tenuity in the whole body, even the nucleus
being apparently not solid, but a comparatively loose swarm of
solid particles. The nucleus, in all likelihood, shines by reflected
sunlight--in part, at all events. The nebulous surroundings and tail
are produced by solar action upon the matter of which the comet is
composed, this action being almost certainly electrical, though heat
may play some part in it. The nebulous matter appears to proceed in
waves from the nucleus, and to be swept backward along the comet's
track by some repellent force, probably electrical, exerted by
the sun. This part of the comet's structure consists mainly of
self-luminous gases, generally of the hydrocarbon type, though sodium
and iron have also been traced. Comets, certainly in many cases,
probably in all, suffer gradual degradation into swarms of meteors.
The existence of groups of comets, each group probably the outcome of
the disruption of a much larger body, is demonstrated by the fact of
successive comets travelling in almost identically similar orbits.
Finally, comets are all connected with the solar system, so far, at
least, that they accompany that system in its journey of 400,000,000
miles a year through space. Our system does not, as it were, pick up
the comets as it sweeps along upon its great journey; it carries them
along with it.

A few words may be added as to cometary observation. It is scarcely
likely that any very great number of amateur observers will ever
be attracted by the branch of comet-hunting. The work is somewhat
monotonous and laborious, and seems to require special aptitudes,
and, above all, an enormous endowment of patience. Probably the true
comet-hunter, like the poet, is born, not made; and it is not likely
that there are, nor desirable that there should be, many individuals
of the type of Messier, the 'comet-ferret.' 'Messier,' writes a
contemporary, 'is at all events a very good man, and simple as a
child. He lost his wife some years ago, and his attendance upon her
death-bed prevented his being the discoverer of a comet for which he
had been lying in wait, and which was snatched from him by Montaigne
de Limoges. This made him desperate. A visitor began to offer him
consolation for his recent bereavement, when Messier, thinking only of
the comet, answered, "I had discovered twelve; alas! to be robbed of
the thirteenth by that Montaigne!" and his eyes filled with tears.
Then, recollecting that it was necessary to deplore his wife, he
exclaimed, "Ah! cette pauvre femme!" and again wept for his comet.' In
addition to the fact that few have reached such a degree of scientific
detachment as to put a higher value upon a comet than upon the nearest
of relatives, there is the further fact that the future of cometary
discovery, and of the record of cometary change seems to lie almost
entirely with photography, which is wonderfully adapted for the work
(Plate XXVI.).

[Illustration:

  PLATE XXVI.

  1      2

Photographs of Swift's Comet. By Professor E. E. Barnard.

1. Taken April 4, 1892; exposure 1 hour. 2. Taken April 6, 1892;
exposure 1 hour 5 minutes.]

Anyone who desires to become a comet-hunter must, in addition to
the possession of the supreme requisites, patience and perseverance,
provide himself with an instrument of at least 4 inches aperture,
together with a good and comprehensive set of star-charts and the New
General Catalogue of nebulæ with the additions which have been made to
it. The reason for this latter item of equipment is the fact that many
telescopic comets are scarcely to be distinguished from nebulæ, and
that an accurate knowledge of the nebulous objects in the regions to
be searched for comets, or at least a means of quickly identifying
such objects, is therefore indispensable. The portions of the heavens
which afford the most likely fields for discovery will naturally be
those in the vicinity of where the sun has set at evening, or where he
is about to rise in the early morning, all comets having of necessity
to approach the sun more or less closely at their perihelion passage.
Other parts of the heavens should not be neglected; but these are the
most likely neighbourhoods.

Most of us, however, will be content to discover our comets in the
columns of the daily newspaper, or by means of a post-card from
some obliging friend. The intimation, in whatever way received, will
generally contain the position of the comet at a certain date, given
in right ascension and declination, and either a statement of its
apparent daily motion, or else a provisional set of places for several
days ahead. Having either of these, the comet's position must be
marked down on the star-map, and the course which it is likely to
pursue must be traced out in pencil by means of the data--a perfectly
simple matter of marking down the position for each day by its
celestial longitude and latitude as given. The observer will next note
carefully the alignment of the comet with the most conspicuous stars
in the neighbourhood of the particular position for the day of his
observation; and, guiding his telescope by means of these, will point
it as nearly as possible to that position. He may be lucky enough
to hit upon his object at once, especially if it be a comparatively
bright one. More probably, he will have to 'sweep' for it. In this
case the telescope must be pointed some little distance below and to
one side of the probable position of the comet, and moved slowly and
gently along, careful watch being kept upon the objects which pass
through the field, until a similar distance on the opposite side of
the position has been reached. Then raise the instrument by not more
than half a field's breadth, estimating this by the stars in the
field, and repeat the process in the opposite direction, going on
until the comet appears in the field, or until it is obvious that it
has been missed. A low power should be used at first, which may be
changed for a somewhat higher one when the object has been found. But
in no case will the use of really high magnifiers be found advisable.
It is, of course, simply impossible with the tail, for which the
naked eye is the best instrument, nor can the coma bear any degree
of magnification, though occasionally the nucleus may be sufficiently
sharply defined to bear moderate powers. The structure of the latter
should be carefully observed, with particular attention to the
question of whether any change can be seen in it, or whether there
seem any tendency to such a multiplication of nuclei as characterized
the great comet of 1882. It is possible that the pulses of vapour
sunwards from the nucleus may also be observed.

Appearance of motion, wavy or otherwise, in the tail, should also be
looked for, and carefully watched if seen. Beyond this there is not
very much that the ordinary observer can do; the determination of
positions requires more elaborate appliances, and the spectroscope is
necessary for any study of cometary constitution. It only remains
to express a wish for the speedy advent of a worthy subject for
operations.


We turn now to those bodies which, as has been pointed out, appear to
be the débris of comets which have exhausted their cometary destiny,
and ceased to have a corporate existence. Everyone is familiar with
the phenomenon known as a meteor, or shooting-star, and there are few
clear nights on which an observer who is much in the open will not see
one or more of these bodies. Generally they become visible in the form
of a bright point of light which traverses in a straight line a longer
or shorter path across the heavens, and then vanishes, sometimes
leaving behind it for a second or two a faintly luminous train. The
shooting-stars are of all degrees of brightness, from the extremely
faint streaks which sometimes flash across the field of the telescope,
up to brilliant objects, brighter than any of the planets or fixed
stars, and sometimes lighting up the whole landscape with a light like
that of the full moon.

The prevailing opinion, down to a comparatively late date, was that
shooting-stars were mere exhalations in the earth's atmosphere,
arising as one author expressed it, 'from the fermentation of acid
and alkaline bodies, which float in the atmosphere'; and it was
also suggested by eminent astronomers that they were the products
of terrestrial volcanoes, returning, after long wanderings, to their
native home.

The true study of meteoric astronomy may be said to date from the year
1833, when a shower of most extraordinary splendour was witnessed.
The magnificence of this display was the means of turning greater
attention to the subject; and it was observed as a fact, though the
importance of the observation was scarcely realized, that the meteors
all appeared to come from nearly the one point in the constellation
Leo. The fact of there being a single radiant point implied that
the meteors were all moving in parallel lines, and had entered
our atmosphere from a vast distance. Humboldt, who had witnessed a
previous appearance of this shower in 1799, suggested that it might be
a periodic phenomenon; and his suggestion was amply confirmed when
in 1866 the shower made its appearance again in scarcely diminished
splendour. Gradually other showers came to be recognised, and their
radiant points fixed; and meteoric astronomy began to be established
upon a scientific basis.

In 1866 Schiaparelli announced that the shower which radiates in
August from the constellation Perseus follows the same track as that
of Swift's comet (1862 iii.); and in the following year the great
November shower from Leo, already alluded to, was proved to have a
similar connection with Tempel's comet (1866 i.). The shower which
comes from the constellation Lyra, about April 20, describes the
same orbit as that of Comet 1861 i.; while, as already mentioned,
the mysterious disappearance of Biela's comet received a reasonable
explanation by its association with the other great November
shower--that which radiates from the constellation Andromeda. With
regard to the last-named shower, it has not only been shown that
the meteors are associated with Biela's comet, but also that they
separated from it subsequent to 1841, in which year the comet's orbit
was modified by perturbations from Jupiter. The Andromeda meteors
follow the modified orbit, and hence must have been in close
association with the comet when the perturbation was exercised.

The four outstanding meteor radiants are those named, but there are
very many others. Mr. Denning, to whom this branch of science owes so
much, estimates the number of distinct radiants known at about 4,400;
and it seems likely that every one of these showers, some of them, of
course very feeble, represents some comet deceased. The history of a
meteor shower would appear to be something like this: When the comet,
whose executor it is, has but recently deceased, it will appear as a
very brilliant periodic shower, occurring on only one or two nights
exactly at the point where the comet in its journeying would have
crossed the earth's track, and appearing only at the time when the
comet itself would have been there. Gradually the meteors get more and
more tailed out along the orbit, as runners of unequal staying powers
get strung out over a track in a long race, until the displays may
be repeated, with somewhat diminished splendour, year after year for
several years before and after the time when the parent comet is
due. At last they get thinly spread out over the whole orbit, and
the shower becomes an annual one, happening each year when the earth
crosses the orbit of the comet. This has already happened to the
Perseid shower; at least 500,000,000 miles of the orbit of Biela's
comet are studded with representatives of the Andromedes; and the
Leonid shower had already begun to show symptoms of the same process
at its appearance in 1866. Readers will remember the disappointment
caused by the failure of the Leonid shower to come up to time in 1899,
and it seems probable that the action of some perturbing cause has so
altered the orbit of this shower that it now passes almost clear
of the earth's path, so that we shall not have the opportunity of
witnessing another great display of the Leonid meteors.

So far as is known, no member of one of these great showers has
ever fallen to the earth. There are two possible exceptions to this
statement, as in 1095 a meteor fell to the ground during the progress
of a shower of Lyrids, and in 1885 another fell during a display of
the Andromedes. In neither case, however, was the radiant point noted,
and unless it was the same as that of the shower the fall of the
meteor was a mere coincidence. It seems probable that this is the
case, and the absence of any evidence that a specimen from a cometary
shower has reached the earth points to the extreme smallness of the
various members of the shower and also to the fine division of the
matter of the original comet.

In addition to the meteors originating from systematic showers, there
are also to be noted frequent and sometimes very brilliant single
meteors. Specimens of these have in many instances been obtained. They
fall into three classes--'Those in which iron is found in considerable
amount are termed siderites; those containing an admixture of iron and
stone, siderolites; and those consisting almost entirely of stone are
known as aerolites' (Denning). The mass of some of these bodies is
very considerable. Swords have been forged out of their iron, one of
which is in the possession of President Diaz of Mexico, while diamonds
have been found in meteoric irons which fell in Arizona. It may
be interesting to know that, according to a grave decision of the
American courts, a meteor is 'real estate,' and belongs to the person
on whose ground it has fallen; the alternative--that it is 'wild
game,' and the property of its captor--having been rejected by the
court. So far as I am aware, the legal status of these interesting
flying creatures has not yet been determined in Britain.

The department of meteoric astronomy is one in which useful work can
be done with the minimum of appliances. The chief requisites are a
good set of star-maps, a sound knowledge of the constellations, a
straight wand, and, above all, patience. The student must make himself
familiar with the constellations (a pleasant task, which should be
part of everyone's education), so that when a meteor crosses his
field of view he may be able to identify at once with an approach to
accuracy its points of appearance and disappearance. It is here that
the straight wand comes into play. Mr. Denning advises the use of it
as a means of guiding the eye. It is held so as to coincide with the
path of the meteor just seen, and will thus help the eye to estimate
the position and slope of the track relatively to the stars of the
constellations which it has crossed. This track should be marked as
quickly as possible on the charts. Mere descriptions of the appearance
of meteors, however beautiful, are quite valueless. It is very
interesting to be told that a meteor when first seen was 'of the size
and colour of an orange,' but later 'of the apparent size of the
full moon, and surrounded by a mass of glowing vapour which further
increased its size to that of the head of a flour-barrel'; but the
description is scarcely marked by sufficient precision of statement
for scientific purposes. The observer must note certain definite
points, of which the following is a summary: (1) Date, hour, and
minute of appearance. (2) Brightness, compared with some well-known
star, planet, or, if exceptionally bright, with the moon. (3) Right
ascension and declination of point of first appearance. (4) The
same of point of disappearance. (5) Length of track. (6) Duration of
visibility. (7) Colour, presence of streak or train, and any other
notable features. (8) Radiant point.

When these have been given with a reasonable approach to accuracy,
the observer has done his best to provide a real, though small,
contribution to the sum of human knowledge; nor is the determination
of these points so difficult as would at first appear from their
number. The fixing of the points of appearance and disappearance and
of the radiant will present a little difficulty to start with; but in
this, as in all other matters, practice will bring efficiency. It may
be mentioned that the efforts of those who take up this subject would
be greatly increased in usefulness by their establishing a connection
with the Meteor Section of the British Astronomical Association.

One curious anomaly has been established by Mr. Denning's patient
labour--the existence, namely, of what are termed 'stationary
radiants.' It is obvious that if meteors have the cometary connection
already indicated, their radiant point should never remain fixed; as
the showers move onwards in their orbit they should leave the original
radiant behind. Mr. Denning has conclusively proved, however, that
there are showers which do not follow the rule in this respect, but
proceed from a radiant which remains the same night after night, some
feeble showers maintaining the same radiant for several months. It is
not easy to see how this fact is to be reconciled with the theory of
cometary origin; but the fact itself is undeniable.




CHAPTER XIV

THE STARRY HEAVENS


We now leave the bounds of our own system, and pass outwards towards
the almost infinite spaces and multitudes of the fixed stars. In doing
so we are at once confronted with a wealth and profusion of beauty and
a vastness of scale which are almost overwhelming. Hitherto we have
been dealing almost exclusively with bodies which, though sometimes
considerably larger than our world, were yet, with the exception of
the sun, of the same class and comparable with it; and with distances
which, though very great indeed, were still not absolutely beyond the
power of apprehension. But now all former scales and standards have to
be left behind, for even the vast orbit of Neptune, 5,600,000,000
of miles in diameter, shrinks into a point when compared with the
smallest of the stellar distances. Even our unit of measurement has
to be changed, for miles, though counted in hundreds of millions, are
inadequate; and, accordingly, the unit in which our distance from the
stars is expressed is the 'light year,' or the distance travelled by a
ray of light in a year.

Light travels at the rate of about 186,000 miles a second, and
therefore leaps the great gulf between our earth and the sun in
about eight minutes. But even the nearest of the fixed stars--Alpha
Centauri, a star of the first magnitude in the Southern Hemisphere--is
so incredibly distant that light takes four years and four months to
travel to us from it; while the next nearest, a small star in Ursa
Major, is about seven light-years distant, and the star 61 of the
constellation Cygnus, the first northern star whose distance was
measured, is separated from us by two years more still.

At present the distances of about 100 stars are known approximately;
but it must be remembered that the approximation is a somewhat
rough one. The late Mr. Cowper Ranyard once remarked of measures of
star-distances that they would be considered rough by a cook who was
in the habit of measuring her salt by the cupful and her pepper by the
pinch. And the remark has some truth--not because of any carelessness
in the measurements, for they are the results of the most minute and
scrupulous work with the most refined instrumental means that modern
skill can devise and construct--but because the quantities to be
measured are almost infinitely small.

It is at present considered that the average distance from the earth
of stars of the first magnitude is thirty-three light years, that of
stars of the second fifty-two, and of the third eighty-two. In other
words, when we look at such stars on any particular evening, we are
seeing them, not as they are at the moment of observation, but as they
were thirty-three, fifty-two, or eighty-two years ago, when the rays
of light which render them visible to us started on their almost
inconceivable journey. The fact of the average distance of
first-magnitude stars being less than that of second, and that of
second in turn less than that of third, is not to be held as implying
that there are not comparatively small stars nearer to us than some
very bright ones. Several insignificant stars are considerably nearer
to us than some of the most brilliant objects in the heavens--_e.g._,
61 Cygni, which is of magnitude 4·8, is almost infinitely nearer to us
than the very brilliant first magnitude star Rigel in Orion. The rule
holds only on the average.

The number of the stars is not less amazing than their distance. It is
true that the number visible to the unaided eye is not by any means
so great as might be imagined on a casual survey. On a clear night the
eye receives the impression that the multitude of stars is so great
as to be utterly beyond counting; but this is not the case. The
naked-eye, or 'lucid,' stars have frequently been counted, and it
has been found that the number visible to a good average eye in
both hemispheres together is about 6,000. This would give for each
hemisphere 3,000, and making allowance for those lost to sight in
the denser air near the horizon, or invisible by reason of restricted
horizon, it is probable that the number of stars visible at any one
time to any single observer in either hemisphere does not exceed
2,500. In fact Pickering estimates the total number visible, down to
and including the sixth magnitude, to be only 2,509 for the Northern
Hemisphere, and on that basis it may safely be assumed that 2,000
would be the extreme limit for the average eye.

[Illustration:

  PLATE XXVII.

Region of the Milky Way in Sagittarius. Photographed by Professor E.
E. Barnard.]

But this somewhat disappointing result is more than atoned for when
the telescope is called in and the true richness of the heavenly host
begins to appear. Let us take for illustration a familiar group of
stars--the Pleiades. The number of stars visible to an ordinary eye
in this little group is six; keen-sighted people see eleven, or even
fourteen. A small telescope converts the Pleiades into a brilliant
array of luminous points to be counted not by units but by scores,
while the plates taken with a modern photographic telescope of 13
inches aperture show 2,326 stars. The Pleiades, of course, are a
somewhat notable group; but those who have seen any of the beautiful
photographs of the heavens, now so common, will know that in many
parts of the sky even this great increase in number is considerably
exceeded; and that for every star the eye sees in such regions a
moderate telescope will show 1,000, and a great instrument perhaps
10,000. It is extremely probable that the number of stars visible with
the largest telescopes at present in use would not be overstated at
100,000,000 (Plate XXVII.).

It is evident, on the most casual glance at the sky, that in the words
of Scripture, 'One star differeth from another star in glory.' There
are stars of every degree of brilliancy, from the sparkling white
lustre of Sirius or Vega, down to the dim glimmer of those stars
which are just on the edge of visibility, and are blotted out by the
faintest wisp of haze. Accordingly, the stars have been divided into
'magnitudes' in terms of scales which, though arbitrary, are yet found
to be of general convenience. Stars of the first six magnitudes come
under the title of 'lucid' stars; below the sixth we come to the
telescopic stars, none of which are visible to the naked eye, and
which range down to the very last degree of faintness. Of stars of the
first magnitude there are recognised about twenty, more or less.
By far the brightest star visible to us in the Northern Hemisphere,
though it is really below the Equator, is Sirius, whose brightness
exceeds by no fewer than fourteen and a half times that of Regulus,
the twentieth star on the list. The next brightest stars, Canopus and
Alpha Centauri, are also Southern stars, and are not visible to us
in middle latitudes. The three brightest of our truly Northern stars,
Vega, Capella, and Arcturus, come immediately after Alpha Centauri,
and opinions are much divided as to their relative brightness, their
diversity in colour and in situation rendering a comparison somewhat
difficult. The other conspicuous stars of the first magnitude visible
in our latitudes are, in order of brightness, Rigel, Procyon, Altair,
Betelgeux, Aldebaran, Pollux, Spica Virginis, Antares, Fomalhaut,
Arided (Alpha Cygni), and Regulus, the well-known double star Castor
following not far behind Regulus. The second magnitude embraces,
according to Argelander, 65 stars; the third, 190; fourth, 425; fifth,
1,100; sixth, 3,200; while for the ninth magnitude the number leaps
up to 142,000. It is thus seen that the number of stars increases with
enormous rapidity as the smaller magnitudes come into question, and,
according to Newcomb, there is no evidence of any falling off in
the ratio of increase up to the tenth magnitude. In the smaller
magnitudes, however, the ratio of increase does not maintain itself.
The number of the stars, though very great, is not infinite.

A further fact which quickly becomes apparent to the naked eye is that
the stars are not all of the same colour. Sirius, for example, is of a
brilliant white, with a steely glitter; Betelgeux, comparatively near
to it in the sky, is of a beautiful topaz tint, perhaps on the whole
the most exquisite single star in the sky, so far as regards colour;
Aldebaran is orange-yellow, while Vega is white with a bluish cast,
as is also Rigel. These diversities become much more apparent when
the telescope is employed. At the same time the observer may be warned
against expecting too much in the way of colour, for, as a matter of
fact, the colours of the stars, while perfectly manifest, are yet of
great delicacy, and it is difficult to describe them in ordinary terms
without some suspicion of exaggeration. Stars of a reddish tone, which
ranges from the merest shade of orange-yellow up to a fairly deep
orange, are not uncommon; several first-magnitude stars, as already
noted, have distinct orange tones. For anything approaching to real
blues and greens, we must go to the smaller stars, and the finest
examples of blue or green stars are found in the smaller members of
some of the double systems. Thus in the case of the double Beta Cygni
(Albireo), one of the most beautiful and easy telescopic objects in
the northern sky, the larger star is orange-yellow, and the smaller
blue; in that of Gamma Andromedæ the larger is yellow, and the smaller
bluish-green; while Gamma Leonis has a large yellow star, and a small
greenish-yellow one in connection. The student who desires to pursue
the subject of star colours should possess himself of the catalogue
published in the Memoirs of the British Astronomical Association,
which gives the colours of the lucid stars determined from the mean of
a very large number of observations made by different observers.

In this connection it may be noticed that there is some suspicion that
the colours of certain stars have changed within historic times, or
at least that they have not the same colour now which they are said
to have had in former days. The evidence is not in any instance strong
enough to warrant the assertion that actual change has taken place;
but it is perfectly natural to suppose that it does, and indeed must
gradually progress. As the stars are intensely hot bodies, there must
have been periods when their heat was gradually rising to its maximum,
and there must be periods when they will gradually cool off to
extinction, and these stages must be represented by changes in the
colour of the particular star in question. In all probability, then,
the colour of a star gives some indication of the stage to which it
has advanced in its life-history; and as a matter of fact, this proves
to be so, the colour of a star being found to be generally a fair
indication of what its constitution, as revealed by the spectroscope,
will be.

Another feature of the stars which cannot fail to be noticed is the
fact that they are not evenly distributed over the heavens, but are
grouped into a variety of configurations or constellations. In the
very dawn of human history these configurations woke the imaginations
of the earliest star-gazers, and fanciful shapes and titles were
attached to the star-groups, which have been handed down to the
present time, and are still in use. It must be confessed that in
some cases it takes a very lively imagination to find any resemblance
between the constellation and the figure which has been associated
with it. The anatomy of Pegasus, for example, would scarcely commend
itself to a horse-breeder, while the student will look in vain for any
resemblance to a human figure, heroic or unheroic, in the straggling
group of stars which bears the name of Hercules. At the same time a
few of the constellations do more or less resemble the objects from
which their titles are derived. Thus the figure of a man may without
any great difficulty be traced among the brilliant stars which form
the beautiful constellation Orion; while Delphinus presents at least
an approximation to a fish-like form, and Corona Borealis gives the
half of a diadem of sparkling jewels.

A knowledge of the constellations, and, if possible, of the curious
old myths and legends attaching to them, should form part of the
equipment of every educated person; yet very few people can tell one
group from another, much less say what constellations are visible at
a given hour at any particular season of the year. People who are
content merely to gape at the heavens in 'a wonderful clear night
of stars' little know how much interest they are losing. When the
constellations and the chief stars are learned and kept in memory, the
face of the sky becomes instinct with interest, and each successive
season brings with it the return of some familiar group which is
hailed as one hails an old friend. Nor is the task of becoming
familiar with the constellations one of any difficulty. Indeed, there
are few pleasanter tasks than to trace out the figures of the old
heroes and heroines of mythology by the help of a simple star-map,
and once learned, they need never be forgotten. In this branch of the
subject there are many easily accessible helps. For a simple guide,
Peck's 'Constellations and how to Find Them' is both cheap and useful,
while Newcomb's 'Astronomy for Everybody' and Maunder's 'Astronomy
without a Telescope' also give careful and simple directions.
Maunder's volume is particularly useful for a beginner, combining,
as it does, most careful instructions as to the tracing of the
constellations with a set of clear and simple star-charts, and a most
interesting discussion of the origin of these ancient star-groups.
A list of the northern constellations with a few of the most notable
objects of interest in each will be found in Appendix II.

Winding among the constellations, and forming a gigantic belt round
the whole star-sphere, lies that most wonderful feature of the heavens
familiar to all under the name of the Milky Way. This great luminous
girdle of the sky may be seen in some portion of its extent, and at
some hour of the night, at all seasons of the year, though in May it
is somewhat inconveniently placed for observation. Roughly speaking,
it presents the appearance of a broad arch or pathway of misty light,
'whose groundwork is of stars'; but the slightest attention will
reveal the fact that in reality its structure is of great complexity.
It throws out streamers on either side and at all angles, condenses at
various points into cloudy masses of much greater brilliancy than the
average, strangely pierced sometimes by dark gaps through which we
seem to look into infinite and almost tenantless space (Plate XXVII.),
while in other quarters it spreads away in considerable width, and
to such a degree of faintness that the eye can scarcely tell where it
ends. At a point in the constellation Cygnus, well seen during autumn
and the early months of winter, it splits up into two great branches
which run separate to the Southern horizon with a well-marked dark gap
dividing them.

When examined with any telescopic power, the Milky Way reveals itself
as a wonderful collection of stars and star-clusters; and it will also
be found that there is a very remarkable tendency among the stars to
gather in the neighbourhood of this great starry belt. So much is this
case that, in the words of Professor Newcomb, 'Were the cloud-forms
which make up the Milky Way invisible to us, we should still be able
to mark out its course by the crowding of the lucid stars towards it.'
Not less remarkable is the fact that the distribution of the nebulæ
with regard to the Galaxy is precisely the opposite of that of the
stars. There are, of course, many nebulæ in the Galaxy; but, at the
same time, they are comparatively less numerous along its course, and
grow more and more numerous in proportion as we depart from it. It
seems impossible to avoid the conclusion that these twin facts are
intimately related to one another, though the explanation of them is
not yet forthcoming.

In the year 1665 the famous astronomer Hooke wrote concerning the
small star Gamma Arietis: 'I took notice that it consisted of two
small stars very near together; a like instance of which I have not
else met with in all the heavens.' This is the first English record
of the observation of a double star, though Riccioli detected the
duplicity of Zeta Ursæ Majoris (Mizar), in 1650, and Huygens saw three
stars in Theta Orionis in 1656. These were the earliest beginnings
of double-star observation, which has since grown to such proportions
that double stars are now numbered in the heavens by thousands. Of
course, certain stars appear to be double even when viewed with the
unaided eye. Thus Mizar, a bright star in the handle of the Plough,
referred to above, has not far from it a fainter companion known as
Alcor, which the Arabs used to consider a test of vision. Either it
has brightened in modern times, or else the Arabs have received too
much credit for keenness of sight, for Mizar and Alcor now make a
pair that is quite easy to very ordinary sight even in our turbid
atmosphere. Alpha Capricorni, and Zeta Ceti, with Iota Orionis are
also instances of naked-eye doubles, while exceptionally keen sight
will detect that the star Epsilon Lyræ, which forms a little triangle
with the brilliant Vega and Zeta Lyræ, is double, or at least that it
is not single, but slightly elongated in form. Astronomers, however,
would not call such objects as these 'double stars' at all; they
reserve that title for stars which are very much closer together than
the components of a naked-eye double can ever be. The last-mentioned
star, Epsilon Lyræ, affords a very good example of the distinction. To
the naked eye it is, generally speaking, not to be distinguished
from a single star. Keen sight elongates it; exceptionally keen sight
divides it into two stars extremely close to one another. But on using
even a very moderate telescope, say a 2-1/2-inch with a power of
100 or upwards, the two stars which the keenest sight could barely
separate are seen widely apart in the field, while each of them has
in its turn split up into two little dots of light. Thus, to the
telescope, Epsilon Lyræ is really a quadruple star, while in addition
there is a faint star forming a triangle with the two pairs, and a
large instrument will reveal two very faint stars, the 'debilissima,'
one on either side of the line joining the larger stars. These I have
seen with 3-7/8-inch.

What the telescope does with Epsilon Lyræ, it does with a great
multitude of other stars. There are thousands of doubles of all
degrees of easiness and difficulty--doubles wide apart, and doubles so
close that only the finest telescopes in the world can separate
them; doubles of every degree of likeness or of disparity in their
components, from Alpha Geminorum (Castor), with its two beautiful
stars of almost equal lustre, to Sirius, where the chief star is the
brightest in all the heavens, and the companion so small, or rather so
faint, that it takes a very fine glass to pick it out in the glare
of its great primary. The student will find in these double stars an
extremely good series of tests for the quality of his telescope.
They are, further, generally objects of great beauty, being often
characterized, as already mentioned, by diversity of colour in the
two components. Thus, in addition to the examples given above,
Eta Cassiopeiæ presents the beautiful picture of a yellow star in
conjunction with a red one, while Epsilon Boötis has been described as
'most beautiful yellow and superb blue,' and Alpha Herculis consists
of an orange star close to one which is emerald green. It has been
suggested that the colours in such instances are merely complementary,
the impression of orange or yellow in the one star producing a purely
subjective impression of blue or green when the other is viewed; but
it has been conclusively proved that the colours of very many of the
smaller stars in such cases are actual and inherent.

Not only are there thousands of double stars in the heavens, but there
are also many multiple stars, where the telescope splits an apparently
single star up into three, four, or sometimes six or seven separate
stars. Of these multiples, one of the best known is Theta Orionis. It
is the middle star of the sword which hangs from the belt of Orion,
and is, of course, notable from its connection with the Great Nebula;
but it is also a very beautiful multiple star. A 2-1/2-inch telescope
will show that it consists of four stars in the form of a trapezium;
large instruments show two excessively faint stars in addition. Again,
in the same constellation lies Sigma Orionis, immediately below the
lowermost star of the giant's belt. In a 3-inch telescope this
star splits up into a beautiful multiple of six components, their
differences in size and tint making the little group a charming
object.

Looking at the multitude of double and multiple stars, the question
can scarcely fail to suggest itself: Is there any real connection
between the stars which thus appear so close to one another? It can
be readily understood that the mere fact of their appearing close
together in the field of the telescope does not necessarily imply
real closeness. Two gas-lamps, for instance, may appear quite close
together to an observer who is at some distance from them, when in
reality they may be widely separated one from the other--the apparent
closeness being due to the fact that they are almost in the same
line of sight. No doubt many of the stars which appear double in the
telescope are of this class--'optical doubles,' as they are called,
and are in reality separated by vast distances from one another.
But the great majority have not only an apparent, but also a real
closeness; and in a number of cases this is proved by the fact that
observation shows the stars in question to be physically connected,
and to revolve around a common centre of gravity. Double stars which
are thus physically connected are known as 'binaries.' The discovery
of the existence of this real connection between some double stars is
due, like so many of the most interesting astronomical discoveries,
to Sir William Herschel. At present the number of stars known to be
binary is somewhat under one thousand; but in the case of most
of these, the revolution round a common centre which proves their
physical connection is extremely slow, and consequently the majority
of binary stars have as yet been followed only through a small portion
of their orbits, and the change of position sufficient to enable
a satisfactory orbit to be computed has occurred in only a small
proportion of the total number. The first binary star to have its
orbit computed was Xi Ursæ Majoris, whose revolution of about sixty
years has been twice completed since, in 1780, Sir William Herschel
discovered it to be double.

The star which has the shortest period at present known is the fourth
magnitude Delta Equulei, which has a fifth magnitude companion. The
pair complete their revolution, according to Hussey, in 5·7 years.
Kappa Pegasi comes next in speed of revolution, with a period of
eleven and a half years, while the star 85 of the same constellation
takes rather more than twice as long to complete its orbit. From such
swiftly circling pairs as these, the periods range up to hundreds of
years. Thus, for example, the well-known double star Castor, probably
the most beautiful double in the northern heavens, and certainly the
best object of its class for a small telescope, is held to have a
period of 347 years, which, though long enough, is a considerable
reduction upon the 1,000 once attributed to it.

But the number of binary stars known is not confined to those which
have been discovered and measured by means of the telescope and
micrometer. One of the most wonderful results of modern astronomical
research has been the discovery of the fact that many stars have
revolving round them invisible companions, which are either dark
bodies, or else are so close to their primaries as for ever to defy
the separating powers of our telescopes. The discovery of these
dark, or at least invisible, companions is one of the most remarkable
triumphs of the spectroscope. It was in 1888 that Vogel first applied
the spectroscopic method to the well-known variable star, Beta
Persei--known as Algol, 'the Demon,' from its 'slowly-winking eye.'
The variation in the light of Algol is very large, from second to
fourth magnitude; Vogel therefore reasoned that if this variation were
caused by a dark companion partially eclipsing the bright star, the
companion must be sufficiently large to cause motion in Algol--that
is, to cause both stars to revolve round a common centre of gravity.
Should this be the case, then at one point of its orbit Algol must be
approaching, and at the opposite point receding from the earth; and
therefore the shift of the lines of its spectrum towards the violet
in the one instance and towards the red in the other would settle
the question of whether it had or had not an invisible companion.
The spectroscopic evidence proved quite conclusive. It was found that
before its eclipses, Algol was receding from the sun at the rate
of 26-1/3 miles per second, while after eclipse there was a similar
motion of approach; and therefore the hypothesis of an invisible
companion was proved to be fact. Vogel carried his researches further,
his inquiry into the questions of the size and distance apart of
the two bodies leading him to the conclusion that the bright star is
rather more, and its companion rather less than 1,000,000 miles in
diameter; while the distance which divides them is somewhat more than
3,000,000 miles. Though larger, both bodies prove to be less massive
than our sun, Algol being estimated at four-ninths and its companion
at two-ninths of the solar mass.

The class of double star disclosed in this manner is known as the
'spectroscopic binary,' and has various other types differing from
the Algol type. Thus the type of which Xi Ursæ Majoris was the first
detected instance has two component bodies not differing greatly in
brightness from one another. In such a case the fact of the star being
binary is revealed through the consideration that in any binary system
the two components must necessarily always be moving in opposite
directions. Hence the shift of the lines of their spectrum will be
in opposite directions also, and when one of the stars (A) is moving
towards us, and the other (B) away from us, all the lines of the
spectrum which are common to the two will appear double, those of A
being displaced towards the violet and those of B towards the red.
After a quarter of a revolution, when the stars are momentarily in
a straight line with us, the lines will all appear single; but after
half a revolution they will again be displaced, those of A this time
towards the red and those of B towards the violet.

There has thus been opened up an entirely new field of research, and
the idea, long cherished, that the stars might prove to have dark, or,
at all events, invisible, companions attendant on them, somewhat as
our own sun has its planets, has been proved to be perfectly sound.
So far, in the case of dark companions, only bodies of such vast size
have been detected as to render any comparison with the planets of
our system difficult; but the principle is established, and the
probability of great numbers of the stars having real planetary
systems attendant on them is so great as to become practically a
certainty. 'We naturally infer,' says Professor Newcomb, 'that ...
innumerable stars may have satellites, planets, or companion stars so
close or so faint as to elude our powers of observation.'

From the consideration of spectroscopic binaries we naturally turn
to that of variable stars, the two classes being, to some extent at
least, coincident, as is evidenced by the case of Algol. While the
discovery of spectroscopic binaries is one of the latest results of
research, that of variability among stars dates from comparatively
far back in the history of astronomy. As early as the year 1596 David
Fabricius noted the star now known as Omicron Ceti, or Mira, 'the
Wonderful,' as being of the third magnitude, while in the following
year he found that it had vanished. A succession of appearances and
disappearances was witnessed in the middle of the next century by
Holwarda, and from that time the star has been kept under careful
observation, and its variations have been determined with some
exactness, though there are anomalies as yet unexplained. 'Once in
eleven months,' writes Miss Clerke, 'the star mounts up in about 125
days from below the ninth to near the third, or even to the second
magnitude; then, after a pause of two or three weeks, drops again
to its former low level in once and a half times, on an average, the
duration of its rise.' This most extraordinary fluctuation means that
at a bright maximum Mira emits 1,500 times as much light as at a low
minimum. The star thus subject to such remarkable outbursts is, like
most variables, of a reddish colour, and at maximum its spectrum shows
the presence of glowing hydrogen. Its average period is about 331
days; but this period is subject to various irregularities, and
the maximum has sometimes been as much as two months away from the
predicted time. Mira Ceti may be taken as the type of the numerous
class of stars known as 'long-period variables.'

Not less interesting are those stars whose variations cover only short
periods, extending from less than thirty days down to a few hours. Of
these, perhaps the most easily observed, as it is also one of the most
remarkable, is Beta Lyræ. This star is one of the two bright stars of
nearly equal magnitude which form an obtuse-angled triangle with the
brilliant first-magnitude star Vega. The other star of the pair
is Gamma Lyræ, and between them lies the famous Ring Nebula, to be
referred to later. Ordinarily Beta Lyræ is of magnitude 3·4, but from
this it passes, in a period of rather less than thirteen days, through
two minima, in one of which it descends to magnitude 3·9 and in
the other to 4·5. This fluctuation seems trifling. It really means,
however, that at maximum the star is two and three-quarter times
brighter than when it sinks to magnitude 4·5; and the variation can be
easily recognised by the naked eye, owing to the fact of the nearness
of so convenient a comparison star as Gamma Lyræ. Beta Lyræ is a
member of the class of spectroscopic binaries, and belongs to that
type of the class in which the mutually eclipsing bodies are both
bright. In such cases the variation in brilliancy is caused by the
fact that when the two bodies are, so to speak, side by side, light
is received from both of them, and a maximum is observed; while, when
they are end on, both in line with ourselves, one cuts off more or
less of the other's light from us, thus causing a minimum.

A third class, distinct from either of the preceding, is that of the
Algol Variables, so-called from the bright star Beta Persei, which has
already been mentioned as a spectroscopic binary. Than this star
there is no more notable variable in the heavens, and its situation
fortunately renders it peculiarly easy of observation to northern
students. Algol shines for about fifty-nine hours as a star of small
second magnitude, then suddenly begins to lose light, and in four and
a half hours has fallen to magnitude three and a half, losing in so
short a space two-thirds of its normal brilliancy. It remains in
this degraded condition for only fifteen minutes, and then begins to
recover, reaching its normal lustre in about five hours more. These
remarkable changes, due, as before mentioned, to the presence of
an invisible eclipsing companion, are gone through with the utmost
regularity, so much so that, as Gore says, the minima of Algol 'can
be predicted with as much certainty as an eclipse of the sun.' The
features of the type-star are more or less closely reproduced in the
other Algol Variables--a comparatively long period of steady light
emission, followed by a rapid fall to one or more minima, and a rapid
recovery of light. The class as yet is a small one, but new members
are gradually being added to it, the majority of them white, like the
type-star.

The study of variable stars is one which should seem to be specially
reserved for the amateur observer. In general, it requires but little
instrumental equipment. Many variables can be seen at maximum, some
even at minimum, with the unaided eye; in other cases a good opera or
field glass is all that is required, and a 2-1/2 or 3-inch telescope
will enable the observer to command quite an extensive field of work.
Here, again, the beginner may be referred to the _Memoirs_ of the
British Astronomical Association for help and guidance, and may be
advised to connect himself with the Variable Star Section.

With the exception of such variations in the lustre of certain stars
as have been described, the aspect of the heavens is, in general,
fixed and unchanging. There are, as we shall see, real changes of the
vastest importance continually going on; but the distances separating
us from the fixed stars are so enormous that these changes shrink into
nothingness, and the astronomers of forty centuries before our era
would find comparatively little change today in the aspect of the
constellations with which they were familiar. But occasionally a
very remarkable change does take place, in the apparition of a new or
temporary star. The accounts of the appearance of such objects are not
very numerous, but are of great interest. We pass over those recorded,
in more or less casual fashion, by the ancients, for the reason
that the descriptions given are in general more picturesque than
illuminative. It does not add much to one's knowledge, though it may
excite wonder, to find the Chinese annals recording the appearance, in
A.D. 173, of a new star 'resembling a large bamboo mat!'

The first Nova, of which we have a really scientific record, was the
star which suddenly blazed out, in November, 1572, in the familiar
W of Cassiopeia. It was carefully observed by the great astronomer,
Tycho Brahé, and, according to him, was brighter than Sirius, Alpha
Lyræ, or Jupiter. Tycho followed it till March, 1574, by which time
it had sunk to the limit of unaided vision, and further observation
became impossible. There is at present a star of the eleventh
magnitude close to the place fixed for the Nova from Tycho's
observations. In 1604 and 1670, new stars were observed, the first by
Kepler and his assistants, the second by the monk Anthelme; but from
1670 there was a long break in the list of discoveries, which was
ended by Hind's observation of a new star in Ophiuchus (April, 1848).
This was never a very conspicuous object, rising only to somewhat less
than fourth magnitude, and soon fading to tenth or eleventh. We
can only mention the 'Blaze Star' of Corona Borealis, discovered by
Birmingham in 1866, the Nova discovered in 1876 by Schmidt of Athens,
near Rho Cygni--an object which seems to have faded out into a
planetary nebula, a fate apparently characteristic of this class of
star--and the star which appeared in 1885, close to the nucleus of the
Great Nebula in Andromeda.

In 1892, Dr. Anderson of Edinburgh discovered in the constellation
Auriga a star which he estimated as of fifth magnitude. The discovery
was made on January 31, and the new star was found to have been
photographed at Harvard on plates taken from December 16, 1891, to
January 31, 1892. Apparently this Nova differed from other temporary
stars in the fact that it attained its full brightness only gradually.
By February 3 it rose to magnitude 3·5, then faded by April 1 to
fifteenth, but in August brightened up again to about ninth
magnitude. It is now visible as a small star. The great development
of spectroscopic resources brought this object, otherwise not a very
conspicuous one, under the closest scrutiny. Its spectrum showed many
bright lines, which were accompanied by dark ones on the side next the
blue. The idea was thus suggested that the outburst of brilliancy was
due to a collision between two bodies, one of which, that causing the
dark lines, was approaching the earth, while the other was receding
from it. Lockyer considered the conflagration to be due to a collision
between two swarms of meteorites, Huggins that it was caused by the
near approach to one another of two gaseous bodies, while others
suggested that the rush of a star or of a swarm of meteorites through
a nebula would explain the facts observed. Subsequent observations of
the spectrum of Nova Aurigæ have revealed the fact that it has obeyed
the destiny which seems to wait on temporary stars, having become a
planetary nebula.

Dr. Anderson followed up his first achievement by the discovery of a
brilliant Nova in the constellation Perseus. The discovery was made
on the night of February 21-22, 1901, the star being then of magnitude
2·7. Within two days it became about the third brightest star in the
sky, being a little more brilliant than Capella; but before the middle
of April it had sunk to fifth magnitude. The rapidity of its rise must
have been phenomenal! A plate exposed at Harvard on February 19, and
showing stars to the eleventh magnitude, bore no trace of the Nova.
'It must therefore,' says Newcomb, 'have risen from some magnitude
below the eleventh to the first within about three days. This
difference corresponds to an increase of the light ten thousandfold!'
Such a statement leaves the mind simply appalled before the spectacle
of a cataclysm so infinitely transcending the very wildest dreams of
fancy. Subsequent observations have shown the usual tendency towards
development into a nebula, and in August, 1901, photographs were
actually obtained of a nebulosity round the star, showing remarkable
condensations. These photographs, taken at Yerkes Observatory, when
compared with others taken at Mount Hamilton in November, revealed the
startling fact that the condensations of the nebula were apparently
in extraordinarily rapid motion. Now the Nova shows no appreciable
parallax, or in other words is so distant that its distance cannot be
measured; on what scale, therefore, must these motions have been to be
recorded plainly across a gulf measurable perhaps in hundreds of light
years!

Nova Geminorum, discovered by Professor Turner, at Oxford, in March,
1903, had not the striking features which lent so much interest to
Nova Persei. It showed a crimson colour, and its spectrum indicated
the presence in its blaze of hydrogen and helium; but it faded so
rapidly as to show that the disturbance affected a comparatively small
body, and it has exhibited the familiar new star change into a nebula.

One point with regard to the Novæ in Auriga and Perseus deserves
notice. These discoveries, so remarkable in themselves, and so
fruitful in the extension of our knowledge, were made by an amateur
observer with no greater equipment than a small pocket telescope and a
Klein's Star-Atlas. The thorough knowledge of the face of the heavens
which enabled Dr. Anderson to pick out the faint glimmer of Nova
Aurigæ and to be certain that the star was a new one is not in the
least unattainable by anyone who cares to give time and patience to
its acquisition; and even should the study never be rewarded by a
capture so dramatic as that of Nova Persei, the familiarity gained
in its course with the beauty and wonder of the star-sphere will in
itself be an ample reward.




CHAPTER XV

CLUSTERS AND NEBULÆ


Even the most casual observer of the heavens cannot have failed to
notice that in certain instances the stars are grouped so closely
together as to form well-marked clusters. The most familiar example
is the well-known group of the Pleiades, in the constellation Taurus,
while quite close is the more scattered group of the Hyades. Another
somewhat coarsely scattered group is that known as Coma Berenices, the
Hair of Berenice, which lies beneath the handle of the Plough; and a
fainter group is the cluster Præsepe, which lies in the inconspicuous
constellation Cancer, between Gemini and Leo, appearing to the naked
eye like a fairly bright, hazy patch, which the smallest telescope
resolves into a cloud of faint stars.

[Illustration:

  PLATE XXVIII.

  1.

  2.

Irregular Star Clusters. Photographed by E. E. Barnard.

  1. Messier 35 in Gemini.      2. Double Cluster in Perseus.
]

The Pleiades form undoubtedly the most remarkable naked-eye group in
the heavens. The six stars which are visible to average eyesight are
Alcyone, 3rd magnitude; Maia, Electra, and Atlas, of the 4th; Merope,
4-1/3; and Taygeta, 4-1/2. While Celæno, 5-1/3; Pleione, 5-1/2; and
Asterope, 6, hang on the verge of visibility. With an opera-glass
about thirty more may be counted, while photographs show between
2,000 and 3,000. It is probable that the fainter stars have no real
connection with the cluster itself, which is merely seen upon a
background of more distant star-dust. Modern photographs have shown
that this cluster is involved in a great nebula, which stretches in
curious wisps and straight lines from star to star, and surrounds
the whole group. The Pleiades make a brilliant object for a small
telescope with a low magnifying power, but are too scattered for an
instrument of any size to be effective upon them. The finest of all
irregular star-clusters is that known as the Sword-handle of Perseus.
Midway between Perseus and the W of Cassiopeia, and directly in the
line of the Galaxy, the eye discerns a small, hazy patch of light,
of which even a 2 or 3 inch glass will make a beautiful object, while
with a large aperture its splendour is extraordinary. It consists
of two groups of stars which are both in the same field with a small
instrument and low powers. Towards the edge of the field the stars
are comparatively sparsely scattered; but towards the two centres of
condensation the thickness of grouping steadily increases. Altogether
there is no more impressive stellar object than this magnificent
double cluster (Plate XXVIII., 2). Another very fine example of
the irregular type of grouping is seen in M. 35, situated in the
constellation Gemini, and forming an obtuse-angled triangle with the
stars Mu and Eta Geminorum (Plate XXVIII., 1). There are many other
similar groups fairly well within the reach of comparatively small
instruments, and some of these are mentioned in the list of objects
(Appendix II.).

Still more remarkable than the irregular clusters are those which
condense into a more or less globular form. There are not very
many objects of this class in the northern sky visible with a small
telescope, but the beauty of those which are visible is very notable.
The most splendid of all is the famous cluster M. 13 Herculis. (The
M. in these cases refers to the catalogue of such objects drawn up by
Messier, the French 'comet ferret,' to guide him in his labours.) M.
13 is situated almost on the line between Zeta and Eta Herculis,
and at about two-thirds of the distance from Zeta towards Eta. It is
faintly visible to the unaided eye when its place is known, and,
when viewed with sufficient telescopic power, is a very fine object.
Nichol's remark that 'perhaps no one ever saw it for the first time
through a large telescope without uttering a shout of wonder' seems
to be based on a somewhat extravagant estimate of the enthusiasm and
demonstrativeness of the average star-gazer; but the cluster is a very
noble object all the same, consisting, according to a count made on a
negative taken in 1899, of no fewer than 5,482 stars, which condense
towards the centre into a mass of great brilliancy. It takes a large
aperture to resolve the centre of the cluster into stars, but even a
3-inch will show a number of twinkling points of light in the outlying
streamers (Plate XXIX.). In the same constellation will also be found
the cluster M. 92, similar to, but somewhat fainter than M. 13; and
other globular clusters are noted in the Appendix. Most of these
objects, however, can only be seen after a fashion with small
instruments. Of the true nature and condition of these wonderful
aggregations we are so far profoundly ignorant. The question of
whether they are composed of small stars, situated at no very great
distance from the earth, or of large bodies, which are rendered faint
to our vision by immense distance, has been frequently discussed. Gore
concludes that they are 'composed of stars of average size and mass,
and that the faintness of the component stars is simply due to their
immense distance from the earth.' If so, the true proportions of some
of these clusters must be indeed phenomenal! A very remarkable feature
to be noticed in connection with some of them is the high proportion
of variable stars which they contain. Professor Bailey has found that
in such clusters as M. 3 and M. 5 the proportion of variables is one
in seven and one in eleven respectively, while several other groups
show proportions ranging from one in eighteen up to one in sixty.
As the general proportion of variables is somewhere about one in a
hundred, these ratios are remarkable. They only characterize a certain
number of clusters, however, and are absent in cases which seem
strictly parallel to others where they exist.

[Illustration:

  PLATE XXIX.

Cluster M. 13 Herculis. Photographed by Mr. W. E. Wilson.]

We now pass from the star-clusters to the nebulæ properly so called.
Till after the middle of last century it was an open question whether
there was any real distinction between the two classes of bodies.
Herschel had suggested the existence of a 'shining fluid,' distributed
through space, whose condensations gave rise to those objects known
as nebulæ; but it was freely maintained by many that the objects which
could not be resolved into stars were irresolvable only because of
their vast distance, and that the increase of telescopic power would
result in the disclosure of their stellar nature. This view seemed to
be confirmed when it was confidently announced that the great Rosse
telescope had effected the resolution of the Orion Nebula, which was
looked upon as being in some sort a test case. But the supposed proof
of the stellar character of nebulæ did not hold its ground for long,
for in 1864 Sir William Huggins, on applying the spectroscope to the
planetary nebula in Draco, found that its spectrum consisted merely
of bright lines, one of which--the most conspicuous--was close to the
position of a nitrogen line, but has proved to be distinct from it;
while of the other two, one was unmistakably the F line of hydrogen
and the other remains still unidentified. Thus it became immediately
manifest that the nebula in Draco did not consist of distant stars,
but was of gaseous constitution; and Sir William Herschel's idea of
the existence of non-stellar matter in the universe was abundantly
justified. Subsequent research has proved that multitudes of nebulæ
yield a bright-line spectrum, and are therefore gaseous. Of these, by
far the most remarkable and interesting is the Great Nebula of Orion.
The observer will readily distinguish even with the unaided eye that
the middle star of the three that form the sword which hangs down from
Orion's belt has a somewhat hazy appearance. A small telescope reveals
the fact that the haziness is due to the presence of a great misty
cloud of light, in shape something like a fish-mouth, and of a
greenish colour. At the junction of the jaws lies the multiple star
Theta Orionis, which with a 2- or 3-inch glass appears to consist of
four stars--'the trapezium'--large instruments showing in addition two
very faint stars.

With greater telescopic power additional features begin to reveal
themselves; the mist immediately above the trapezium assumes a roughly
triangular shape, and is evidently much denser than the rest of
the nebula, presenting a curdled appearance similar to that of the
stretches of small cloud in a 'mackerel' sky; while from the upper
jaw of the fish-mouth a great shadowy horn rises and stretches upward,
until it gradually loses itself in the darkness of the background.
This wonderful nebula appears to have been discovered in 1618, but was
first really described and sketched by Huygens in 1656, since when it
has been kept under the closest scrutiny, innumerable drawings of
it having been made and compared from time to time with the view of
detecting any traces of change. The finest drawings extant are those
of Sir John Herschel and Mr. Lassell, and the elaborate one made with
the help of the Rosse 6-foot mirror.

Drawing, however, at no time a satisfactory method of representing the
shadowy and elusive forms of nebulæ, has now been entirely superseded
by the work of the sensitive plate. Common, Roberts, Pickering, and
others have succeeded admirably in photographing the Great Nebula with
exposures ranging from half an hour up to six hours. The extension
of nebulous matter revealed by these photographs is enormous (Plate
XXX.), so much so that many of the central features of the nebula
with which the eye is familiar are quite masked and overpowered in
the photographic print. The spectrum of the Orion Nebula exhibits
indications of the presence of hydrogen and helium, as well as the
characteristic green ray which marks the unknown substance named
'nebulium.'

The appearance of this 'tumultuous cloud, instinct with fire and
nitre,' is always amazing. Sir Robert Ball considers it one of the
three most remarkable objects visible in the northern heavens,
the other two being Saturn and the Great Cluster in Hercules. But,
beautiful and wonderful as both of these may be, the Orion Nebula
conveys to the mind a sense of mystery which the others, in spite of
their extraordinary features, never suggest. Absolutely staggering
is the thought of the stupendous dimensions of the nebula. Professor
Pickering considers its parallax to be so small as to indicate a
distance of not less than 1,000 years light journey from our earth! It
is almost impossible to realize the meaning of such a statement. When
we look at this shining mist, we are seeing it, not as it is now, but
as it was more than a hundred years before the Norman Conquest; were
it blotted out of existence now, it would still shine to us and our
descendants for another ten centuries in virtue of the rays of light
which are already speeding across the vast gulf that separates our
world from its curdled clouds of fire-mist, and the astronomers of
A.D. 2906 might still be speculating on the nature and destiny of a
thing which for ages had been non-existent! That an object should be
visible at all at such a distance demands dimensions which are really
incomprehensible; but the Orion Nebula is not only visible, it is
conspicuous!

[Illustration:

  PLATE XXX.

Photograph of the Orion Nebula (W. H. Pickering).]

The rival of this famous nebula in point of visibility is the
well-known spiral in the girdle of Andromeda. On a clear night it can
easily be seen with the naked eye near the star Nu Andromedæ, and may
readily be, as it has often been, mistaken for a comet. Its discovery
must, therefore, have been practically coincident with the beginnings
of human observation of the heavens; but special mention of it does
not occur before the tenth century of our era. A small telescope will
show it fairly well, but it must be admitted that the first view is
apt to produce a feeling of disappointment. The observer need not look
for anything like the whirling streams of light which are revealed on
modern long exposure photographs (Plate XXXI., 1). He will see what
Simon Marius so aptly described under the simile of 'the light
seen from a great distance through half-transparent horn plates'--a
lens-shaped misty light, brightening very rapidly towards a nucleus
which seems always on the point of coming to definition but is
never defined, and again fading away without traceable boundary into
obscurity on every side. The first step towards an explanation of the
structure of this curious object was made by Bond in the middle of
last century. With the 15-inch refractor of the Cambridge (U.S.A.)
Observatory, he detected two dark rifts running lengthwise through the
bright matter of the nebula; but it was not till 1887 and 1888 that
its true form was revealed by Roberts's photographs. It was then seen
to be a gigantic spiral or whirlpool, the rifts noticed by Bond being
the lines of separation between the huge whorls of the spiral. Of
course, small instruments are powerless to reveal anything of this
wonderful structure; still there is an interest in being able to see,
however imperfectly, an object which seems to present to our eyes the
embodiment of that process by which some assume that our own system
may have been shaped. So far as the powers of the best telescopes go,
the Andromeda Nebula presents no appearance of stellar constitution.
Its spectrum, according to Scheiner, is continuous, which would imply
that in spite of appearances it is in reality composed of stars; but
Sir William Huggins has seen also bright lines in it. Possibly it may
represent a stage intermediate between the stellar and the gaseous.

[Illustration:

  PLATE XXXI.

  1. [North.]

  2. [North.]

Photographs of Spiral Nebulæ. By Dr. Max Wolf.

  1. Great Nebula in Andromeda.      2. Spiral in Triangulum (M. 33).
]

Another remarkable example of a spiral nebula will be found in M. 51.
It is situated in the constellation Canes Venatici, and may be easily
picked up, being not far from the end star of the Plough-handle Eta
Ursæ Majoris. This strange object, 'gyre on gyre' of fire-mist, was
one of the first spirals to have its true character demonstrated by
the Rosse telescope. It is visible with moderate optical powers, but
displays to them none of that marvellous structure which the great
6-foot mirror revealed for the first time, and which has been amply
confirmed by subsequent photographic evidence (Plate XXXII.).

[Illustration:

  PLATE XXXII.

Photograph of Whirlpool Nebula (M. 51). Taken by Mr. W. E. Wilson,
March 6, 1897.]

Among other classes of nebulæ we can only mention the ring and the
planetary. Of each of these, one good example can be seen, though,
it must be admitted, not much more than seen, with very modest
instrumental equipment. Midway between the two stars Beta and Gamma
Lyræ, already referred to in connection with the variability of the
former, the observer by a little fishing will find the famous Ring
Nebula of Lyra. With low powers it appears simply as a hazy oval spot;
but it bears magnifying moderately well, and its annular shape comes
out fairly with a power of eighty on a 2-1/2 inch, though it can
scarcely be called a brilliant object with that aperture, or indeed
with anything much under 8 inches. None the less, it is of great
interest, the curious symmetry of this gaseous ring making it an
almost unique object. It resembles nothing so much as those vortex
rings which an expert smoker will sometimes send quivering through the
air. Photographs show clearly a star within the ring, and this
star has a very curious history, having been frequently visible in
comparatively small telescopes, and again, within a year or two,
invisible in much larger ones. Photography seems to have succeeded
in persuading it to forgo these caprices, though it presents
peculiarities of light which are still unexplained. The actinic plate
reveals also very clearly that deficiency of light at the ends of the
longer diameter of the ring which can be detected, though with more
difficulty, by the eye. The class of annular nebulæ is not a large
one, and none of its other members come within the effective range of
small instruments.


Planetary nebulæ are so called because with ordinary powers they
present somewhat of the appearance of a planet seen very dimly and
considerably out of focus. The appearance of uniformity in their
boundaries vanishes under higher telescopic power, and they appear to
be generally decidedly elliptical; they yield a gaseous spectrum with
strong evidence of the presence of 'nebulium,' the unknown substance
which gives evidence of its presence in the spectrum of every true
nebula, and has, so far (with one doubtful exception) been found
nowhere else. The chief example of the class is that body in Draco
which first yielded to Huggins the secret of the gaseous nature of the
nebulæ. It lies nearly half-way between Polaris and Gamma Draconis,
and is described by Webb as a 'very luminous disc, much like a
considerable star out of focus.' It is by no means a striking object,
but has its own interest as the first witness to the true nature of
that great class of heavenly bodies to which it belongs.

The multitude of nebulous bodies scattered over the heavens may be
judged from the fact that Professor Keeler, after partial surveys
carried out by means of photography with the Crossley reflector, came
to the conclusion that the number within the reach of that instrument
(36-inch aperture) might be put down at not less than 120,000. It is
a curious fact that the grouping of this great multitude seems to
be fundamentally different from that of the stars. Where stars are
densely scattered, nebulæ are comparatively scarce; where nebulæ
abound, the stars are less thickly sown. So much is this the case,
that, when Herschel in his historic 'sweeps' of the heavens came
across a notably starless region, he used to call out to his assistant
to 'prepare for nebulæ.' The idea of a physical connection between the
two classes of bodies is thus underlined in a manner which, as Herbert
Spencer saw so early as 1854, is quite unmistakable.

There remain one or two questions of which the very shortest notice
must suffice--not because they are unimportant, but because their
importance is such that any attempt at adequate discussion of them is
impossible in our limited space. One of these inevitably rises to the
mind in presence of the myriads of the heavenly host--the familiar
question which was so pleasingly suggested to our growing minds by the
nursery rhyme of our childhood. To the question, What is a star? it
has now become possible to give an answer which is satisfactory so
far as it goes, though it is in a very rudimentary stage as regards
details.

The spectroscope has taught us that the stars consist of incandescent
solid bodies, or of masses of incandescent gas so large and dense
as not to be transparent; and further, that they are surrounded by
atmospheres consisting of gases cooler than themselves. The nature of
the substances incandescent in the individual bodies has also to some
extent been learned. The result has been to show that, while there is
considerable variety in the chemical constitution and condition of the
stars, at least five different types being recognised, each capable
of more minute subdivision, the stars are, in the main, composed
of elements similar to those existing in the sun; and, in Professor
Newcomb's words, 'as the sun contains most of the elements found on
the earth and few or no others, we may say that earth and stars seem
to be all made out of like matter.' It is, of course, impossible to
say what unknown elements may exist in the stars; but at least it
is certain that many substances quite familiar to us, such as iron,
magnesium, calcium, hydrogen, oxygen, and carbon, are present in
their constitution. Indeed, our own sun, in spite of its overwhelming
importance to ourselves is to be regarded, relatively to the stellar
multitudes, as merely one star among many; nor, so far as can be
judged, can it be considered by any means a star of the first class.
There can be no doubt that, if removed to the average distance of
first magnitude stars--thirty-three years light journey--our sun would
be merely a common-place member of the heavenly host, far outshone by
many of its fellow-suns. In all probability it would shine as about a
fifth magnitude star, with suspicions of variability in its light.

There remains to be noted the fact that the sun is not to be regarded
as a fixed centre, its fixity being only relative to the members
of its own system. With all its planets and comets it is sweeping
continually through space with a velocity of more than 1,000,000 miles
in the twenty-four hours. This remarkable fact was first suspected
by Sir William Herschel, who also, with that insight which was
characteristic of his wonderful genius, saw, and was able roughly
to apply, the method which would either confirm or disprove the
suspicion.

The principle which lies at the bottom of the determination is in
itself simple enough, though its application is complicated in such a
manner as to render the investigation a very difficult one. A wayfarer
passing up the centre of a street lighted on both sides by lamps will
see that the lamps in front of him appear to open out and separate
from one another as he advances, while those that he is leaving behind
him have an opposite motion, appearing to close in upon one another.
Now, with regard to the solar motion, if the case were absolutely
simple, the same effect would be produced upon the stars among which
we are moving; that is to say, were the stars absolutely fixed, and
our system alone in motion among them, there would appear to be a
general thinning out or retreating of the stars from the point towards
which the sun is moving, and a corresponding crowding together of them
towards the point, directly opposite in the heavens, from which it is
receding. In actual fact the case is not by any means so simple, for
the stars are not fixed; they have motions of their own, some of
them enormously greater than the motion of the sun. Thus the apparent
motion caused by the advance of our system is masked to a great
extent by the real motion of the stars. It is plain, however, that the
perspective effect of the sun's motion must really be contained in the
total motion of each star, or, in other words, that each star, along
with its own real motion, must have an apparent motion which is common
to all, and results from our movement through space. If this common
element can be disentangled from the individual element, the proper
motion of each star, then the materials for the solution of the
problem will be secured. It has been found possible to effect this
disentanglement, and the results of all those who have attempted the
problem are, all things considered, in remarkably close agreement.

Herschel's application of his principle led him to the conclusion
that there was a tendency among the stars to widen out from the
constellation Hercules, and to crowd together towards the opposite
constellation of Argo Navis in the southern hemisphere, and the point
which he fixed upon as the apex of the sun's path was near the star
Lambda Herculis. Subsequent discussions of the problem have confirmed,
to a great extent, his rough estimate, which was derived from a
comparatively small number of stars. So far as general direction was
concerned, he was entirely right; the conclusion which he reached as
to the exact point towards which the motion is directed has, however,
been slightly modified by the discussion of a much larger number of
stars, and it is now considered that the apex of the solar journey 'is
in the general direction of the constellation Lyra, and perhaps near
the star Vega, the brightest of that constellation' (Newcomb, 'The
Stars,' p. 91). There are but few stars more beautiful and interesting
than Vega; to its own intrinsic interest must now be added that
arising from the fact that each successive night we look upon it we
have swept more than 1,000,000 miles nearer to its brilliant globe,
and that with every year we have lessened, by some 400,000,000 miles,
the distance that divides us from it. There can surely be no thought
more amazing than this! It seems to gather up and bring to a focus
all the other impressions of the vastness of celestial distances and
periods. So swift and ceaseless a motion, and yet the gulfs that sever
us from our neighbours in space are so huge that a millennium of such
inconceivable travelling makes no perceptible change upon the face of
the heavens! There rise other thoughts to the mind. Towards what goal
may our world and its companions be voyaging under the sway of the
mighty ruler of the system, and at the irresistible summons of those
far-off orbs which distance reduces to the mere twinkling points of
light that in man's earliest childlike thought were but lamps hung
out by the Creator to brighten the midnight sky for his favourite
children? What strange chances may be awaiting sun and planet alike in
those depths of space towards which we are rushing with such frightful
speed? Such questions remain unanswered and unanswerable. We are as
ignorant of the end of our journey, and of the haps that may attend
it, as we are helpless in the grasp of the forces that compel and
control it.




APPENDIX I


The following is a list of the Lunar Formations numbered as on the
Key-map, Plate XIX.:

    1. Newton.        | 38. Heinsius.       |  75. Playfair.
    2. Short.         | 39. Hainzel.        |  76. Azophi.
    3. Simpelius.     | 40. Bouvard.        |  77. Sacrobosco.
    4. Manzinus.      | 41. Piazzi.         |  78. Fracastorius.
    5. Moretus.       | 42. Ramsden.        |  79. Santbech.
    6. Gruemberger.   | 43. Capuanus.       |  80. Petavius.
    7. Casatus.       | 44. Cichus.         |  81. Wilhelm Humboldt.
    8. Klaproth.      | 45. Wurzelbauer.    |  82. Polybius.
    9. Wilson.        | 46. Gauricus.       |  83. Geber.
   10. Kircher.       | 47. Hell.           |  84. Arzachel.
   11. Bettinus.      | 48. Walter.         |  85. Thebit.
   12. Blancanus.     | 49. Nonius.         |  86. Bullialdus.
   13. Clavius.       | 50. Riccius.        |  87. Hippalus.
   14. Scheiner.      | 51. Rheita.         |  88. Cavendish.
   15. Zuchius.       | 52. Furnerius.      |  89. Mersenius.
   16. Segner.        | 53. Stevinus.       |  90. Gassendi.
   17. Bacon.         | 54. Hase.           |  91. Lubiniezky.
   18. Nearchus.      | 55. Snellius.       |  92. Alpetragius.
   19. Vlacq.         | 56. Borda.          |  93. Airy.
   20. Hommel.        | 57. Neander.        |  94. Almanon.
   21. Licetus.       | 58. Piccolomini.    |  95. Catherina.
   22. Maginus.       | 59. Pontanus.       |  96. Cyrillus.
   23. Longomontanus. | 60. Poisson.        |  97. Theophilus.
   24. Schiller.      | 61. Aliacensis.     |  98. Colombo.
   25. Phocylides.    | 62. Werner.         |  99. Vendelinus.
   26. Wargentin.     | 63. Pitatus.        | 100. Langrenus.
   27. Inghirami.     | 64. Hesiodus.       | 101. Goclenius.
   28. Schickard.     | 65. Mercator.       | 102. Guttemberg.
   29. Wilhelm I.     | 66. Vitello.        | 103. Isidorus.
   30. Tycho.         | 67. Fourier.        | 104. Capella.
   31. Saussure.      | 68. Lagrange.       | 105. Kant.
   32. Stöfler.       | 69. Vieta.          | 106. Descartes.
   33. Maurolycus.    | 70. Doppelmayer.    | 107. Abulfeda.
   34. Barocius.      | 71. Campanus.       | 108. Parrot.
   35. Fabricius.     | 72. Kies.           | 109. Albategnius.
   36. Metius.        | 73. Purbach.        | 110. Alphonsus.
   37. Fernelius.     | 74. La Caille.      |
----------------------+---------------------+-------------------
  111. Ptolemæus.     | 151. Agrippa.       | 191. Archimedes.
  112. Herschel.      | 152. Arago.         | 192. Timocharis.
  113. Davy.          | 153. Taruntius.     | 193. Lambert.
  114. Gueriké.       | 154. Apollonius.    | 194. Diophantus.
  115. Parry.         | 155. Schubert.      | 195. Delisle.
  116. Bonpland.      | 156. Firmicus.      | 196. Briggs.
  117. Lalande.       | 157. Silberschlag.  | 197. Lichtenberg.
  118. Réaumur.       | 158. Hyginus.       | 198. Theætetus.
  119. Hipparchus.    | 159. Ukert.         | 199. Calippus.
  120. Letronne.      | 160. Boscovich.     | 200. Cassini.
  121. Billy.         | 161. Ross.          | 201. Gauss.
  122. Fontana.       | 162. Proclus.       | 202. Messala.
  123. Hansteen.      | 163. Picard.        | 203. Struve.
  124. Damoiseau.     | 164. Condorcet.     | 204. Mason.
  125. Grimaldi.      | 165. Plinius.       | 205. Plana.
  126. Flamsteed.     | 166. Menelaus.      | 206. Burg.
  127. Landsberg.     | 167. Manilius.      | 207. Baily.
  128. Mösting.       | 168. Eratosthenes.  | 208. Eudoxus.
  129. Delambre.      | 169. Gay Lussac.    | 209. Aristoteles.
  130. Taylor.        | 170. Tobias Mayer.  | 210. Plato.
  131. Messier.       | 171. Marius.        | 211. Pico.
  132. Maskelyne.     | 172. Olbers.        | 212. Helicon.
  133. Sabine.        | 173. Vasco de Gama. | 213. Maupertuis.
  134. Ritter.        | 174. Seleucus.      | 214. Condamine.
  135. Godin.         | 175. Herodotus.     | 215. Bianchini.
  136. Sömmering.     | 176. Aristarchus.   | 216. Sharp.
  137. Schröter.      | 177. La Hire.       | 217. Mairan.
  138. Gambart.       | 178. Pytheas.       | 218. Gérard.
  139. Reinhold.      | 179. Bessel.        | 219. Repsold.
  140. Encke.         | 180. Vitruvius.     | 220. Pythagoras.
  141. Hevelius.      | 181. Maraldi.       | 221. Fontenelle.
  142. Riccioli.      | 182. Macrobius.     | 222. Timæus.
  143. Lohrmann.      | 183. Cleomedes.     | 223. Epigenes.
  144. Cavalerius.    | 184. Römer.         | 224. Gärtner.
  145. Reiner.        | 185. Littrow.       | 225. Thales.
  146. Kepler.        | 186. Posidonius.    | 226. Strabo.
  147. Copernicus.    | 187. Geminus.       | 227. Endymion.
  148. Stadius.       | 188. Linné.         | 228. Atlas.
  149. Pallas.        | 189. Autolycus.     | 229. Hercules.
  150. Triesnecker.   | 190. Aristillus.    |


    In the accompanying brief notes on a few important formations,
    the diameter of each is given in miles, and the height of
    the highest peak on wall in feet. The day of each lunation on
    which it may be well seen is also added.


    NO.

    22. MAGINUS.--Great walled plain; 100 miles; 14,000 feet.
    Central mountain 2,000 feet. Difficult in full, owing to rays
    from Tycho. Plate XIV. Eighth and ninth days.

    23. LONGOMONTANUS.--Walled plain; 90 miles; 13,314 feet.
    Crossed by rays from Tycho. Plate XV. Ninth day.

    26. WARGENTIN; 28. SCHICKARD.--Close together. 26. Curious
    ring plain; 54 miles. Seemingly filled with lava. 'Resembles
    a large thin cheese.' 28. Great walled plain; 134 miles; 9,000
    feet. Floor 13,000 square miles area, very varied in colour.
    Walls would be invisible to spectator in centre of enclosure.
    Plate XII. Thirteenth and fourteenth days.

    30. TYCHO.--Splendid ring plain; 54 miles; 17,000 feet.
    Central mountain 5,000 feet. Great system of streaks from
    neighbourhood. Plates XII., XIII., XV. Ninth and tenth days.

    32. STÖFLER.--Walled plain. Peak on N.E. wall 12,000 feet.
    Floor very level. Beautiful steel-grey colour. Plate XVI.
    Seventh day.

    33. MAUROLYCUS.--Walled plain; 150 miles; 14,000 feet. In area
    equal to about half of Ireland. Floor in full covered with
    bright streaks. Plate XVI. Seventh day.

    58. PICCOLOMINI.--Ring plain; 57 miles; 15,000 feet on E. Fine
    central mountain. Very rugged neighbourhood. Plate XI. Fifth
    and sixth days.

    63. PITATUS.--58 miles. Wall massive on S., but breached on N.
    side, facing Mare Nubium. Two clefts in interior shown Plate
    XV. Ninth day.

    78. FRACASTORIUS.--Another partially destroyed formation; 60
    miles. Wall breached on N., facing Mare Nectaris. Under low
    sun traces of wall can be seen. Plate XI. Fifth and sixth
    days.

    80. PETAVIUS.--Fine object; 100 miles; 11,000 feet. Fine
    central peak 6,000 feet. Great cleft from central mountain to
    S.E. wall can be seen with 2-inch. Third and fourth days, but
    best seen on waning moon a day or two after full.

    90. GASSENDI.--Walled plain; 55 miles. Wall on N. broken by
    intrusive ring-plain of Gassendi A. Fine central mountain
    4,000 feet. Between thirty and forty clefts in floor, more or
    less difficult. Plates XII., XIII. Eleventh and twelfth days.

    95. CATHERINA; 96. CYRILLUS; 97. THEOPHILUS.--Fine group
    of three great walled plains. 95. Very irregular; 70 miles;
    16,000 feet. Connected by rough valley with 96. 96 has outline
    approaching a square; walls much terraced, overlapped by 97,
    and partially ruined on N.E. side. 97 is one of the finest
    objects on moon; 64 miles; terraced wall, 18,000 feet. Fine
    central mountain 6,000 feet. Plates XI., XVI. Sixth day.

    84. ARZACHEL; 110. ALPHONSUS; 111. PTOLEMÆUS.--Another fine
    group. 84 is southernmost; 66 miles; 13,000 feet. Fine central
    mountain. 110. Walled plain; 83 miles; abutting on 111. Wall
    rises to 7,000 feet. Bright central peak. Three peculiar dark
    patches on floor, best seen towards full. 111 is largest of
    three; 115 miles. Many large saucer-shaped hollows on floor
    under low sun. Area 9,000 square miles. Plate XIII. Eighth and
    ninth days.

    125. GRIMALDI.--Darkest walled plain on moon; 148 miles
    by 129; area 14,000 square miles; 9,000 feet. Plate XII.
    Thirteenth and fourteenth days.

    131. MESSIER AND MESSIER A.--Two bright craters; 9 miles.
    Change suspected in relative sizes. From Messier A two
    straight light rays like comet's tail extend across Mare
    F[oe]cunditatis. Fourth and fifth days.

    147. COPERNICUS.--Grand object; 56 miles; 10,000 to 12,000
    feet. Central mountain 2,400 feet. Centre of system of bright
    rays. On W. a remarkable crater row; good test for definition.
    Plates XII., XIII. Ninth and tenth days.

    150. TRIESNECKER.--Small ring plain; 14 miles. Terraced wall
    5,000 feet. Remarkable cleft-system on W. Rather delicate for
    small telescopes. Plate XIII. Seventh and eighth days.

    158. HYGINUS.--Crater-pit 3·7 miles. Remarkable cleft runs
    through it; visible with 2-inch: connected with Ariadæus rill
    to W., which also an object for a 2-inch. Dark spot to N.W.
    on Mare Vaporum named Hyginus N. Has been suspected to be new
    formation. Plate XII. Seventh day.

    168. ERATOSTHENES.--Fine ring plain at end of Apennines; 38
    miles. Terraced wall 16,000 feet above interior, which is
    8,000 feet below Mare Imbrium. Fine central mountain. Plate
    XIII. Remarkable contrast to 148 Stadius, which has wall only
    200 feet, with numbers of craters on floor. Ninth and tenth
    days.

    175. HERODOTUS; 176. ARISTARCHUS.--Interesting pair. 175 is 23
    miles; 4,000 feet. Floor very dusky. Great serpentine valley;
    most interesting object. Easy with 2-inch. 176 is most
    brilliant crater on moon; 28 miles; 6,000 feet. Central peak
    very bright. Readily seen on dark part of moon by earth-shine.
    Plates XII., XIII. Twelfth day.

    188. LINNÉ.--Small crater on M. Serenitatis near N.W. end of
    Apennines. Suspected of change, but varies much in appearance
    under different lights. Visible on Plate XVII. as whitish oval
    patch to left of end of Apennines. Seventh day.

    191. ARCHIMEDES.--Fifty miles; 7,000 feet. Floor very flat;
    crossed by alternate bright and dark zones. Makes with 189 and
    190 fine group well shown Plate XVII. Eighth day.

    208. EUDOXUS; 209. ARISTOTELES.--Beautiful pair of ring
    plains. 208 is 40 miles. Walls much terraced; 10,000 to 11,000
    feet; 209 is 60 miles; 11,000 feet. Plate XVII. Sixth and
    seventh days.

    210. PLATO.--Great walled plain; 60 miles; 7,400 feet. Dark
    grey floor, which exhibits curious changes of colour under
    different lights, also spots and streaks too difficult for
    small telescope. Landslip on E. side. Shadows very fine at
    sunrise. Plates XII., XIII. Ninth day.

    211. PICO.--Isolated mountain; 7,000 to 8,000 feet. S. of 210.
    Casts fine shadow when near terminator. Ninth and tenth days.

    228. ATLAS; 229. HERCULES.--Beautiful pair. 228 is 55 miles;
    11,000 feet. Small but distinct central mountain. 229 is
    46 miles. Wall reaches same height as 228, and is finely
    terraced. Landslip on N. wall. Conspicuous crater on floor.
    Plate XI. Fifth day.




APPENDIX II


The following list includes a number of double and multiple stars,
clusters, and nebulæ, which may be fairly well seen with instruments
up to 3 inches in aperture. A few objects have been added on account
of their intrinsic interest, which may prove pretty severe tests. The
places given are for 1900, and the position-angles and distances
are mainly derived from Mr. Lewis's revision of Struve's 'Mensuræ
Micrometricæ,' Royal Astronomical Society's Memoirs, vol. lvi., 1906.
For finding the various objects, Proctor's larger Star Atlas, though
constructed for 1880, is still, perhaps, the most generally useful.
Cottam's 'Charts of the Constellations' (Epoch 1890) are capital, but
somewhat expensive. A smaller set of charts will be found in Ball's
'Popular Guide to the Heavens,' while Peck has also published various
useful charts. The student who wishes fuller information than that
contained in the brief notes given below should turn to Gore's
exceedingly handy volume, 'The Stellar Heavens.'

The brighter stars are generally known by the letters of the Greek
alphabet, prefixed to them by Bayer. When these are used up, recourse
is had either to the numbers in Flamsteed's Catalogue, or to those in
Struve's 'Mensuræ Micrometricæ.' The Struve numbers are preceded by
the Greek [Sigma]. A few of the more notable variable and red stars
are included; these are generally marked by capital letters, as V.
AQUILÆ. The order of the notes is as follows. First is given the
star's designation, then its place in hours and minutes of right
ascension and degrees and minutes of declination, N. and S. being
marked respectively by + and -; then follow the magnitudes; the
position-angles, which are measured in degrees from the north, or
bottom point of the field, round by east, south, and west to north
again; the distances of the components from one another in seconds of
arc; and, finally, short notes as to colour, etc. According to Dawes,
one inch aperture should separate the components of a 4·56″ double
star, two inches those of a 2·28″, three those of a 1·52″, and so
on. If the observer's glass can do this on good nights there is little
fault to find with it. Double stars may be difficult for other reasons
than the closeness of the components; thus, a faint companion to a
bright star is more difficult to detect than a companion which is not
far below its primary in brightness. Clusters and nebulæ, with a
few exceptions, are apt to prove more or less disappointing in small
instruments. The letters of the Greek alphabet are as follows:

  [alpha] Alpha.
  [beta] Beta.
  [gamma] Gamma.
  [delta] Delta.
  [epsilon] Epsilon.
  [zeta] Zeta.
  [eta] Eta.
  [theta] Theta.
  [iota] Iota.
  [kappa] Kappa.
  [lambda] Lambda.
  [mu] Mu.
  [nu] Nu.
  [xi] Xi.
  [omicron] Omicron.
  [pi] Pi.
  [rho] Rho.
  [sigma] Sigma.
  [tau] Tau.
  [upsilon] Upsilon.
  [phi] Phi.
  [chi] Chi.
  [psi] Psi.
  [omega] Omega.

    ANDROMEDA.

    M. 31: 0 h. 37 m. + 40° 43′. Great Spiral Nebula. Visible to
    naked eye near [nu] Andromedæ. Rather disappointing in small
    glass.

    [Sigma] 205 or [gamma] : 1 h. 58 m. + 41° 51′ : 3-5 : 62′5° :
    10·2″. Yellow, bluish-green. 5 is also double, a binary, but
    a very difficult object at present.

    AQUARIUS.

    M. 2 : 21 h. 28 m. - 1° 16′. Globular cluster; forms flat
    triangle with [alpha] and [beta].

    [Sigma] 2909 or [zeta] : 22 h. 24 m. -0° 32′ : 4-4·1 : 319·1°
    : 3·29″. Yellow, pale yellow. Binary.

    AQUILA.

    M. 11 : 18 h. 46 m. - 6° 23′. Fine fan-shaped cluster. Just
    visible to naked eye.

    V : 18 h. 59 m. - 5° 50′. Red star, variable from 6·5 to 8·0.

    ARGO NAVIS.

    M. 46 : 7 h. 37 m. - 14° 35′. Cluster of small stars, about
    1/2° in diameter.

    ARIES.

    [Sigma] 180 or [gamma] : 1 h. 48 m. + 18° 49′ : 4·2-4·4 :
    359·4° : 8·02″. Both white. Easy and pretty.

    [lambda] 1 h. 52 m. + 23° 7′ : 4·7-6·7 : 47° : 36·5″. Yellow,
    pointed to by [gamma] and [beta].

    AURIGA.

    (Capella) [alpha] : 5 h. 9 m. + 45° 54′. Spectroscopic binary;
    period 104 days.

    M. 37 : 5 h. 46 m. + 32° 31′. Fine cluster. M. 36 and M. 38
    also fine. All easily found close to straight line drawn from
    [kappa] to [phi] Aurigæ.

    [beta] : 5 h. 52 m. + 44° 57′. Spectroscopic binary, period
    3·98 days.

    41: 6 h. 4 m. + 48° 44′ : 5·2-6·4 : 353·7 : 7·90″.
    Yellowish-white, bluish-white.

    BOÖTES.

    [Sigma] 1864 or [pi] : 14 h. 36 m. + 16° 51′ : 4·9-6 : 103·3°
    : 5·83″. Both white.

    [Sigma] 1877 or [epsilon] : 14 h. 40 m. + 27° 30′ : 3-6·3 :
    326·4° : 2·86″. Yellow, blue. Fine object and good test.

    [Sigma] 1888 or [xi] : 14 h. 47 m. + 19° 31′ : 4·5-6·5 :
    180·4° : 2·70″. Yellow, purple, binary.

    [Sigma] 1909 or 44 : 15 h. 0 m. + 48° 2′ : 5·2-6·1 : 242° :
    4·32″.

    CAMELOPARDUS.

    V. : 3 h. 33 m. + 62° 19′. Variable, 7·3 to 8·8. Fiery red.

    CANCER.

    [Sigma] 1196 or [zeta] : 8 h. 6 m. + 17° 57′ : 5-5·7-6·5 :
    349·1°, 109·6° : 1·14″, 5·51″. Triple ; 5 and 5·7 binary,
    period 60 years; 6·5 revolves round centre of gravity of all
    in opposite direction.

    [Sigma] 1268 or [iota] : 8 h. 41 m. + 29° 7′ : 4·4-6·5 : 307°
    : 30·59″. Yellow, blue.

    Præsepe: Cluster, too widely scattered for anything but lowest
    powers.

    CANES VENATICI.

    [Sigma] 1622 or 2 : 12 h. 11 m. + 41° 13′ : 5-7·8 : 258° :
    11·4″. Gold, blue.

    [Sigma] 1645 : 12 h. 23 m. + 45° 21′ : 7-7·5 : 160·5° :
    10·42″. White. Pretty, though faint.

    [Sigma] 1692, 12, or [alpha] : 12 h. 51 m. + 38° 52′ : 3·1-5·7
    : 227° : 19·69″. Cor Caroli. White, violet.

    M. 51 : 13 h. 26 m. + 47° 43′. Great spiral. 3° S.W. of [eta]
    Ursæ Majoris.

    M. 3 : 13 h. 38 m. + 28° 53′. Fine globular cluster; on line
    between Cor Caroli and Arcturus, rather nearer the latter.

    CANIS MAJOR.

    M. 41 : 6 h. 43 m. - 20° 38′. Fine cluster, visible to naked
    eye, 4° below Sirius.

    CANIS MINOR.

    (Procyon) [alpha] : 7 h. 34 m. + 5° 30′ : 0·5-14 : 5° 4·46″.
    Binary, companion discovered, Lick, 1896, only visible in
    great instruments.

    CAPRICORNUS.

    [alpha] : 20 h. 12 m. - 12° 50′ : 3·2-4·2. Naked eye double,
    both yellow.

    M. 30 : 21 h. 35 m. - 23° 38′. Fairly bright cluster.

    CASSIOPEIA.

    [Sigma] 60 or [eta] : 0 h. 43 m. + 57° 18′ : 4-7 : 227·8° :
    5·64″. Binary; period about 200 years.

    [Sigma] 262 or [iota] : 2 h. 21 m. + 66° 58′ : 4·2-7·1-7·5 :
    250°, 112·6° : 1·93″, 7·48″. Triple.

    H. vi. 30 : 23 h. 52 m. + 56° 9′. Large cloud of small stars.

    [Sigma] 3049 or [sigma] : 23 h. 54 m. + 55° 12′ : 5-7·5 :
    325·9° : 3·05″. Pretty double, white, blue.

    CEPHEUS.

    [kappa] : 20 h. 12 m. + 77° 25′ : 4-8 : 123° : 7·37″.
    Yellowish-green.

    [Sigma] 2806 or [beta] : 21 h. 27 m. + 70° 7′ : 3-8 : 250·6° :
    13·44″. White, blue.

    S : 21 h. 36 m. + 78° 10′. Variable, 7·4 to 12·3. Very deep
    red.

    [Sigma] 2863 or [xi] : 22 h. 1 m. + 64° 8′ : 4·7-6·5 : 283·3°:
    6·87″. Yellow, blue.

    [delta] : 22 h. 25 m. + 57° 54′ : variable-5·3 : 192° : 40″.
    Yellow, blue. Primary varies from 3·7 to 4·9. Period, 5·3
    days. Spectroscopic binary.

    [Sigma] 3001 or [omicron] : 23 h. 14 m. + 67° 34′ : 5·2-7·8 :
    197·3° : 2·97″. Yellow, yellowish-green.

    CETUS.

    (Mira) [omicron] : 2 h. 14 m. - 3° 26′. Variable. Period
    about 331 days. Maxima, 1·7 to 5; minima, 8 to 9. Colour, deep
    yellow to deep orange.

    [Sigma] 281 or [nu] : 2 h. 31 m. + 5° 10′ : 5-9·4 : 83·1°:
    7·74″. Yellow, ashy.

    [Sigma] 299 or [gamma] : 2 h. 38 m. + 2° 49′ : 3-6·8 : 291° :
    3·11″. Yellow, blue, slow binary.

    COMA BERENICES.

    [Sigma] 1657 or 24 : 12 h. 30 m. + 18° 56′ : 5·5-7 : 271·1° :
    20·23″. Orange, blue.

    M. 53 : 13 h. 8 m. + 18° 42′. Cluster of faint stars.

    CORONA BOREALIS.

    [Sigma] 1965 or [zeta] : 15 h. 36 m. + 36° 58′ : 4·1-5 :
    304·3° : 6·15″. White greenish.

    R : 15 h. 44 m. + 28° 28′. Irregularly variable, 5·5 to 10·1.

    [Sigma] 2032 or [sigma] : 16 h. 11 m. + 34° 6′ : 5-6·1 :
    216·3° : 4·80″. Yellow, bluish. Binary, period about 400
    years.

    CORVUS.

    [delta] : 12 h. 25 m. - 15° 57′ : 3-8·5 : 214° : 24·3″.
    Yellow, lilac.

    CRATER.

    R. : 10 h. 56 m. - 17° 47′. Variable. About 8 magnitude.
    Almost blood-colour.

    CYGNUS.

    [Sigma] 2486 : 19 h. 9 m. + 49° 39′ : 6-6·5 : 218·2° : 9·63″.
    'Singular and beautiful field' (Webb).

    (Albireo) [beta] : 19 h. 27 m. + 27° 45′ : 3-5·3 : 55° :
    34·2″. Orange-yellow, blue. Easy and beautiful.

    [Sigma] 2580 or [chi] : 19 h. 43 m. + 33° 30′ : 4·5-8·1 :
    71·6° : 25·50″. 4·5 is variable to 13·5. Period 406 days.

    Z : 19 h. 58 m. + 49° 45′. Variable, 7·1 to 12. Deep red.

    RS : 20 h. 10 m. + 38° 27′. Variable, 6 to 10. Deep red.

    U : 20 h. 16 m. + 47° 35′. Variable, 7 to 11·6. Very red.

    V : 20 h. 38 m. + 47° 47′. Variable, 6·8 to 13·5. Very red.

    [Sigma] 2758 or 61 : 21 h. 2 m. + 38° 13′ : 5·3-5·9 : 126·8° :
    22·52″. First star whose distance was measured.

    RV : 21 h. 39 m. + 37° 33′. Variable, 7·1 to 9·3. Splendid
    red.

    [Sigma] 2822 or [mu] : 21 h. 40 m. + 28° 18′ : 4-5 : 122·2° :
    2·29″. Fine double; probably binary.

    DELPHINUS.

    [Sigma] 2727 or [gamma] : 20 h. 42 m. + 15° 46′ : 4-5 : 269·8°
    : 10·99″. Yellow, bluish-green.

    V : 20 h. 43 m. + 18° 58′. Variable, 7·3 to 17·3. Period 540
    days. Widest range of magnitude known.

    DRACO.

    [Sigma] 2078 or 17 : 16 h. 34 m. + 53° 8′ : 5-6 : 109·5° :
    3·48″. White.

    [Sigma] 2130 or [mu] : 17 h. 3 m. + 54° 37′ : 5-5·2 : 144·2° :
    2·17″. White.

    H. iv. 37 : 17 h. 59 m. + 66° 38′. Planetary nebula, nearly
    half-way between Polaris and [gamma] Draconis. Gaseous; first
    nebula discovered to be so.

    [Sigma] 2323 or 39: 18 h. 22 m. + 58° 45′ : 4·7-7·7-7·1 :
    358·2°, 20·8° : 3·68″, 88·8″. Triple.

    [epsilon] : 19 h. 48 m. + 70° 1′ : 4-7·6 : 7·5° : 2·84″.
    Yellow, blue.

    EQUULEUS.

    [Sigma] 2737 or [epsilon] : 20 h. 54 m. + 3° 55′ : 5·7-6·2-7·1
    : 285·9°, 73·8° : 0·53″, 10·43″. Triple with large
    instruments.

    ERIDANUS.

    [Sigma] 518 or 40 or 0^2 : 4 h. 11 m. - 7° 47′ : 4-9-10·8 :
    106·3°, 73·6° : 82·4″, 2·39″. Triple, close pair binary.

    GEMINI.

    M. 35 : 6 h. 3 m. + 24° 21′. Magnificent cluster; forms obtuse
    triangle with [mu] and [eta].

    [Sigma] 982 or 38 : 6 h. 49 m. + 13° 19′ : 5·4-7·7 : 159·7° :
    6·63″. Yellow, blue. Probably binary.

    [zeta] : 6 h. 58 m. + 20° 43′. Variable, 3·8 to 4·3. Period
    10·2 days. Non-eclipsing binary.

    [Sigma] 1066 or [delta] : 7 h. 14 m. + 22° 10′ : 3·2-8·2 :
    207·3° : 6·72″. Pale yellow, reddish.

    (Castor) [alpha] : 7 h. 28 m + 32° 7′ : 2-2·8 : 224·3° :
    5·68″. White, yellowish-green. Finest double in Northern
    Hemisphere.

    HERCULES.

    M. 13 : 16 h. 38 m. + 36° 37′. Great globular cluster,
    two-thirds of way from [zeta] to [eta].

    [Sigma] 2140 or [alpha] : 17 h. 10 m. + 14° 30′ : 3-6·1 :
    113·6° : 4·78″. Orange-yellow, bluish-green. Fine object.

    [Sigma] 2161 or [rho] : 17 h. 20 m. + 37° 14′ : 4-5·1 : 314·4°
    : 3·80″. 'Gem of a beautiful coronet' (Webb).

    M. 92 : 17 h. 14 m. + 43° 15′. Globular cluster; fainter than
    M. 13.

    [Sigma] 2264 or 95 : 17 h. 57 m. + 21° 36′ : 4·9-4·9 : 259·7°
    : 6·44″. 'Apple-green, cherry-red' (Smyth), but now both pale
    yellow.

    [Sigma] 2280 or 100 : 18 h. 4 m. + 26° 5′ : 5·9-5·9 : 181·7° :
    13·87″. Greenish-white.

    HYDRA.

    [Sigma] 1273 or [epsilon] : 8 h. 41 m. + 6° 48′ : 3·8-7·7 :
    231·6° : 3·33″. The brighter star is itself a close double.

    V : 10 h. 47 m. - 20° 43′. Variable, 6·7 to 9·5. Copper-red.

    W : 13 h. 44 m. - 27° 52′. Variable, 6·7 to 8·0. Deep red.

    LACERTA.

    LEO.

    [Sigma] 1424 or [gamma] : 10 h. 14 m. + 20° 21′ : 2-3·5 :
    116·5° : 3·70″. Fine double, yellow, greenish-yellow.

    [Sigma] 1487 or 54 : 10 h. 50 m. + 25° 17′ : 5-7 : 107·5° :
    6·38″. Greenish-white, blue.

    [Sigma] 1536 or [iota] : 11 h. 19 m. + 11° 5′ : 3·9-7·1 :
    55·0° : 2·36″. Yellow, blue.

    LEO MINOR.

    LEPUS.

    R : 4 h. 55 m. - 14° 57′. Variable, 6·7 to 8·5. Intense
    crimson.

    LIBRA.

    M. 5 : 15 h. 13 m. + 2° 27′. Globular cluster, close to star 5
    Serpentis. Remarkable for high ratio of variables in it--1 in
    11.

    LYNX.

    [Sigma] 948 or 12 : 6 h. 37 m. + 59° 33′ : 5·2-6·1-7·4 : 116°,
    305·8° : 1·41″, 8·23″. Triple, greenish, white, bluish.

    [Sigma] 1334 or 38 : 9 h. 13 m. + 37° 14′ : 4-6·7 : 235·6° :
    2·88″. White blue.

    LYRA.

    T : 18 h. 29 m. + 36° 55′. Variable, 7·2 to 7·8. Crimson.

    (Vega) [alpha] : 18 h. 34 m. + 38° 41′ : 1-10·5 : 160° :
    50·77″. Very pale blue. The faint companion is a good test
    for small telescopes. Vega is near the apex of the solar way.

    { [epsilon]^1 : 18 h. 41·1 m. + 39° 30′ : 4·6-6·3 : 12·4° : 2·85″.
 [epsilon] {      Pale yellow, pale orange yellow.
    { [epsilon]^2        : 4·9-5·2 : 127·3° : 2·15″. Both pale yellow.

    [zeta] : 18 h. 41 m. + 37° 30′ : 4·2-5·5 : 150° : 43·7″.
    Easy, both pale yellow.

    [beta] : 18 h. 46 m. + 33° 15′ : 3-6·7 : 149·8° : 45·3″. 3
    variable, 12·91 days. Spectroscopic binary.

    M. 57 : 18 h. 50 m. + 32° 54′. Ring Nebula, between [beta] and
    [gamma]. Faint in small telescope. Gaseous.

    MONOCEROS.

    [Sigma] 919 or 11 : 6 h. 24 m. - 6° 57′ : A 5-B 5·5-C 6 : AB
    131·6° : 7·27″ : BC 105·7° : 2·65″. Fine triple.

    [Sigma] 950 or 15 : 6 h. 35 m. + 10°·0′ : 6-8·8-11·2 : 212·2°,
    17·9° : 2·69″, 16·54″. Triple, green, blue, orange.

    OPHIUCHUS.

    [rho] : 16 h. 19 m. - 23° 13′ : 6-6 : 355° : 3·4″.

    39 : 17 h. 12 m. - 24° 11′ : 5·5-6 : 358° : 15″. Pale orange,
    blue.

    [Sigma] 2202 or 61 : 17 h. 40 m. + 2° 37′ : 5·5-5·8 : 93·4° :
    20·68″. White.

    [Sigma] 2272 or 70 : 18 h. 1 m. + 2° 32′ : 4·5-6 : 178° :
    2·10″. Yellow, purple. Rather difficult.

    ORION.

    (Rigel) [beta] : 5 h. 10 m. -8° 19′ : 1-8 : 202·2° : 9·58″.
    Bluish-white, dull bluish. Fair test for small glass.

    [delta] : 5 h. 27 m. - 0° 23′ : 2-6·8 : 359° : 52·7″. White,
    very easy.

    [Sigma] 738 or [lambda] : 5 h. 30 m. + 9° 52′ : 4-6 : 43° 1′ :
    4·55″. Yellowish, purple. Pretty double.

    [theta] : 5 h. 30 m. - 5° 28′ : 6-7-7·5-8. The 'Trapezium' in
    the Great Nebula.

    M. 42 : 5 h. 30 m. - 5° 28′ : 6-7-7·5-8. Great Nebula of
    Orion.

    [Sigma] 752 or [iota] : 5 h. 30 m. - 5° 59′ : 3·2-7·3 : 141·7°
    : 11·50″. White, fine field.

    [sigma] : 5 h. 34 m. - 2° 39′. Fine multiple, double triple in
    small glass.

    [zeta] : 5 h. 36 m. - 2° 0′ : 2-6 : 156·3° : 2·43″.
    Yellowish-green, blue.

    U : 5 h. 50 m. + 20° 10′. Variable, 5·8-12·3. Period 375 days.

    PEGASUS.

    M. 15 : 21 h. 25 m. + 11° 43′. Fine globular cluster, 4° N.E.
    of [delta] Equulei.

    PERSEUS.

    H. VI. 33·34 : 2 h. 13 m. + 56° 40′. Sword-handle of Perseus.
    Splendid field.

    M. 34 : 2 h. 36 m. + 42° 21′. Visible to naked eye. Fine
    low-power field.

    [Sigma] 296 or [theta] : 2 h. 37 m. + 48° 48′ : 4·2-10-11 :
    299°, 225° : 17·4″, 80″. Triple.

    [Sigma] 307 or [eta] : 2 h. 43 m. + 55° 29′ : 4-8·5 : 300° :
    28″. Orange-yellow, blue.

    (Algol) [beta] : 3 h. 2 m. + 40° 34′. Variable, 2·1 to 3·2.
    Period 2·8 days. Spectroscopic eclipsing binary.

    [Sigma] 464 or [zeta] : 3 h. 48 m: + 31° 35′ : 2·7-9·3 :
    206·7° : 12·65°. Greenish-white, ashy. Three other companions
    more distant.

    [Sigma] 471 or [epsilon] : 3 h. 51 m. + 39° 43′ : 3·1-8·3 :
    7·8° : 8·8″. White, bluish-white.

    PISCES.

    [Sigma] 12 or 35 : 0 h. 10 m. + 8° 16′ : 6-8 : 150° : 12″.
    White, purplish.

    [Sigma] 88 or [psi] : 1 h. 0·4 m. + 20° 56′ : 4·9-5 : 160° :
    29·96″. White.

    [Sigma] 100 or [zeta] : 1 h. 8 m. + 7° 3′ : 4·2-5·3 : 64° :
    23·68″. White, reddish-violet.

    [Sigma] 202 or [alpha] : 1 h. 57 m. + 2° 17′ : 2·8-3·9 : 318°
    : 2·47″. Reddish, white.

    SAGITTA.

    SAGITTARIUS.

    M. 20 : 17 h. 56 m. - 23° 2′. The Trifid Nebula.

    SCORPIO.

    [beta] : 15 h. 59·6 m. - 19° 31′ : 2-5 : 25° : 13·6″. Orange,
    pale yellow.

    (Antares) [alpha] : 16 h. 23 m. - 26° 13′ : 1-7 : 270° : 3″.
    Difficult with small glass.

    SCUTUM SOBIESKII.

    M. 24 : 18 h. 12 m. - 18° 27′. Fine cluster of faint stars on
    Galaxy.

    M. 17 : 18 h. 15 m. - 16° 14′. The Omega Nebula. Gaseous.

    R : 18 h. 42 m. - 5° 49′. Irregular, variable, 4·8 to 7·8.

    SERPENS.

    [Sigma] 1954 or [delta] : 15 h. 30 m. + 10° 53′ : 3·2-4·1 :
    189·3° : 3·94″. Yellow, yellowish-green, binary.

    [Sigma] 2417 or [theta] : 18 h. 51 m. + 4° 4′ : 4-4·2 : 103° :
    22″. Both pale yellow.

    SEXTANS.

    TAURUS.

    [Sigma] 528 or [chi] : 4 h. 16 m. + 25° 23′ : 5·7-7·8 : 24·2°
    : 19·48″. White, lilac.

    [Sigma] 716 or 118 : 5 h. 23 m. + 25° 4′ : 5·8-6·6 : 201·8 :
    4·86″. White, bluish-white.

    M. 1 : 5 h. 28 m. + 21° 57′. The Crab Nebula. Faint in small
    glass.

    TRIANGULUM.

    [Sigma] 227 or [iota] : 2 h. 7 m. + 29° 50′ : 5-6·4 : 74·6°:
    3·79″. Yellow, blue, beautiful.

    URSA MAJOR.

    [Sigma] 1523 or [xi] : 11 h. 13 m. + 32° 6′ : 4-4·9 : 137·2° :
    2·62″. Yellowish, binary. Period 60 years.

    [Sigma] 1543 or 57 : 11 h. 24 m. + 39° 54′ : 5·2-8·2 : 2·1° :
    5·40″. White, ashy.

    (Mizar) [zeta] : 13 h. 20 m. + 55° 27′ : 2·1-4·2 : 149·9°
    : 14·53″. Fine pair, yellow and yellowish-green. Alcor, 5
    magnitude in same field with low power, also 8 magnitude star.

    URSA MINOR.

    (Polaris) [alpha] : 1 h. 22 m. + 88° 46′ : 2-9 : 215·6° :
    18·22″. Yellow, bluish, test for 2-inch.

    VIRGO.

    [Sigma] 1670 or [gamma] : 12 h. 37 m. - 0° 54′ : 3-3 : 328·3°
    : 5·94″. Both pale yellow. Binary, 185 years.

    VULPECULA.

    M. 27 : 19 h. 55 m. + 22° 27′. The Dumb-bell Nebula. Just
    visible with 1-1/4-inch. Gaseous.




INDEX


  A

  Achromatic. See Telescope

  Adams, search for Neptune, 198-201

  Aerolites, 227

  Airy, search for Neptune, 197-201

  Albireo, colour of, 236

  Alcor, 241

  Alcyone, 256

  Aldebaran, 234;
    colour of, 235

  Algol, spectroscopic binary, 246;
    diameter and mass of components, 246;
    period of, 250;
    variables, 250

  Alps, lunar, 116;
    valley of, 116, 117

  Altai Mountains, 117

  Altair, 234

  Altazimuth, 25-28

  Anderson discovers Nova Aurigæ, 253;
    discovers Nova Persei, 254

  Andromeda, great nebula of, 263, 264

  Andromedæ [gamma], colour of, 236

  Andromedes, 214, 215, 225, 226

  Annular eclipse, 69, 70

  Antares, 234

  Anthelme observes new star, 252

  Apennines, lunar, 116

  Archimedes, 117

  Arcturus, 234

  Argelander, number of stars, 235

  Ariadæus cleft, 119

  Arided, 234

  Arietis [gamma], observed by Hooke, 240

  Aristillus, 117

  Asteroids, number of, 150;
    methods of discovery, 150, 151

  Asterope, 256

  Astræa, discovery of, 150

  Atlas, 256

  Atmosphere, solar, 75

  Autolycus, 117

  Auzout, aerial telescopes, 4


  B

  Bacon, Roger, 1

  Bailey, cluster variables, 259

  Ball, Sir R., 154, 262;
    'Popular Guide to the Heavens,' 278

  Barnard, measures of Venus, 89;
    markings on Venus, 95;
    on Mars, 133;
    measures of asteroids, 152;
    discovers Jupiter's fifth satellite, 167;
    measures of Saturn, 172;
    drawing of Saturn, 172;
    rotation of Saturn, 174;
    on Saturnian markings, 184-185;
    observation of Comet 1882 (iii.), 218

  Bayer, lettering of stars, 278

  Beer. See Mädler

  Bélopolsky, rotation of Venus, 96

  Bessel, search for Neptune, 197

  Betelgeux, 234;
    colour of, 235

  Biela's comet, 213, 214, 215, 224, 225

  Birmingham observes Nova Coronæ, 252

  Bode's law, 148, 149

  Bond, G. P., discovers rifts in Andromeda nebula, 264

  Bond, W. C., discovers Crape Ring, 178;
    discovers Saturn's eighth satellite, 187;
    verifies discovery of Neptune's satellite, 201

  Boötis [epsilon], double star, 242

  Bouvard, tables of Uranus, 197

  Bradley uses aerial telescope, 4

  Bremiker's star-charts, 200

  Brooks' comet, 210;
    observation of comet 1882 (iii.), 218

  Brorsen's comet, 213


  C

  Calcium in chromosphere, 73

  Campbell, atmosphere of Mars, 140;
    bright projections on Mars, 141;
    spectroscopic investigation of Saturn's rings, 180

  Canals. See Mars

  Canes Venatici, great spiral nebula in, 265

  Canopus, 234

  Capella, 234

  Capricorni [alpha], naked-eye double, 241

  Carpathians, 117

  Carrington, solar rotation, 59

  Cassegrain. See Telescope, forms of

  Cassini uses aerial telescope, 4;
    discovers four satellites of Saturn and division of ring, 4;
    observations on Jupiter, 160;
    discovers division in Saturn's ring, 177;
    four satellites of Saturn, 184, 186, 187

  Cassiopeiæ [eta], double star, 242;
    Nova, 252

  Castor, 234;
    double star, 242;
    binary, 245

  Caucasus, lunar, 116

  Cauchoix constructs 12-inch O.G., 6

  Celaeno, 256

  Celestial cycle, 18

  Centauri [alpha], 231, 234

  Ceres, discovery of, 149;
  diameter of, 152;
  reflective power, 152

  Ceti [zeta], naked-eye double, 241;
    Mira ([omicron]) variable star, 248;
    period, 249

  Challis, search for Neptune, 199

  Chambers, G. F., on comets, 208-209;
    number of comets, 209

  Chromosphere, 71, 73, 76;
    depth of, 73;
    constitution of, 73

  Clark, Alvan, constructs 18-1/2-inch, 8;
    26-inch, 8;
    30-inch Pulkowa telescope and 36-inch Lick, 8;
    40-inch Yerkes, 9

  Clavius, lunar crater, 113, 114, 120

  Clerke, Miss Agnes, 60, 73;
    climate of Mercury, 85;
    on Mars, 139;
    albedo of asteroids, 152;
    Jupiter's red spot, 161;
    on comet 1882 (iii.), 218;
    on Mira Ceti, 248

  Clerk-Maxwell, constitution of Saturn's rings, 179

  Cluster variables, 259

  Clusters, irregular, 256;
    globular, 258

  Coggia's comet, 211

  Coma Berenices, 256

  Comas Solà, rotation of Saturn, 174

  Comet of 1811, 206;
    of 1843, 206, 215, 216;
    of Encke, 207;
    of Halley, 207, 213;
    Brooks, 210;
    Donati, 205, 210;
    Tempel, 211;
    1866 (i.), 214, 224;
    Winnecke, 211;
    Coggia, 211;
    Holmes, 211;
    Biela, 213;
    and Andromeda meteors, 214, 215, 224, 225;
    great southern (1901), 211;
    Wells, 213;
    of 1882, 213, 216-219;
    De Vico, 213;
    Brorsen, 213;
    of Swift 1862 (iii.), and Perseid meteors, 214, 224;
    great southern (1880), 216;
    of 1881, 216;
    of 1807, 216

  Comets, 203 _et seq._;
    structure of, 205;
    classes of, 206-208;
    number of, 209;
    spectra of, 211-213, 218;
    constitution of, 212, 218;
    connection with meteors, 214, 215, 224;
    families of, 215-218;
    observation of, 219-222

  Common 5-foot reflector, 12;
    photographs Orion nebula, 262

  Constellations, formation of, 237, 238

  Contraction of sun, 79

  Cooke, T., and Sons, 25-inch Newall telescope, 8;
    mounting of 6-inch refractor, 31

  Copernicus, prediction of phases of Venus, 92;
    lunar crater, 114;
    ray system of, 120, 121

  Corona, 71, 72, 76;
    tenuity of, 71;
    variations in structure, 71;
    minimum type of, 71, 72;
    maximum type of, 72;
    constitution of, 72

  Corona Borealis, 238;
    Nova in, 252

  Coronal streamers, analogy with Aurora, 71

  Coronium, 72, 73

  Cottam, charts of the constellations, 278

  Crape ring of Saturn, 178

  Craters, lunar, 109, 112;
    ruined and 'ghost,' 111;
  number and size, 112;
  classification of, 112

  Cygni, 61, 231;
    [alpha], 234;
    [beta], colour of, 236


  D

  Darwin, G. H., evolution of Saturnian system, 186

  Dawes discovers crape ring, 178;
    search for Neptune, 199, 200

  Deimos, satellite of Mars, 143

  Delphinus, 237

  Denning, absence of colour in reflector, 22;
    measuring sun-spots, 51, 53;
    on naked-eye views of Mercury, 82;
    abnormal features on Venus, 94;
    on canals of Mars, 136;
    observations of cloud on Mars, 139, 140;
    changes on Jupiter, 159, 160;
    rotation of Saturn, 174;
    visibility of Cassini's division, 182;
    number of meteor radiants, 225;
    classification of sporadic meteors, 227;
    meteoric observation, 227, 228;
    stationary radiants, 229

  Deslandres, calcium photographs of sun, 60;
    on form of corona, 72;
    photographs chromosphere and prominences, 74

  De Vico's comet, 213

  Dew-cap, 39

  Digges, supposed use of telescopes, 1

  Dollond, John, invention of achromatic, 5;
    5-foot achromatics, 6

  Donati, comet of 1858, 205, 210;
    spectrum of comet Tempel, 211

  Doppler's principle, 180

  Dorpat refractor, 6, 7, 31

  Douglass, markings on Venus, 95

  Draco, planetary nebula in, 266

  Dunér, rotation of sun, 59


  E

  Earth-light on moon, 105

  Eclipse, Indian, 1898, 70;
    1878, July 29, 72;
    1870, December 22, 74

  Eclipses, solar, 68-70;
    of moon, 105, 106

  Electra, 256

  Electrical influence of sun on earth, 63

  Elger on lunar Maria, 111;
    lunar clefts, 119;
    lunar chart, 125

  Elkin observes transit of comet 1882 (iii.), 212

  Encke discovers division in ring of Saturn, 177;
    search for Neptune, 200

  Equatorial mountings, 29-31, 36

  Equulei [delta], short-period binary, 245

  Erck, Dr. Wentworth, satellites of Mars, 144

  Eros, discovery of, distance of, 151;
    variability of, 152


  F

  Fabricius observes Mira Ceti, 248

  Faculæ, 59;
    rotation period of, 59

  Faculides, 60

  Finder. See Telescope

  Finlay, transit of comet 1882 (iii.), 212

  Flamsteed, catalogue of stars, 278

  Fomalhaut, 234

  Fowler, 'Telescopic Astronomy,' 17

  Fracastorius, 111


  G

  Galaxy. See Milky Way

  Galilean telescope. See Telescope, forms of

  Galileo Galilei, invention of telescope, 2;
    loss of sight, 47;
    discovery of phases of Venus, 92;
    on lunar craters, 112;
    discovers four satellites of Jupiter, 166;
    observations of Saturn, 175, 176

  Galle discovers Neptune, 200

  Gassendi observes transit of Mercury, 87;
    lunar crater, 119

  Geminorum [alpha]. See Castor

  George III. pensions Herschel, 193

  Georgium Sidus, 194

  Gore, period of Algol, 250;
    globular clusters, 259;
    'The Stellar Heavens,' 278

  Gregorian. See Telescope, forms of

  Grubb, 27-inch Vienna telescope, 8;
    on telescopic powers, 41

  Gruithuisen, changes on moon, 126


  H

  Hale, calcium photographs of sun, 60

  Hall, Asaph, discovers satellites of Mars, 8, 143;
    rotation of Saturn, 173, 174

  Hall, Chester Moor, discovers principle of achromatic, 5

  Halley's comet, 207, 213

  Harding discovers Juno, 149

  Hebe, discovery of, 150

  Hegel proves that there are only seven planets, 149

  Helium in chromosphere, 73

  Helmholtz, speed of sensation, 48;
    solar contraction, 79

  Hencke discovers Astræa and Hebe, 150

  Henry, 30-inch Nice telescope, 8

  Heraclides promontory, 117

  Hercules, 237

  Herculis [alpha], double star, 242

  Herodotus, valley of, 118, 119, 126

  Herschel, Sir John, drawing of Orion nebula, 262

  Herschel, Sir William, 4-foot telescope, 13;
    impairs sight, 47;
    misses satellites of Mars, 143, 144;
    rotation of Saturn, 173;
    discovers Saturn's sixth and seventh satellites, 186, 187;
    early history, 190, 191;
    discovers Uranus, 191;
    discovers two satellites of Uranus, 196;
    binary stars, 244;
    gaseous constitution of nebulæ, 260;
    distribution of nebulæ, 267;
    translation of solar system, 269

  Herschelian. See Telescope, forms of

  Hevelius, description of Saturn, 176

  Hind discovers Nova Ophiuchi, 252

  Hirst, colouring of Jupiter, 159

  Hirst, Miss, colouring of Jupiter, 159

  Holden on solar rotation, 59, 60

  Holmes, Edwin, telescope-house, 38;
    comet, 211

  Holmes, Oliver Wendell, 'Poet at the Breakfast-table,' 13

  Holwarda observes [omicron] Ceti, 248

  Hooke, observation of Gamma Arietis, 240

  Howlett, criticism of Wilsonian theory of sun-spots, 61

  Huggins, atmosphere of Mars, 140;
    gaseous nature of nebulæ, 210;
    spectrum of Winnecke's comet, 211;
    discovers nebula in Draco to be gaseous, 260;
    spectrum of Andromeda nebula, 264

  Humboldtianum, Mare, 111

  Humboldt observes meteor-shower of 1799, 224

  Hussey, search for Neptune, 197

  Hussey, W. J., period of [delta] Equulei, 245

  Huygens, improvement on telescopes, 3;
    aerial telescopes, 4;
    discovers nature of Saturn's ring and first
      satellite of Saturn, 177, 186;
    observation of [theta] Orionis, 240;
    of great nebula in Orion, 261

  Huygens, Mount, 116

  Hydrogen in chromosphere, 73

  Hyginus cleft, 119


  I

  Imbrium, Mare, 116

  Iron in chromosphere, 73


  J

  Jansen, Zachariah, claim to invention of telescope, 1

  Janssen, photographs of sun, 57

  Journal of British Astronomical Association, 23, 38

  Juno, discovery of, 149;
    diameter of, 152

  Jupiter, brilliancy compared with Venus, 90;
    period of, 155;
    distance of, 155;
    diameter of, 155;
    compression, volume, density, 155;
    brilliancy, 156;
    apparent diameter of, 156;
    belts of, 157 _et seq._;
    colouring, 158, 159;
    changes on surface of, 159, 160;
    great red spot, 160-164;
    rotation period, 163-165;
    resemblance to sun, 164-166;
    satellites of, 166-169;
    observation of, 169-171;
    visibility of satellites, 166;
    diameters of, 167;
    occultations of, eclipses of, transits of, 167


  K

  Kaiser sea, Mars, 145

  Keeler, report on Yerkes telescope, 9;
    rotation of Saturn, 174;
    constitution of Saturn's rings, 180;
    photographic survey of nebulæ, 267

  Kelvin, solar combustion, 78, 79

  Kepler, suggestion for improved refractor, 3;
    predicts transit of Mercury, 87;
    lunar crater, ray-system of, 120, 121;
    observes new star, 252

  Kirchhoff, production of Fraunhofer lines, 75

  Kirkwood, theory of asteroid formation, 153;
    periodic meteors, 214

  Kitchiner, visibility of Saturn's satellites, 188

  Klein's Star Atlas, 255


  L

  Lampland, photographs of Mars, 137

  Langley, heat of umbra of sun-spot, 50;
    changes in sunspots, 55

  Lassell, 4-foot reflector, 37;
    discovers Saturn's eighth satellite, 187;
    discovers satellite of Uranus, 196;
  search for Neptune, 200;
  discovers satellite of Neptune, 201;
  drawing of Orion nebula, 262

  Leibnitz, mountains, 117

  Lemonnier, observations of Uranus, 193

  Leonid, meteors, 214, 224, 225, 226

  Leonis [gamma], colour of, 236

  Leverrier, search for Neptune, 199-201

  Lewis, revision of Struve's 'Mensuræ Micrometricæ,' 278

  Lick, 36-inch telescope, 8

  Light, speed of, 231

  Light-year, 230

  Lippershey, claim to invention of telescope, 1

  Lohrmann, lunar chart of, 122

  Lowell, rotation of Mercury, 85;
    surface of Mercury, 86;
    surface of Venus, 95;
    rotation of Venus, 96;
    'oases' of Mars, 137, 138;
    projections on Mars, 141

  Lunar observation, 123-125

  Lyræ [epsilon], double double, 241, 242;
    [beta], variable star, 249;
    spectroscopic binary, 250

  Lyra, ring nebula in, 265;
    photographs of, 266

  Lyrid, meteors, 214, 224, 226


  M

  M. 35, cluster, 257;
    M. 13, number of stars in, 258;
    M. 92, 259;
    M. 3 and M. 5, variables in, 259;
    M. 51, 265

  MacEwen, drawing of Venus, 94, 95

  Mädler, heights of lunar mountains, 118;
    lunar chart, 122, 124, 128

  Maginus, 120

  Magnesium in chromosphere, 73

  Maia, 256

  Maintenance of solar light and heat, 78, 79

  Marius, Simon, description of Andromeda nebula, 264

  Markwick, Colonel, 117

  Mars, distance, diameter, rotation, year of, phase of, 130-132;
    oppositions of, 130, 131;
    polar caps, 132;
    canals, 135-137;
    dark areas, 133;
    'oases,' 137, 138;
    atmosphere of, 139, 140;
  projections on terminator, 141;
  satellites of, 142-144;
  visibility of details of, 144

  Maunder, Mrs., photographs of coronal streamers, 70

  Maunder, E. W., adjustment of equatorial, 22, 23;
    electrical influence of sun on earth, 63;
    'Astronomy without a Telescope,' 238

  Mee, Arthur, on amateur observation, 17;
    visibility of Cassini's division, 183

  Melbourne 4-foot reflector, 12

  Mellor, lunar chart, 124

  Mendenhall, illustration of sun's distance, 48

  Mercury, elongations of, 81;
    diameter of, 82;
    orbit, 83;
    bulk, weight, density, reflective power, 83;
    phases, 84;
    surface, 84;
    rotation period, 85;
    transits, 87, 88;
    anomalous appearances in, 87

  Merope, 256

  Merz, Cambridge (U.S.A.), and Pulkowa refractors, 6

  Messier, lunar crater, 126;
    'the comet ferret,' 219;
    catalogue of nebulæ, 258

  Meteors, 222 _et seq._;
    shower of 1833, 223;
    of 1866, 224;
    Perseid, 214, 224, 225;
    Leonid, 214, 224, 225;
    Lyrid, 214, 224, 226;
    Andromedes, 214, 215, 224, 225;
    radiant point, 223, 224;
    sporadic, 226;
    observation of, 227-229

  Metius's claim to invention of telescope, 1

  Milky Way, 239;
    clustering of stars towards, 240;
    nebulæ in, 240

  Mira, [omicron] Ceti, 248;
    period of, 249

  Mizar, 240, 241

  Montaigne, 219

  Month, lunar and sidereal, 103

  Moon, size, orbit, area, volume, density, mass, force of gravity, 100;
    lunar tides, 101, 102;
    phases, 102;
    synodic period, 103;
    reflective power, 104;
    'old moon in young moon's arms,' 104;
    earth's light on, 105;
    lunar eclipses, 105, 106;
    'black eclipses,' 105;
    Maria of, 109-111;
    craters of, 109, 112-114;
    mountain ranges, 109, 116-118;
    clefts or rills, 109, 118, 119;
    ray systems, 109, 120, 121;
    atmosphere of, 126;
    evidence of change, 127, 128

  Mountings. See Telescope


  N

  Nasmyth, willow-leaf structure of solar surface, 57;
    lunar clefts, 119;
    on lunar ray systems, 121;
    and Carpenter, lunar chart, 125;
    on powers for lunar observation, 127

  Nebula of Orion, 261-263;
    drawings of, 262;
    photographs, 262;
    distance of, 263;
    of Andromeda, 263, 264;
    photographs of, 264;
    spectrum, 264

  Nebulæ, few in neighbourhood of Galaxy, 240;
    Messier's catalogue of, 258;
    gaseous, 260 _et seq._;
    spiral, 263-265;
    ring, 265;
    planetary, 266;
    number of, 267

  Neison on lunar walled plains, 115, 120;
    lunar chart, 125

  Neptune, 148, 196 _et seq._;
    diameter, distance, period, spectrum, satellite of, 201

  Newall, 25-inch refractor, 8

  Newcomb on scale of solar operations, 77, 78;
    on markings of Venus, 93;
    phosphorescence of dark side of Venus, 97;
    ratio of stellar increase, 235;
    'Astronomy for Everybody,' 238;
    stars in galaxy, 240;
    spectroscopic binaries, 248;
    on Nova Persei, 254;
    on constitution of stars, 268;
    apex of solar path, 271

  Newton, Sir Isaac, invents Newtonian reflector, 10

  Nice, 30-inch refractor, 8

  Nichol on M. 13, 258

  Nilosyrtis, 145

  Noble, method of observing sun, 67;
    visibility of Saturn's satellites, 188

  Nova Cassiopeiæ, 252;
    Coronæ, 252;
    Cygni, 253;
    Andromedæ, 253;
    Ophiuchi, 252;
    Aurigæ, 253;
    spectrum of, 253;
    changes into planetary nebula, 254;
    Persei, 254;
    photographs of, 254;
    nebulosity round, 254;
    Geminorum, 255;
    colour, spectrum of, 255


  O

  Object-glass, treatment of, 19, 20;
    testing of, 20-23

  Observation, methods of solar, 65-67

  Olbers discovers Pallas and Vesta, 149;
    theory of asteroid formation, 150, 152

  Oppolzer, E. von, discovers variability of Eros, 152

  Opposition, 130 (note);
    of Mars, 130, 131

  Orion, 237;
    great nebula of, 261-263

  Orionis [theta], observation of, 240;
    [iota], naked-eye double, 241;
    [theta], multiple star, 243;
    [sigma], multiple star, 243


  P

  Palisa discovers asteroids, 151

  Pallas, discovery of, 149;
    diameter of, 152

  Peck, 'Constellations and How to Find Them,' 238;
    star-charts, 278

  Pegasi [kappa], short-period binary, 245

  Pegasus, 237

  Perihelion of planets, 131 (note)

  Period, synodic, of moon, 103

  Perrine discovers Jupiter's sixth and seventh satellites, 167

  Perseid, meteors, 214, 224, 225

  Perseus, sword-handle of, 257

  Petavius cleft, 119

  Peters discovers asteroids, 151

  Phillips, Rev. T. E. R., polar cap of Mars, 134;
    canals of Mars, 137;
    clouds on Mars, 140

  Phobos satellite of Mars, 143

  Phosphorescence of dark side of Venus, 97

  Photosphere, 75

  Piazzi discovers Ceres, 149

  Pickering, E. C., number of lucid stars in northern hemisphere, 233;
    parallax of Orion nebula, 262

  Pickering, W. H., on lunar ray systems, 120, 121;
    changes on moon, 126;
    on polar cap of Mars, 134, 135;
    discovers Saturn's ninth and tenth satellites, 187;
    photographs Orion nebula, 262

  Planetary nebulæ, 266;
    spectra of, 266;
    nebula in Draco, 266

  Plato, 117, 126

  Pleiades, number of stars in, 233, 256, 257;
    nebula of, 257

  Pleione, 256

  Polarizing eye-piece, 66

  Pollux, 234

  Præsepe, 256

  Procellarum Oceanus, 111

  Proctor, 2;
    method of finding Mercury, 82;
    on state of Jupiter, 166

  Proctor on the Saturnian system, 181;
    visibility of Cassini's division, 182;
    on Challis's search for Neptune, 199;
    Star Atlas, 278

  Procyon, 234

  Projecting sun's image, 67

  Projections on terminator of Mars, 141

  Prominences, 73, 74

  Ptolemäus, 112

  Pulkowa, 30-inch refractor, 8, 9


  R

  Radiant point of meteors, 223, 224;
    number of, 225;
    stationary, 229

  Ranyard Cowper on parallax measures, 231

  Regulus, 234

  Reversing layer seen by Young, 74;
    spectrum photographed by Shackleton, 75;
    depth of, 75

  Riccioli observes duplicity of [zeta] Ursæ Majoris, 240

  Rigel, 232, 234;
    colour of, 235

  Ritchey, 5-foot reflector Yerkes Observatory, 12

  Roche's limit, 186

  Rosse, Earl of, 6-foot reflector, 12;
    colouring of Jupiter, 158, 159;
    telescope, resolution of Orion nebula, 260;
    drawing of Orion nebula with, 262;
    spiral character of M. 51, 265

  Rotation period of Mercury, 85;
    of Venus, 95, 96


  S

  Satellite of Venus, question of, 97, 98;
    of Mars, 142-144;
    of Jupiter, 166-169

  Saturn, orbit of, sun-heat received by, period of, diameter of,
    compression and density of, 172;
    features of globe, rotation period, 173;
    varying aspects of rings, 178;
    measures of rings, 178;
    constitution of rings, 179;
    satellites of, 186-189;
    satellites, transits of, 189

  Scheiner, construction of refractors, 2

  Scheiner, Julius, spectrum of Andromeda nebula, 264

  Schiaparelli, rotation of Mercury, 85;
    surface of Mercury, 86;
    rotation of Venus, 96;
    discovery of Martian canals, 135-137;
    connection of comets and meteors, 214, 224

  Schmidt, lunar map, 114;
    observation of comet 1882 (iii.), 217, 218;
    observes Nova Cygni, 253

  Schröter, observations of Venus, 94;
    lunar mountains, 118;
    rills, 118;
    lunar atmosphere, 126

  Schwabe, discovery of sun-spot period, 61, 62

  See, Dr., duration of sun's light and heat, 80

  Serenitatis, Mare, serpentine ridge on, 110, 111;
    crossed by ray from Tycho, 120

  Shackleton photographs spectrum of reversing layer, 75

  Sidereal month, 103

  Siderites and siderolites, 227

  Sinus Iridum, 117

  Sirius, companion of, discovered, 8;
    brightness, 234;
    colour, 235;
    brilliancy compared with Venus, 90;
    with Jupiter, 156

  Sirsalis cleft, 119

  Smyth, Admiral, on amateur observers, 18, 19, 45

  Sodium in chromosphere, 73

  Solar system, translation of, 269-272

  South, Sir James, 12-inch telescope, 6

  Spectroscope, 73, 76

  Spectroscopic observations of rotation of Venus, 96;
    of Martian atmosphere, 140;
    investigations of Saturn's rings, 180;
    of Uranus, 195

  Spectrum of reversing layer, 75;
    of chromosphere, 73

  Spencer, Herbert, relation of stars and nebulæ, 267

  Spica Virginis, 234

  Stars, distance of, 231;
    number of, 232, 233;
    magnitudes, 234;
    numbers in different magnitudes, 235;
    colours, 235-237;
    change of colour in, 236, 237;
    constellations, 237, 238;
    double, 240;
    multiple, 243;
    binary, 244;
    spectroscopic binaries, 245-248;
    variable, 248-251;
    new or temporary, 251-255;
    constitution of, 268

  Struve, F. G. W., 'Mensuræ Micrometricæ,' 278

  Struve (Otto) discovers satellite of Uranus, 196;
    verifies discovery of Neptune's satellite, 201

  Sun, size, distance, 47, 48;
    rotation period of, 57-59;
    methods of observing, 65-67;
    atmosphere of, 75;
    light and heat of, 78

  Sun-spots, 49, 50;
    rapid changes in, 54, 55;
    period of, 62;
    zones and variation of latitude of, 62

  Synodic period, 103

  Syrtis Major, 145

  Swift, Dean, satellites of Mars, 142

  Swift's comet, 214, 224


  T

  Taygeta, 256

  Telescope, invention of, 1, 2;
    refracting, 3;
    achromatic, 5;
    reflecting, 10, 11;
    forms of reflecting, Newtonian, Gregorian, Herschelian,
      Cassegrain, 10, 11;
    mirrors of reflecting, 11, 12;
    finders, 23, 24;
    mountings of, Altazimuth, 25-28;
    equatorial, 30, 31;
    house for, 37, 38;
    management of, 39, 40;
    powers of, 40, 41

  Tempel's comet, 211

  Terminator of moon, 107;
    of Venus, 94

  Titius, discovery of Bode's law, 148

  Turner discovers Nova Geminorum, 255

  Tycho, 114;
    ray-system of, 108, 120, 121;
    Brahé observes Nova Cassiopeiæ, 252


  U

  Uranus, 190;
    distance from sun, period, diameter, visibility, 194;
    spectrum and density, 195;
    satellites, 196

  Ursæ Majoris [zeta], duplicity of, 240;
    [xi] binary, 244;
    spectroscopic binary, 247


  V

  Variable stars, 248-251

  Variation in sun-spot latitude, 62

  Vega, 234;
    colour of, 235;
    apex of solar path, 271

  Venus, diameter, 89;
    orbit and elongations, 89;
    visibility of, 89, 90;
    brilliancy, 90;
    reflective power, 90;
    phases, 92;
    as telescopic object, 93;
    atmosphere, 93;
    blunting of south horn, 94;
    rotation period, 96;
    'phosphorescence' of dark side, 97;
    question of satellite of, 97, 98;
    transits, 98;
    opportunities for observation, 98, 99

  Vesta, discovery of 149;
    diameter of, 152;
    reflective power, 152

  Vienna, 27-inch refractor, 8

  Vogel, atmosphere of Mars, 140;
    discovery of spectroscopic binaries, 245, 246


  W

  Washington, 26-inch refractor, 8

  Watson, asteroid discoveries, 151, 153

  Webb, Rev. J. W., remarks on telescope, 17;
    on amateurs, 18;
    on cleaning of eye pieces, 20;
    visibility of Saturn's rings, 181;
    lunar chart, 124;
    'Celestial Objects,' 124;
    colouring of Jupiter, 158;
    description of planetary nebula in Draco, 267

  Williams, A. Stanley, seasonal variations in colour of Jupiter's
    belts, 159;
    periods of rotation (Jupiter), 163;
    rotation of Saturn, 174

  Wells's comet, 213

  Wilson, theory of sun-spots, 60, 61

  Winnecke's comet, 211

  Wolf, asteroid discoveries, 151


  Y

  Yerkes observatory, 40-inch refractor, 8, 9;
    5-foot reflector, 12

  Young, illustrations from 'The Sun,' 48;
    electric influence of sun on earth, 63;
    observations of prominences, 74;
    of reversing layer, 74


  Z

  Zöllner, reflective power of Jupiter, 156




THE END




BILLING AND SONS, LTD., PRINTERS, GUILDFORD.




  Transcriber's Note


      - - indicates italic print;
      = = indicates bold print;
      + + indicates Old English font;
      ^ or ^{} indicates a superscript.
      °   indicates hours (or degrees);
      ′   indicates minutes (prime = minutes = feet);
      ″  indicates seconds (double prime = seconds = inches).

  Sundry missing or damaged punctuation has been repaired.

  Illustrations (or Plates) which interrupted paragraphs have been
  moved to more convenient positions between paragraphs.

  A few words appear in both hyphenatd and unhyphenated versions.
  A couple have been corrected, for consistency; the others have
  been retained.


  Page x: 'XI' corrected to 'IX'

    "IX. THE ASTEROIDS             148"


  Page 4: Corrected 'lengthwas' to 'length was'.

    "... with a glass whose focal length was 212-1/4 feet."

  Page 25: 'familar' corrected to 'familiar'.

    "... or, to use more familiar terms,..."

  Page 90: "... more especially if the
  object casting the shadow have a sharply defined
  edge,..."

    'have' is correct, and has been retained (subjunctive after 'if').

  Page 92: 'firstfruits' corrected to 'first-fruits'.
    (OED, and matches 2 other occurrences.)

    "The actual proof of the
  existence of these phases was one of the first-fruits
  which Galileo gathered by means of his newly
  invented telescope."

  Page 109: 'eyeryone' corrected to 'everyone'.

    "... --'the man in the moon'--with which everyone is familiar."

  Page 118: 'of' added - missing at page-turn.

    "They embrace some of the loftiest lunar peaks reaching...."

  Page 128: 'lnnar' corrected to 'lunar'.

    "The lunar night would be lit by our own earth,..."

  Page 157: 'imch' corrected to 'inch'.

    "[Illustration: FIG. 25.

    JUPITER, October 9, 1891, 9.30 p.m.; 3-7/8-inch, power 120.]"

  Page 158: 'eyepiece' corrected to 'eye-piece', to match all the rest.

    "... and a single lens eye-piece giving a power of 36."

  Page 205: removed extraneous 'of'.

    "The nucleus is the only part of [of] a comet's structure"

  Page 209: 'unconsidreed' corrected to 'unconsidered'.

    "... that some unconsidered little patch of haze...."

  Page 240: 'Ursae' corrected to 'Ursæ' to match entries in the Index,
  and for consistency.

    "... though Riccioli detected the duplicity of Zeta Ursæ Majoris
    (Mizar), in 1650,..."

  Page 248: 'in once and a half times,'. 'once' is as printed (and may
    have been intended). As it is part of a quote, it has been retained.

    "'Once in eleven months,' writes Miss Clerke,
      'the star mounts up in about 125 days from below the ninth
      to near the third, or even to the second magnitude; then,
      after a pause of two or three weeks, drops again to its
      former low level in once and a half times, on an average,
      the duration of its rise.'"

  Page 256: Page 256: 'Celæno' appears here in the text;
  'Celaeno, 256' is the Index entry. Both are as printed.

  Page 281: '285·9″' corrected to '285·9°'

    "EQUULEUS.

  [Sigma] 2737 or [epsilon] : 20 h. 54 m. + 3° 55′ : 5·7-6·2-7·1 :
    285·9°, 73·8° : 0·53″, 10·43″. Triple with large instruments."

  This follows the pattern of preceding

  DRACO.

  [Sigma] 2323 or 39: 18 h. 22 m. + 58° 45′ : 4·7-7·7-7·1 : 358·2°,
    20·8° : 3·68″, 88·8″. Triple.

  Page 282: '3·80°' corrected to '3·80″' to match pattern.

    "[Sigma] 2161 or [rho] : 17 h. 20 m. + 37° 14′ : 4-5·1 : 314·4° :
      3·80″. 'Gem of a beautiful coronet' (Webb)."

  Page 288: 'Lyrae' corrected to 'Lyræ'.

    "Lyræ [epsilon], double double, 241, 242;"

  Page 291: 'obsering' corrected to 'observing'.

    "methods of observing, 65-67;"

  Page 292: 'elongagations' corrected to 'elongations'.

    "orbit and elongations, 89;"

  Page 292: 'GUIDFORD' corrected to 'GUILDFORD'.

    "BILLING AND SONS, LTD., PRINTERS, GUILDFORD."